IQ Central Operating Manual

Transcription

Operating Manual
IQ
CENTRAL
®
Advanced Central System Software
Operating Manual
®
IQ Central
Advanced Central Traffic System Software
11/14/2008
p/n: 99-429 Rev 2
Copyright © 2008 Peek Traffic Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Information furnished by Peek is believed to be accurate and reliable, however Peek does not warranty the accuracy,
completeness, or fitness for use of any of the information furnished. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under
any intellectual property. Peek Traffic reserves the right to alter any of the Company's products or published technical data
relating thereto at any time without notice.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or via any electronic or
mechanical means for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the expressed, written permission of
Peek Traffic Corporation.
Peek Traffic Corporation
2511 Corporate Way
Palmetto, FL 34221 U.S.A.
Trademarks
IQ Central, IQ Data, IQ ATC, IQ Connect, Peek Traffic Corporation, 3000E, Multisonics, Transyt, 390CJ, 820A, Traconex,
TMM-500, US Traffic Corporation, USTC, Traconex, Traconet, DTI, and Display Technologies, Inc. are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Peek Traffic Corporation, in the USA and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
Document assembly: 81-1105
Document Content: 99-429 Rev 2
Document Cover Art: 99-428
Table Of Contents
Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual ......................................................1
Where to Find Information in this Manual.......................................................................................... 2
Contact Information ........................................................................................................................... 4
Update History of IQ Central ............................................................................................................. 5
Chapter 2 – Using the Interface .......................................................................................7
Logging Onto the System .................................................................................................................. 8
Logging Off the System ..................................................................................................................... 9
Menus.............................................................................................................................................. 10
Using the Mouse.............................................................................................................................. 14
Managing Module Windows ............................................................................................................ 15
Floating Windows ........................................................................................................................ 15
Minimized Windows ..................................................................................................................... 15
Tiled Windows ............................................................................................................................. 16
Cascaded Windows ..................................................................................................................... 17
Switching Between Open Modules.............................................................................................. 17
Using the Toolbars........................................................................................................................... 18
Activating/Deactivating Toolbars.................................................................................................. 18
Standard Toolbar.......................................................................................................................... 19
Map Configuration Toolbar........................................................................................................... 20
System Maintenance Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 21
User Administration Toolbar......................................................................................................... 22
Intersection Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 22
Message Sign Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 23
Camera Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 24
Devices Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 25
IQ Central Status Bar....................................................................................................................... 26
Subsystem Status Bar ................................................................................................................. 26
Status of Devices Responding and Connected ........................................................................... 30
System Date and Time ................................................................................................................ 32
Logged In User ............................................................................................................................ 33
Module Navigation in the Status Bar ........................................................................................... 33
Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................... 34
Automatic Log Off............................................................................................................................ 36
Profiles Module................................................................................................................................ 36
Closing IQ Central ........................................................................................................................... 36
Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and Connections.........................................................37
Introduction to Device Management................................................................................................ 38
Add/Edit Device Window ................................................................................................................. 39
Adding a Device .......................................................................................................................... 39
Editing a Device........................................................................................................................... 40
iii
Deleting a Device ......................................................................................................................... 40
Viewing Status - The NTCIP Device Status Module......................................................................... 41
Status of All Devices of a Type..................................................................................................... 42
Single Device Status - Device Logs .............................................................................................42
Single Device Status - Comm Stats ............................................................................................. 43
Single Device Status - Online History ..........................................................................................43
Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 45
Overview of Connections Module ................................................................................................ 45
Adding a Connection.................................................................................................................... 45
Editing a Connection .................................................................................................................... 45
Deleting a Connection.................................................................................................................. 45
Editing a Connection .................................................................................................................... 45
Device Types Module....................................................................................................................... 46
Adding a Device Type .................................................................................................................. 46
Editing a Device Type .................................................................................................................. 46
Deleting a Device Type ................................................................................................................ 46
Managing Device Groups ................................................................................................................ 47
Launching the Device Groups Module ......................................................................................... 47
Managing Device Groups............................................................................................................. 47
Launching the Device Groups Module ......................................................................................... 47
Using the Device Groups window ................................................................................................ 48
Creating a Group.......................................................................................................................... 50
Modifying an Existing Group ........................................................................................................ 51
Deleting a Group .......................................................................................................................... 52
Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management ..................................................................53
Traffic Network - Example Topography ............................................................................................ 54
Supported Traffic Controllers ........................................................................................................... 55
IQ Connect Hardware .................................................................................................................. 55
Multisonics Hardware................................................................................................................... 56
Using Peek Hardware with IQ Central ......................................................................................... 65
U.S. Traffic Hardware................................................................................................................... 76
Using Traconex Hardware with IQ Central................................................................................... 80
Using Transyt Hardware with IQ Central...................................................................................... 80
Configuring Intersection Display on Maps.................................................................................... 80
Configure Intersections Module ....................................................................................................... 81
Launching the Configure Intersection Module ............................................................................. 81
The Basic Steps to Set Up an Intersection .................................................................................. 81
The Configure Intersection Interface................................................................................................ 83
Adding an Icon to an Intersection ................................................................................................ 83
Changing the Appearance of an Intersection Icon ....................................................................... 85
Linking Intersection Icons to Data Objects................................................................................... 86
Setting Up Map Polling .................................................................................................................... 88
Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons .............................................................................. 88
Auto Populate Polling................................................................................................................... 88
The Upload/Download Interface ...................................................................................................... 90
Controller Upload and Download .................................................................................................90
Launching the Upload/Download Module .................................................................................... 91
iv
Table Of Contents
The Upload/Download Interface .................................................................................................. 92
Color Codes and Symbols in the Upload Download Module....................................................... 95
Getting Data From the Controller................................................................................................. 97
Sending Data to the Controller .................................................................................................... 98
Interacting With the Central Database......................................................................................... 98
Copying Settings Between Controllers ........................................................................................ 99
Central Override of Traffic Controllers and Masters ...................................................................... 101
Chapter 5 – Camera Management................................................................................ 103
Creating a Camera-NTCIP Device ................................................................................................ 104
Camera Control Module ................................................................................................................ 105
Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management ......................................................................... 107
Controls to Manage Traffic Signs .................................................................................................. 108
Sign Control Module ...................................................................................................................... 109
To Send a Changeable Message to the Sign ............................................................................ 109
Add a New Message ................................................................................................................. 109
Edit an Existing Message ...........................................................................................................110
Sign Message Edit Screen .........................................................................................................110
Sign Message Editor - Advanced Screen ...................................................................................110
Moving Text Editing Screen ........................................................................................................ 111
Displaying a Message Page with Preset Times.......................................................................... 111
Overview of the Sign Summary Module .........................................................................................113
Sign Configuration ......................................................................................................................113
Sign Status..................................................................................................................................113
Bulk Operations Module .................................................................................................................116
Diagnostic Topics........................................................................................................................116
Brightness Control Module .............................................................................................................117
Master Fonts Module......................................................................................................................117
Using the Font Editor Interface ...................................................................................................117
Editing a Font .............................................................................................................................117
Schedules Module ..........................................................................................................................118
Opening the Message Sign Schedules window .........................................................................118
Day Plans and Schedules ..........................................................................................................118
Error Logging on Message Signs .................................................................................................. 120
Event Groups and Events.......................................................................................................... 120
Clear Event Log ......................................................................................................................... 120
View Recorded Events .............................................................................................................. 121
SNMP Device Security Module ..................................................................................................... 122
Opening the Device Security Module ........................................................................................ 122
Device-Level Security................................................................................................................ 122
Chapter 7 - Incident Management Module .................................................................. 123
Configuring the Incident Spreadsheets.......................................................................................... 124
Defining Actions ......................................................................................................................... 125
v
Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central.............................................................127
Configuring a Scenario or Amber Alert........................................................................................... 127
What is a Scenario? ................................................................................................................... 127
What is an Amber Alert?............................................................................................................. 127
Activating an Amber Alert............................................................................................................... 128
Displaying a Scenario .................................................................................................................... 129
Creating a Scenario ................................................................................................................... 129
Standard Operating Procedure .................................................................................................. 130
Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central ..........................................................................131
Does your IQ Central use BMP mapping or GIS mapping?....................................................... 131
Getting Started With Maps ............................................................................................................. 133
Setting Map Paths in the IQ Central Database .............................................................................. 134
For BMP Map files:..................................................................................................................... 134
For GIS Map files: ...................................................................................................................... 134
Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons ................................................................................ 136
Overview of Map Management ...................................................................................................... 137
Opening the Map Management module..................................................................................... 137
Storing Map Data ....................................................................................................................... 137
Loading BMP Map Data ............................................................................................................. 137
Loading GIS Map Data............................................................................................................... 137
Managing BMP Maps ................................................................................................................. 138
Using the Map Management Module With GIS Maps ................................................................ 143
Creating Map Views ................................................................................................................... 144
Close the Map Management module. ........................................................................................ 145
Working With GIS Map Layers....................................................................................................... 146
Creating GIS Map Layer Groups................................................................................................ 146
Adding a Layer Group ................................................................................................................ 147
Changing the Name of a Layer Group ....................................................................................... 147
GIS Layers ................................................................................................................................. 148
Managing Devices on Maps........................................................................................................... 151
Placing Devices on Maps........................................................................................................... 151
Zoom Level Icons....................................................................................................................... 152
Placing an Icon on a BMP Map.................................................................................................. 152
Placing an Icon on a GIS Map ...................................................................................................153
Setting GIS Zoom Levels ........................................................................................................... 153
Viewing Maps................................................................................................................................. 156
Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface ........................................................................................ 157
Accessing Devices in the Map Viewer Module .......................................................................... 159
Selecting a Map in the Map Viewer............................................................................................ 159
Setting the Default Map.............................................................................................................. 160
Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events..............................................................161
Polling ............................................................................................................................................ 161
Scheduling ..................................................................................................................................... 162
Map Polling .................................................................................................................................... 162
Launching the Main Map Polling Configuration Window............................................................ 162
vi
Table Of Contents
Map Polling Configuration ............................................................................................................. 163
Opening the Map Polling Configuration module ........................................................................ 163
Using the Map Polling Configuration interface .......................................................................... 163
Using the Polling Assistant ........................................................................................................ 165
Performing a Batch Update ........................................................................................................... 168
Dynamic Object Configuration....................................................................................................... 169
Opening the Dynamic Object Configuration module ................................................................. 169
Using the Dynamic Object Configuration Interface.................................................................... 170
Log Polling..................................................................................................................................... 171
Overview of Log Polling............................................................................................................. 171
Launching the Device Type Data window.................................................................................. 171
Launching the Device Type Polling window .............................................................................. 171
About the System Log ............................................................................................................... 171
Device Type Data .......................................................................................................................... 172
Interface Controls ...................................................................................................................... 172
Device Type Polling ................................................................................................................... 174
Communications Failure Testing ................................................................................................... 175
Message Sign Scheduling ............................................................................................................. 176
Schedules Module ..................................................................................................................... 176
Opening the Message Sign Schedules window ........................................................................ 176
Day Plans and Schedules ......................................................................................................... 176
Scheduling of Traffic Controller Log Retrieval ............................................................................... 178
Installing the IQ Central Scheduler ............................................................................................ 178
Launching the Scheduler Interface............................................................................................ 181
Using the Scheduler Interface ................................................................................................... 182
Adding a Scheduled Task .......................................................................................................... 184
Modifying a Scheduled Task ...................................................................................................... 185
Deleting a Schedule Task .......................................................................................................... 186
Changing the Location of the Task Database ............................................................................ 186
Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring .................................................................................... 189
Using the Alarm Configuration Window ......................................................................................... 190
Launching the Alarm Configuration Window.............................................................................. 190
Alarm Configuration Interface .................................................................................................... 190
Using the Alarm Status Window .................................................................................................... 195
Launching the Alarm Status Module .......................................................................................... 195
Using the Alarm Status Interface ............................................................................................... 195
Setting Up a New Alarm ................................................................................................................ 197
Editing an Existing Alarm Condition............................................................................................... 199
Deleting an Alarm Condition .......................................................................................................... 199
Handling Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 200
Configuring the Alarms System ..................................................................................................... 202
Opening the Alarm Parameters ................................................................................................. 202
Setting the Parameters .............................................................................................................. 202
vii
Chapter 12 – Reports ....................................................................................................205
Using the Reports Interface ........................................................................................................... 205
Applying Report Filters............................................................................................................... 205
Generating Source Data for Reporting .......................................................................................... 207
Alarms and Status event logs..................................................................................................... 207
Controller Log Retrieval ............................................................................................................. 207
Message Sign Log Retrieval ...................................................................................................... 207
Exporting Report Data ................................................................................................................... 208
Creating a Custom Report ............................................................................................................. 209
Chapter 13 – User Management & Security ................................................................ 211
Managing User Accounts ............................................................................................................... 212
Adding a New User Account ......................................................................................................212
Deleting a User Account............................................................................................................. 212
Changing the Security Level of a User....................................................................................... 213
Changing Your Password........................................................................................................... 213
Setting a User Password............................................................................................................ 214
User Administration Module ........................................................................................................... 215
Managing Security ......................................................................................................................... 216
Currently Logged In Users ......................................................................................................... 216
Access Levels Module ................................................................................................................... 218
Changing the Access Level for a Module Control ...................................................................... 219
Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup ..........................................................221
Working in the IQ Central Access Database .................................................................................. 221
System Logging ............................................................................................................................. 223
Size Event Log Module .............................................................................................................. 223
Extended Logging ...................................................................................................................... 223
User Comments Module ............................................................................................................ 224
Archive and Restore Module.......................................................................................................... 225
Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization .......................................................................227
Device Icon Management .............................................................................................................. 228
Editing an Icon ........................................................................................................................... 229
Adding an Icon ........................................................................................................................... 229
Link Icon to Device Type Module ................................................................................................... 231
BlockBuilder & FormBuilder ........................................................................................................... 232
BlockBuilder Module .................................................................................................................. 232
Using the BlockBuilder Module ..................................................................................................232
FormBuilder Module................................................................................................................... 232
Glossary .........................................................................................................................233
Index ...............................................................................................................................249
viii
Table Of Contents
Figures
Figure 1 – The sections of this manual ................................................................................................. 1
Figure 2 – Several module windows open in IQ Central..................................................................... 15
Figure 3 – Several module windows minimized.................................................................................. 15
Figure 4 – Several module windows tiled horizontally ....................................................................... 16
Figure 5 – Several module windows tiled vertically ........................................................................... 16
Figure 6 – Several module windows arrayed in a cascade ................................................................ 17
Figure 7 – Right-click in the toolbar area to open the toolbar selection menu .................................... 18
Figure 8 – Closing a toolbar................................................................................................................ 18
Figure 9 – Standard Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 19
Figure 10 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the BMP version of IQ Central)...................................... 20
Figure 11 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the GIS version of IQ Central) ....................................... 20
Figure 12 – System Maintenance Toolbar .......................................................................................... 21
Figure 13 – User Administration Toolbar ............................................................................................ 22
Figure 14 – Intersection Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 22
Figure 15 – Message Sign Toolbar..................................................................................................... 23
Figure 16 – Camera Toolbar............................................................................................................... 24
Figure 17 – Devices Toolbar............................................................................................................... 25
Figure 18 – Subsystem status in the IQ Central status bar ............................................................... 26
Figure 19 – Data Manager icon tool tip.............................................................................................. 27
Figure 20 – Quick History of Data Manager operational status ......................................................... 27
Figure 21 – Tooltip for the NTCIP Server status icon ........................................................................ 28
Figure 22 – Quick History of NTCIP Server operational status ......................................................... 29
Figure 23 – Alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar ................................................................ 29
Figure 24 – Alarms details displayed in a tooltip................................................................................ 30
Figure 25 – Device status in the Status bar ....................................................................................... 31
Figure 26 – Device Status tool tip ...................................................................................................... 31
Figure 27 – Current date and time as displayed in the IQ Central status bar.................................... 32
Figure 28 – Current User icon and label in the IQ Central status bar ................................................ 33
Figure 29 – Module Navigation in the Status bar................................................................................ 33
Figure 30 – Assigning a Device to a Connection and a Device Type ................................................. 37
Figure 31 – Add/Edit Device Window ................................................................................................. 39
Figure 32 – Device Status module...................................................................................................... 41
Figure 33 – Device Status module for a single device type ................................................................ 42
Figure 34 – Device Status module - Device Logs pane...................................................................... 43
Figure 35 – Device Status module - Comm Stats pane...................................................................... 43
Figure 36 – Device Status module - Online History pane ................................................................... 44
Figure 37 – Parts of the Device Groups window................................................................................. 48
Figure 38 – Be sure to Save the new group once you've created it ................................................... 50
Figure 39 – Be sure to Save the changes to the group ...................................................................... 51
Figure 40 – The Delete Group button in the Device Groups module.................................................. 52
Figure 41 – Example IQ Central traffic controller network .................................................................. 54
Figure 42 – Overview of the Configure Intersection interface............................................................. 83
Figure 43 – Selecting an image for an intersection element............................................................... 85
Figure 44 – Linking data to an intersection element ........................................................................... 86
Figure 45 – Linking to alarmGroupState.2 .......................................................................................... 87
Figure 46 – Auto Populate Polling button from the Configure Intersections window .......................... 88
Figure 47 – Auto populate polling warning message .......................................................................... 88
Figure 48 – Auto populate polling completion message ..................................................................... 89
Figure 49 – Upload/Download Module................................................................................................ 90
Figure 50 – The Upload/Download module with no device selected .................................................. 92
Figure 51 – Interface elements of the Upload/Download module ....................................................... 92
Figure 52 – Number entry window ...................................................................................................... 93
Figure 53 – Phase selection entry window ......................................................................................... 94
Figure 54 – Example of an Enumerated value selection window ....................................................... 95
Figure 55 – Yellow and green cell backgrounds in Upload/Download tables ..................................... 95
Figure 56 – Purple cell background in the Upload/Download module ................................................ 96
ix
Figure 57 – An example of choosing the scope of data to retrieve from the controller ....................... 97
Figure 58 – An example of choosing the scope of data to send to the controller................................ 98
Figure 59 – Controls in the Upload/Download module to interact with the IQ Central database ........ 99
Figure 60 – Copy Device Data module ............................................................................................... 99
Figure 61 – Central Override control window .................................................................................... 101
Figure 62 – Sign Message Edit screen ............................................................................................. 110
Figure 63 – Advanced Sign Message Edit screen ............................................................................ 111
Figure 64 – Moving Text Editing screen............................................................................................ 111
Figure 65 – Font View screen ........................................................................................................... 117
Figure 66 – BMP maps versus GIS maps ......................................................................................... 131
Figure 67 – Example BMP map file displayed in the Map Management module .............................. 138
Figure 68 – Placing a zoom area ...................................................................................................... 141
Figure 70 – Green zoom area icon indicating that the zone has been saved ................................... 142
Figure 69 – Placing a zoom area ...................................................................................................... 146
Figure 69 – Layer Groups module..................................................................................................... 147
Figure 70 – Using the Layers module to configure GIS map layers.................................................. 149
Figure 71 – Verification is requested when deleting a layer.............................................................. 150
Figure 72 – Setting Device Zoom Levels .......................................................................................... 154
Figure 73 – Map Viewer interface (BMP version).............................................................................. 156
Figure 74 – Map Viewer interface - GIS version ............................................................................... 157
Figure 75 – BMP Map Viewer ........................................................................................................... 157
Figure 76 – GIS Map Viewer ............................................................................................................. 158
Figure 77 – Map Views menu............................................................................................................ 160
Figure 78 – Interface elements of the Map Polling Configuration module......................................... 163
Figure 79 – Intersection Polling Assistant dialog box........................................................................ 166
Figure 80 – Batch Update button in the Map Polling Configuration window ..................................... 168
Figure 81 – Batch Update dialog box ................................................................................................ 168
Figure 82 – Interface elements of the Dynamic Objects Configuration window ................................ 169
Figure 83 – Device Type Log polling window.................................................................................... 174
Figure 84 – Scheduled Task Editor ................................................................................................... 182
Figure 85 – Toolbar buttons in the Scheduled Task Editor ............................................................... 182
Figure 86 – Complete task details..................................................................................................... 183
Figure 87 – Task creation dialog box ................................................................................................ 184
Figure 88 – Selecting multiple tasks for deletion............................................................................... 186
Figure 89 – Options dialog box for the System Scheduler ................................................................ 187
Figure 90 – Alarm Configuration window .......................................................................................... 191
Figure 91 – Device Hierarchy - 'View by Groups'.............................................................................. 192
Figure 92– Alarm Configuration window - "View by Type" ................................................................ 193
Figure 93 – Alarm Configuration window - "All Alarms" .................................................................... 194
Figure 94 – Alarm Status window...................................................................................................... 195
Figure 95 – Features of the alarm conditions list in the Alarm Configuration window....................... 197
Figure 96 – Example of data fields in the expanded alarm conditions view...................................... 198
Figure 97 – A critical alarm configured to display a tooltip popup message ..................................... 200
Figure 98 – Acknowledge the alarm to temporarily remove the tooltip message from your IQ Central display
.................................................................................................................................................... 200
Figure 99 – The Alarm Status module docked to the IQ Central window and auto refreshing ......... 201
Figure 100 – Current alarm status tooltip visible when hovering over the alarm icon ....................... 201
Figure 101 – Alarm System Settings - Critical settings ..................................................................... 202
Figure 102 – Alarm System Settings - Warning settings................................................................... 204
Figure 103 – Alarm System Settings - Info settings .......................................................................... 204
Figure 104 – User Administration module ......................................................................................... 215
Figure 105 – Each login that will be shut down sees this message ................................................. 217
Figure 106 – MDI selection in the Access Levels window................................................................. 218
Figure 107 – IQ Central database table listing .................................................................................. 222
Figure 108 – IQ Central Archive and Restore module ...................................................................... 225
x
Table Of Contents
Tables
Table 1 – IQ Central Update Release History ....................................................................................... 5
Table 2 – IQ Central Menus ............................................................................................................... 10
Table 3 – Buttons on the Standard Toolbar ........................................................................................ 19
Table 4 – Map Configuration Toolbar.................................................................................................. 20
Table 5 – System Maintenance Toolbar.............................................................................................. 21
Table 6 – User Administration Toolbar................................................................................................ 22
Table 7 – Intersection Toolbar............................................................................................................. 22
Table 8 – Message Sign Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 23
Table 9 – Camera Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 24
Table 10 – Devices Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 25
Table 11 – Data Manager Status icons ............................................................................................... 26
Table 12 – NTCIP Server Status icons ............................................................................................... 28
Table 13 – Alarms Status icons, from lowest alert level to highest ..................................................... 30
Table 14 – Logged In User icons ........................................................................................................ 33
Table 15 – Keyboard Shortcuts........................................................................................................... 34
Table 16 – 820A parameters editable in the Upload/Download module ............................................. 56
Table 17 – Peek 3000E Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module ................. 65
Table 18 – IQ ATC Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module......................... 76
Table 19 – Icons by Zoom Level in the Configure Intersection module .............................................. 84
Table 20 – Icons used to Configure an Intersection............................................................................ 84
Table 21 – Keyboard shortcuts to edit phase parameters................................................................... 94
Table 22 – Upload/Download module 'Difference' icons ..................................................................... 96
Table 23 – Toolbar buttons used to perform traffic sign management.............................................. 108
Table 24 – Diagnostic Tests available for Message Signs................................................................ 116
Table 25 – Default Layer Values ....................................................................................................... 135
Table 26 – Functions available from device icons in maps ............................................................... 151
Table 27 – Commands available in the device icon drop-down menu .............................................. 159
Table 28 – Traffic Controller support for scheduled log retrieval ...................................................... 178
Table 29 – Pre-configured User Accounts ........................................................................................ 211
xi
xii
Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating
Manual
Welcome to the Operating Manual for the IQ Central software system. This manual will help
you understand the general operation, the controls, options and operating environments of
the IQ Central software system. To find the information you need, you can start by looking in
the chapters describing one of the following topics, or use the Index or Glossary to find the
information you are seeking.
Figure 1 – The sections of this manual
1
Where to Find Information in this Manual
The discussions of IQ Central have been divided up into the following chapters in this book:
Chapter 1 - Welcome to IQ Central
An overview of the structure of this manual, information about contacting Peek Traffic to
request additional help, and some detail about how IQ Central has evolved over time.
Chapter 2 - Working with the Interface
Discribes how to use the standard Windows interface elements in IQ Central (mouse,
menus, toolbars, status bar, work area) as well as a listing of the available keyboard
shortcuts available in the application.
Chapter 3 - Managing Devices and Connections
IQ Central uses a central device and connection management scheme, providing unified
tools to add, edit and delete database instances of devices, no matter what type, and
communications channels, no matter the connection type. This chapter also describes how
to edit and implement device-type-based standard templates. and how to manage time
synchronization functions.
Chapter 4 - Traffic Control Management
This chapter describes how to use the parts of the IQ Central interface that have been
created to specifically support the operation of traffic controllers, master controllers, and
their supporting hardware. This includes some details about what devices are supported
and at what levels, information about setting up map displays of traffic controllers, the
Upload/Download module for controller database management, and the Central Override
capability of the Map Viewer. It also discusses the Coordination check function.
Chapter 5 - Camera Management
This section describes how to use IQ Central with NTCIP and Ethernet cameras, including
how to establish connections for data and video, and modules to control and interact with
these cameras.
Chapter 6 - Traffic Sign Management
This chapter describes the interface elements in IQ Central that support the operation and
management of variable traffic message signs. These include message selection and
editing, font management, diagnostics tools, error logging, message scheduling, and
device-level security for signs.
Chapter 7 - Automatic Incident Management
This chapter describes how to use the Automatic Incident management tools of IQ Central,
which allow you to configure the application to respond to inputs from devices and respond
in a predetermined manner. This kind of 'macro programming' tool for IQ Central would
allow for the automatic change of message signs or traffic patterns based on status data
provided by those or other devices in your traffic network.
2
Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual
Chapter 8 - Crisis Management
This section describes the tools within IQ Central that can be used by operators to trigger
emergency situation scenarios, such as a change in traffic operation caused by an Amber
Alert or some other short time frame crisis.
Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central
This chapter provides a great deal of information about the ways to set up and operate the
sophisticated mapping system in IQ Central. Whether using BMP map backgrounds or ESRI
GIS map data files, IQ Central has tools to manage how maps appear and interact with the
operator.
Chapter 10 - Polling and Scheduling Events
This chapter describes the variety of tools that can be used in IQ Central to automatically
request data retrieval from field devices (polling) and to automatically send commands to
field hardware at predetermined times (event scheduling).
Chapter 11 - Alarm Monitoring
This chapter describes how devices are monitored by IQ Central. The alarms system is a
global application within IQ Central that allows the operator to set conditions that will trigger
alarms. The program then provides tools to monitor the devices to see if these alarms occur.
Chapter 12 - Reports
IQ Central uses the Microsoft Office application suite as its background tools for handling
data. This chapter describes how to use these tools in conjunction with IQ Central to create
custom reports and to export data. This chapter also describes how to use the controller
database print-out feature.
Chapter 13 - User Management and Security
This section describes the modules in IQ Central that are used to manage user accounts
and to control system security.
Chapter 14 - Database Maintenance and Archiving
This chapter describes how to maintain IQ Central's central database, as well as how to
archive data to backup files and retrieve data when needed.
Chapter 15 - IQ Central Customization
IQ Central comes with many powerful tools to change its appearance and operation. This
chapter provides a rudimentary description of these tools.
Glossary
A collection of definitions of the most commonly used traffic industry terminology and IQ
Central terms.
3
Contact Information
For additional help with IQ Central, technical questions, or information about any of the
other Peek intelligent traffic systems products, please contact Peek Traffic using any of the
following methods:
Email: tech.support@peektraffic.com
Phone: Toll free in the U.S.: (800) 245-7660 or at (941) 845-1200. In either case, simply
mention the product for which you wish to receive assistance and your call will be
directed to the proper support representative. For account information concerning IQ
Central, contact Mr. Cory Dibert at (941) 224-6413.
Fax: (941) 845-1504. Again, simply mention the product and the issue for which you would
like to receive assistance, and be sure to list your return phone or fax number so that our
support representative can get back to you.
Website: Some additional information about all of the Peek Traffic products is available at
the company website:
http://www.peektraffic.com
4
Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual
Update History of IQ Central
This section provides a historical record of how the IQ Central software has evolved over
time.
Table 1 – IQ Central Update Release History
Release
Features and Enhancements
Version 1.0
Initial release. Basic support for management of traffic signs, NTCIP
cameras, and remote sensors.
Date
Version 1.1
Reliability and speed improvements. Improved automatic installation. Basic
support for Peek 3000 and M3000 controllers.
January 2006
Version 1.2
Added basic support for Multisonics 820A controllers and OSAM 32
master controllers. Dramatically improved communications reliability with all
devices. Added interface elements to handle all Peek controller and
Multisonics controller data fields. Updated toolbar system. Standardized the
menu system. Initial release of the traffic controller upload/download module.
Added log retrieval for Peek and Multisonics controllers. First release of the IQ
Central help system. First product release notes. Improved map management
in both BMP and GIS environments. Support for more image file types.
October 2006
Version 1.3
Faster and more reliable Upload/Download module for controller interaction.
Improved interfaces in the GIS map modules (View, Management, Layers, etc.)
Basic support for IQ ATC and ASTC traffic controllers. Greatly enhanced
Archive and Restore Module.
April 2007
Version 1.4
Added basic support for Traconex 390CJ controllers and TMM500 master
controllers. Added basic support for Transyt 1880EL controllers and
3800EL master controllers. Added log retrieval from Traconex and Transyt
controllers. Added central override capability from the Map Viewer module.
Added the automatic map polling assistant to help in configuring map polling
data for traffic controllers.
September
2007
Version 1.5
Implementation of a new global device alarms system. Added ability to
collect devices into user-defined groupings. Improved map polling configuration
interface. Improved functionality in the IQ Central status bar.
February 2008
Version 1.6
Added the ability to generate a device's database as a PDF export, which can
also be printed. Added the Coord Check functionality; implemented in version
1.6 only for the Traconex 390CJ controllers, but configured to add this feature
to more devices in the next few update releases. Added the ability to edit and
store a default database for each device type, which will be used whenever a
new device of that type is added to IQ Central.
June 2008
Version 1.7
Added basic support for the LMD-9200 controller. Added the new device Time
Sync module. Added the ability to override the traffic pattern on a whole group
of controllers at once. Updated the Upload/Download module screens for the
3000E to more accurately represent the layout of the data in the controller,
particularly the coordination parameters.
September
2008
July 2005
5
6
Chapter 2 – Using the Interface
IQ Central functions as a framework for a set of traffic hardware control modules. Each
module opens in its own window and edits data in the IQ Central database. The framework
provides a set of master menus, a status bar at the bottom of the window, shortcuts for
navigating using only the keyboard, and a set of three toolbars along the left edge of the
main window. The following topics provide more details about each of these program control
methods.
Using the Mouse
IQ Central Menus
Managing Module Windows
Toolbars
Keyboard shortcuts for navigating the interface
the IQ Central Status Bar
Global IQ Central Modules
However, for a new user, probably the most important skills to gain when starting to use IQ
Central are learning to Log On to the system, Log Off the system, and Closing the program.
7
Logging Onto the System
The Log On screen is where you enter your Name and Password so that you can access
the sign control software. You must log on to the system before you can access any of the
modules or make any changes to the database. The administrator of your IQ Central system
controls user accounts, so if you need an account, contact that person.
8
Logging Off the System
Use the Log Off option to log out of the currently logged on user account within IQ Central.
This function does not close the application. If you want to close the software, you must
choose the Exit option. (To exit, go to File > Exit on the menus, or press Alt-F4.)
If you are logged on as a particular user and you need to log on as another user, you must
first log off. Once you have done this, the Log On option from the File menu will be enabled
so that you can Log On. If you are connected to a Device when you log off, that connection
will automatically be closed by the system.
9
Menus
This is an overview of the main menu system of IQ Central. The menus in IQ Central do not
change as you navigate around the system, although the commands that are visible on the
menus do change based on what security level the current logged-in user has. The menus
described here show all available commands, which is what a user with Administrative
access sees in the interface.
Table 2 – IQ Central Menus
Menu
File
View
Devices
10
Command
Purpose
Log on...
Only active when no user is presently logged into this client of
IQ Central. Opens a dialog box where a user can enter a user
name and password.
Log off
Only appears when a user is presently logged into this client.
Asks for verification before logging out of the current user
account. This option does not close IQ Central.
Change Password
Only appears when a user is logged into the system. Allows
the currently logged in user to change his or her password.
Exit
Shuts down the IQ Central client on this workstation. Caution:
This will shut down the server components of the program if it
is chosen on the IQ Central server.
Status
Opens the Device Status module
Map
Opens the View Map module
Incident Management
Opens the Incident Management module
User Comments...
Opens the User Comments module
Reports...
Opens the IQ Central Reports selection window
Large Tool Icons
Toggles between small and large icons on the IQ Central
toolbars that appear on the left edge of the main IQ Central
window.
Timeout
Opens a window where you can set the user timeout settings
for this account.
Add New Device...
Opens the Device Configurations window, where new devices
can be created in the IQ Central database
Intersections > Upload/Download
Opens the traffic controller upload/download window. This
window allows the operator to send and retrieve configuration
files, or 'databases', to and from traffic controllers in the field.
Intersections > Copy Database
Provides an interface to copy device databases, or sections of
device databases between traffic controllers of the same type
Message Signs > Control
Opens the Sign Control module where stored messages and
display options can be selected.
Message Signs > Scenarios & Amber
Alerts
Opens the Scenarios and Amber Alerts module, which is used
to manage crisis situations.
Message Signs > Summary...
Opens the Sign Summary module where the operator can
view and set many of the internal parameters of a message
sign.
Message Signs > Bulk Operation
Opens the Bulk Operations module, which can be used to
send 'bulk' or 'batch' commands to a single message sign. It
can also be used to perform diagnostic tests on a sign.
Menu
Maps
Command
Purpose
Message Signs > Brightness Control...
Opens the Sign Brightness Control module, which can be
used to manually control the brightness of sign light sources.
Message Signs > Edit Master Fonts...
Opens the Font View module, which can be used to send and
retrieve font files to and from message signs.
Message Signs > Edit Schedules...
Opens the Scheduler module, which can be used to design
and activate event schedules for IQ Central devices.
Message Signs > Error Logs...
Opens the Error Logs module. This allows the operator to
define what objects and conditions will generate an error, and
to view events that have been recorded to the event log.
Cameras > Control
The Camera Control module allows the operator to use IQ
Central to control and configure an NTCIP-capable camera,
including parameters such as zoom, focus, tilt, iris, and zones
and labels.
Cameras > Browser
Opens the NTCIP Camera Browser, which allows an operator
to retrieve live video feeds from a field camera.
Cameras > Video Connections
Opens the Camera Video Configuration module, where the
video feed of an NTCIP camera that is attached to IQ Central
can be set up.
SNMP Device Security
Allows the operator to set the SNMP security parameters for
any NTCIP network device configured within IQ Central.
Time Sync
Interactive device-by-device time synchronization module
Map Management
Opens the map management module. The controls that are
available depend on whether you have the BMP or GIS
version of IQ Central. In either case, this module allows you to
view and set up map views.
Place Icon on Map
Opens the Place Icon on Map module, where the operator can
place icons for any of the currently configured devices on any
of the currently available maps.
Intersection Displays
Opens the Configure Intersection module, where the
graphics that are displayed on the map for a particular device
type and zoom level is defined.
GIS Layer Groups
Opens the Add/Edit Layer Groups screen. This option is only
available in the GIS version of IQ Central.
GIS Layers
Opens the Layers module, where GIS layers, their color
coding, their styles and layer characteristics can be defined.
This option is only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.
GIS Zoom Settings
Opens the Device Zoom Levels module, where GIS map zoom
levels can be associated with each type of device. This option
is only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.
Polling Options > Map Polling
Configuration
Opens the Map Polling Configuration module, where polling of
devices displayed on maps can be configured. This is where
you set up how often data is retrieved from devices when they
are displayed on a map.
Polling Options > Dynamic Object
Configuration
Opens the STMP Polling module, where the operator can
configure the object IDs of an NTCIP device so that the
desired data points can be retrieved during polling operation.
Polling Options > Refresh Server
Polling
This options requests and displays updated polling data on
11
Menu
Command
Purpose
any devices that are displayed on maps within IQ Central.
Tools
12
Connections
Opens the Overview of Connections module, where
communications channels can be defined, modified, or deleted
in IQ Central, including direct-connect serial connections,
modem connections, or Ethernet connections.
Devices
Opens the Overview of Device Configurations control. Shows
a complete list of devices and the communications channel(s)
they use, from which you can edit or add devices.
Device Groups
Opens the Device Groups management module. Devices can
be grouped together under a single group name for alarm
management purposes.
Archive and Restore...
Opens the Archive and Restore module, which can be used to
store the contents of one or more tables of your IQ Central
database, or to retrieve them from an archive file so they can
be restored to the system.
System Scheduler
Opens the IQ Central event scheduler
Print Database
Allows you to export a device database to a PDF file, which
can then be printed or stored to an external file
Alarms > Configuration
Opens the module that allows you to create and manage data
from devices that will trigger an alarm.
Alarms > Status
Opens a module that allows you to view, filter, sort and print
the current status of any alarms detected by IQ Central.
Alarms > History
Opens the alarm history viewer
User Administration > Add/Delete
Opens the User Administration module and allows an operator
with sufficient rights to add, edit or delete user accounts.
User Administration > Access Levels
Opens the Access Levels module, where the security level
required to access the various parts of the IQ Central interface
can be defined.
User Administration > Profiles
Opens the Profiles module. Profiles allow you to set different
access levels for different levels of operators. Profiles function
as an advanced version of user access level assignment. We
recommend that users avoid modifying any of the Profiles
settings.
User Administration > Currently
Logged On Users
This command shows the operator a listing of all of the users
that are currently logged into IQ Central.
Logging Options > Device Type Data
Opens a module that allows the operator to configure device
objects for which he or she wishes to generate current status
messages.
Logging Options >
Device Type Polling
Opens the Device Log Polling module. Allows the operator to
set polling frequency and other polling values by device.
Logging Options > Size Event Log...
This command can be used to set the maximum event log
size.
Logging Options > Extended Logging
This toggles the 'extended' logging option on and off. A check
mark appears next to this when extended logging is active.
Advanced Options >
Icon Management
The Icon Management module is used to attach a device icon
to a device type.
Menu
Window
Help
Command
Purpose
Advanced Options > Device Types
Opens the Enter/Edit Device Type module. This allows an
operator to create or edit the types of devices that can be
managed in IQ Central.
Advanced Options >
Link Icon to Device Type
Allows an operator to link an icon that is already stored in IQ
Central to be attached to a certain device type. These icons
then appear in the map module.
Advanced Options > BlockBuilder
This advanced module is used to assign blocks of data (from a
device's database) to NTCIP object IDs. This is an advanced
part of the process of creating new types of devices within IQ
Central. BlockBuilder should only be used with the supervision
of Peek Traffic personnel.
Advanced Options > FormBuilder
This advanced module is used to create screens, or 'forms', to
allow the editing and control of a new type of device within IQ
Central. This is an advanced part of the process of creating
new types of devices. FormBuilder should only be used with
the supervision of Peek Traffic personnel.
Options
Opens the IQ Central application-wide parameters window
Toolbars
Performs the same function as would right-clicking in the
toolbar area in order to select which toolbars will be visible
within IQ Central. Place a check next to one of the toolbars to
make it appear in the interface.
Tile Vertical
Arranges the open windows so that they automatically fit
vertically into the available space of the full IQ Central window.
Note: Some modules, such as the message sign management
tools will not respond to this command.
Tile Horizontal
Arranges the open windows so that all open windows
automatically fit horizontally into the available space of the full
IQ Central window. Note: Some modules, such as the
message sign management tools will not respond to this
command.
Cascade
Arranges all open windows into a cascade from the top left
down to the lower right, in the order that the windows were
opened.
<#>
The Window menu shows a list of the currently open modules.
Selecting one switches the focus to that module.
IQ Central Help
Opens this help system.
About IQ Central
Shows the About window for the IQ Central application, where
you can see the version information for the application, as well
as see details about your PC and OS environment.
13
Using the Mouse
You control the IQ Central interface by left-clicking with the mouse pointer on the control you
wish to modify or activate. You can typically edit an item that appears in one of the lists of
the application by double-clicking on it to open an editing window. In some places, you also
have more options for a control that can be accessed by right-clicking on the control. This
opens a context-specific menu.
Many items in the interface also now provide 'Tooltips' details which can be accessed by
simply 'hovering' the mouse pointer over the control. And double-clicking on some buttons
will open status windows. These last two items are especially useful in the IQ Central status
bar.
Note
14
Some people like to avoid using the mouse as much as possible, and can
achieve higher speed when using an application by sticking with keyboard
controls. A complete list of keyboard controls for IQ Central are available
here.
Managing Module Windows
Modules in IQ Central can either be opened so that they take up the full display window with
the IQ Central framework, or within a floating window. In either case, multiple module can be
open at one time, and they can be displayed in a number of different ways.
Floating Windows
The normal method for modules to open within IQ Central are as floating windows.
Figure 2 – Several module windows open in IQ Central
Minimized Windows
Minimizing open module windows will place them in minimized form at the bottom corner of
the current IQ Central window. If you resize the window, the minimized windows will remain
where they were placed.
Figure 3 – Several module windows minimized
15
Tiled Windows
The Windows menu has a couple of controls for tiling module windows, as shown below.
Tiling Horizontally attempts to resize all open (non-minimized) module windows so they
appear one atop another within the IQ Central window.
Figure 4 – Several module windows tiled horizontally
Tiling Vertically attempts to place them all next to one another.
Figure 5 – Several module windows tiled vertically
Note
16
Some IQ Central module windows cannot be resized in the environment.
These modules will not tile using the Windows menu commands.
Cascaded Windows
The Cascade Windows command in the Window menu automatically arranges all open,
non-minimized modules so that the upper left corners are arrayed in a cascade. This
window sort is perhaps the most useful, as it immediately makes all open windows
available. The desired module can be brought to the front by simply clicking on its title bar.
Figure 6 – Several module windows arrayed in a cascade
Switching Between Open Modules
There are several ways to switch between open modules within IQ Central:
Mouse selection - Of course, the most obvious method to switch between modules is to
just click on the module to bring it to the front. However, if the front module is
maximized, this may be a bit difficult, so there are a couple other options...
Windows menu - If you go into the Windows menu, the bottom of it lists all of the
currently open modules. Selecting a window there will bring it to the front. Or you can
use the keyboard shortcut ALT-W,# (where a # is listed in the menu for each window.)
Status bar - Each open module window is also shown as an item in the IQ Central status
bar. Just click on the desired module entry to bring its window to the front.
17
Using the Toolbars
This is an overview of the toolbars in IQ Central. The toolbars were extensively changed in
version 1.2 of the software. Previously, the toolbars were linked to the three levels of
security and function (Operations, Maintenance, Administration), but they now are grouped
functionally. By default, all users first see only the Standard and Devices toolbars when
opening IQ Central. Each user account can select which toolbars will be visible when the
application is launched, and where each toolbar is docked. Toolbars can be docked on any
of the four sides of the IQ Central window, or they can float above the application. The
current state of the toolbars is saved each time a user logs out or shuts down the program.
Activating/Deactivating Toolbars
There are a couple of ways to change which toolbars are visible in IQ Central.
Go to the Tools menu and open the Toolbars list. In this listing you can toggle which
toolbars are visible and which are hidden
Right-click anywhere on the open toolbars or toolbar regions to see the same list of
available toolbars as shown in the Tools menu. (Shown below) Select which toolbar to
activate or deactivate.
Figure 7 – Right-click in the toolbar area to open the toolbar selection menu
When a toolbar is floating, you also have the
option to close it by clicking on the close button
that appears at the upper right corner of its
window. (Shown below)
Figure 8 – Closing a toolbar
18
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, along with the Devices toolbar, is one of the default toolbars for new
user accounts. This toolbar provides links to the modules that are most commonly used by
IQ Central users.
Figure 9 – Standard Toolbar
Table 3 – Buttons on the Standard Toolbar
Button
Command
Status (Device Status)
Map View
Reports
Devices
Device Groups
Connections
Map Data (Polling Configuration)
Refresh Server Polling
Upload/Download for Controller devices
IQ Central Help
19
Map Configuration Toolbar
The Map Configuration toolbar provides access to the most common commands or
functions associated with managing and using the map interface in IQ Central. The exact
buttons that appear on this module are slightly different depending on whether you are using
IQ Central with BMP Mapping or IQ Central with GIS Mapping.
Figure 10 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the BMP version of IQ Central)
Figure 11 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the GIS version of IQ Central)
Table 4 – Map Configuration Toolbar
Button
Command
Map Management
Place Icon on Map
Intersection Displays
GIS Layer Group (appears in GIS version only)
GIS Layers (appears in GIS version only)
GIS Zoom Settings (appears in GIS version only)
Map Data (Poll Data Configuration)
Dynamic Objects (STMP Polling)
20
System Maintenance Toolbar
The System Maintenance toolbar groups together ten of the most commonly used IQ
Central administration tools.
Figure 12 – System Maintenance Toolbar
Table 5 – System Maintenance Toolbar
Button
Command
Archive and Restore
FTP Data
System Scheduler
Device Type Data
Device Type Polling
Size Event Log
Extended Logging
Icon Management
Link Icon to Device Type
21
User Administration Toolbar
The User Administration toolbar provides access to the four modules used to manage user
accounts within IQ Central.
Figure 13 – User Administration Toolbar
Table 6 – User Administration Toolbar
Button
Command
User Administration
Access Levels
Profiles
Currently Logged On Users
Intersection Toolbar
The Intersection Toolbar provides two buttons to access the modules to manage traffic
intersection hardware in IQ Central.
Figure 14 – Intersection Toolbar
Table 7 – Intersection Toolbar
Button
Command
Upload/Download
Intersection Display
22
Message Sign Toolbar
The Message Sign Toolbar provides links to the nine most common modules for interact
with Message Signs.
Figure 15 – Message Sign Toolbar
Table 8 – Message Sign Toolbar
Button
Command
Message Sign Control
Scenarios & Amber Alerts
Sign Summary
Bulk Operations
Brightness Control
Master Fonts
Edit Schedules
Error Logs
23
Camera Toolbar
The three buttons in the Camera toolbar link to the three modules used to configure,
connect to, and use NTCIP-compatible cameras within IQ Central.
Figure 16 – Camera Toolbar
Table 9 – Camera Toolbar
Button
Command
Camera Control
Camera Browser
Video Connections
24
Devices Toolbar
The Devices toolbar, along with the Standard toolbar, is one of the default toolbars for new
user accounts. While the Standard toolbar links to the most used general interfaces in IQ
Central, the Devices toolbar provides links to the most often used device-specific controls.
Figure 17 – Devices Toolbar
Table 10 – Devices Toolbar
Button
Command
Camera Control
Camera Browser
Message Sign Control
Scenarios & Amber Alerts
Sign Summary
Bulk Operations
Upload/Download
25
IQ Central Status Bar
The IQ Central status bar, located at the bottom of the main IQ Central window, provides
feedback to the user about the operation of the application. The left end of the status bar
shows the current state of several of IQ Central's subsystems. The right end of the toolbar is
used to show which modules are open within IQ Central.
Subsystem Status Bar
The left end of the basic IQ Central Status bar, as shown below, displays information about
seven of IQ Central's subsystems.
Figure 18 – Subsystem status in the IQ Central status bar
Data Manager Status
The Data Manager is a Windows service that runs in the background and supports the
operation of IQ Central. It functions as the agent that makes sure data gets stored and
retrieved from the IQ Central database correctly. This status icon in the Status Bar shows
several states that are possible for the Data Manager.
Table 11 – Data Manager Status icons
Icon
Description of Status
Normal status. The Data Manager is up and running
normally and the database is synced with IQ Central.
Critical Change. When the icon blinks orange, it
indicates that the user has made a change to either
the Device table or the Connections table. Normally,
syncing of the database will occur automatically and
you will not see this alert. However, IQ Central may
occasionally need to be restarted to get the database
back in sync with the updated device and connections
lists. After a restart of IQ Central, the Data Manager
will return to the Normal state.
Not initialized. This is typically a short-lived state that
indicates IQ Central has just started up, but has not
yet gotten the Data Manager up and running.
Initializing. In the process of starting up the Data
Manager.
26
Icon
Reference Lost. When the icon blinks red, this
indicates a lost connection to the Data Manager. This
could be caused by the local Data Manager being
stopped, or by a lost connection when referencing a
Data Manager across a network.
Hovering Over the Icon for a Tooltip
If you hover the mouse over the Data Manager icon, no matter what state it is in, it will
display a tool tip showing some additional detail about the current state of the Data
Manager.
Figure 19 – Data Manager icon tool tip
Viewing the Data Manager Quick History
Double-clicking on the Data Manager toolbar status icon will display a window in IQ Central
showing some information about the current up-time history of the service. The following
window shows a typical Quick History display for the Data Manager, displaying the current
state, how many times the Data Manager has had to be restarted by the Windows Services
manager since IQ Central was last launched, and the time that IQ Central last lost its
connection with the Data Manager. These pieces of information can be very helpful if you
are having intermittent problems with the Data Manager or IQ Central.
Figure 20 – Quick History of Data Manager operational status
27
NTCIP Server Status
The NTCIP Server is an IQ Central service that runs in the background and is maintained by
the Microsoft Windows™ Services management tool. The NTCIP Server functions as the
traffic cop that directs and manages message traffic between the various parts of IQ
Central and the field hardware. The NTCIP Server status icon appears second from the left
in the Status Bar. It indicates the current operational state of the service.
Table 12 – NTCIP Server Status icons
Icon
Normal status. The NTCIP Server is up and running normally, meaning communications are
operating nominally .
Not initialized. This is typically a short-lived state that indicates IQ Central has just started up,
but has not yet gotten the NTCIP Server up and running. Or it could indicate that
Initializing. In the process of starting up the NTCIP Server.
Reference Lost. Indicates a lost connection to the NTCIP Server. The Windows Services tool
should automatically restart the NTCIP Server as soon as it detects that it has gone down. If it
does not, you can either restart IQ Central, or go into the Services panel to start the service
manually.
If you hover the mouse over the NTCIP Server icon, no matter what state it is in, it will
display a tool tip showing some additional detail about the current state of the service.
These kinds of tooltips also appear automatically if the reference to the service is lost at any
point or when the service is restarting.
Figure 21 – Tooltip for the NTCIP Server status icon
Viewing the NTCIP Server Quick History
Double-clicking on the NTCIP Server status icon opens a window that shows some
information about the current up-time history of the service. The following window shows a
typical Quick History display for the NTCIP Service, displaying the current state, how many
times the NTCIP Server has had to be restarted by the Windows Services manager since
IQ Central was last launched, and the time that IQ Central last lost its connection with the
NTCIP Server. These pieces of information can be very helpful if you are having intermittent
problems with communications or with IQ Central in general.
28
Figure 22 – Quick History of NTCIP Server operational status
Alarm Status
Figure 23 – Alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar
When alarm conditions are defined within IQ Central, the Alarm server constantly monitors
device traffic and the state of IQ Central itself to monitor when alarm conditions become
active. The number and type of alarms that are active in the program determine how the
Alarm Status icon appears in the status bar. In the example shown above, at least one
Warning level alarm has been detected.
29
Table 13 – Alarms Status icons, from lowest alert level to highest
Icon
No Alarms currently active.
Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is Informational.
Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Query alarm.
Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Warning alarm.
Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Critical alarm.
Hovering Over the Icon for Alarm Statistics
If you place the cursor over the Alarm status icon, you will be presented with a tooltip that
shows the number of alarms that are active at each severity level, as shown here. This
tooltip bubble also shows what the most recently detected alarm was, and when it was
detected.
Figure 24 – Alarms details displayed in a tooltip
Viewing Alarm Details
Simply double-click on the alarm status icon to open the full Alarms Status window, from
which the operator can navigate to various filters and views of the active and historical
alarms, as well as print out the alarm data. Details about using the Alarms Status window
are described in "Chapter 11: Alarm Monitoring".
Status of Devices Responding and Connected
The white box in the status bar with the two numbers in it is used to indicate the overall state
of communications with the devices that are connected to IQ Central. The right number
30
indicates whether or not the NTCIP Server was able to open the specified Connection
channel to the device or not. The left number indicates that the device is responding to
requests from central.
Figure 25 – Device status in the Status bar
Note that the 'connected' number (on the right) does not indicate that the device is actually
awake and responding at the other end . . .just that the communications channel defined for
that device can be opened successfully.
And the 'responding' number (on the left) assumes that all good connection channels are
responding until a device fails to respond to a request from IQ Central. So if a device's
connection is open, but IQ Central doesn't send any messages requiring a response from
that device, the 'response' number assumes that the device is responding. It only marks a
device as unresponsive if it doesn't reply to an actual request for communications.
If you hover over the Device Connection/Responding box in the Status bar, IQ Central will
present a tooltip that shows more details about the numbers of device, their respective
comms states, as well as information about the total number of devices configured in the
system, and if any of the device have been forced offline by a request from IQ Central.
Figure 26 – Device Status tool tip
Viewing Device Connection Details
If you double-click on the Device Status box in the IQ Central Status bar, you will open the
normal NTCIP Device Status module. The operation of the Device Status module is
described in Chapter 2.
31
System Date and Time
The current date and time of the IQ Central system are displayed in the Status Bar of the
application, as shown below. These are the values of date and time that are set for the
operating system. To change these values, use the normal operating system tools for
setting date and time (Start menu > Control Panel > Date/Time).
Figure 27 – Current date and time as displayed in the IQ Central status bar
Note
32
The controls to configure how IQ Central synchronizes the clocks in field
devices with its central clock are provided in the Device Log Polling module.
Refer to the "Log Polling" section in Chapter 10 for details.
Logged In User
Figure 28 – Current User icon and label in the IQ Central status bar
The middle of the IQ Central status bar display information about who is currently logged
into the system on this workstation. Only one person can be logged in on a workstation at a
time. Each user account is given one of three security level settings: Operator, Manager, or
Administrator. The icon that appears next to the user name indicates which access level the
logged in user is granted.
Table 14 – Logged In User icons
User Icon
User account access
This user account has level 1 access, also known as 'Operator' access.
This user account has level 2 access, also known as 'Manager' access.
This user accant has level 3 access, also known as 'Administrator' or 'Full' access.
Module Navigation in the Status Bar
When one or more modules are open within IQ Central, more items appear to the right of
the basic status bar fields. These are buttons for each module that is currently open within
the IQ Central framework. Here, you can see status bar buttons for the NTCIP Device
Status window, the Device View module showing the Standard View, and Layers module.
The currently selected module is highlighted and outlined.
Figure 29 – Module Navigation in the Status bar
You can use these module buttons to switch between the modules. When a module is
selected here, the module is brought to the front in the IQ Central window. Or another way
to switch between modules is to use the numbers in front of each module listing. For
example, to switch to the NTCIP Device Status window, one would press ALT-W,1 in this
situation.
Also notice that at the bottom-right corner of the status bar is the window resize control.
These three slanted lines indicate where a mouse can grab the window and resize the
overall IQ Central window.
33
Keyboard Shortcuts
The following keyboard shortcuts will help a user navigate the IQ Central interface more
quickly.
Table 15 – Keyboard Shortcuts
34
Key Combination
Function
Description
F1
Context Sensitive Help
Opens the help system to the topic appropriate for wherever you
currently are within IQ Central
F2
Status Module
Opens the device Status module
F3
Map Module
Opens the Map module
F4
Incident Management
F6
Scenarios/Amber Alerts
Opens the Scenarios and Amber alerts module
F7
Alarms Status
Opens the Alarms Status module
Ctrl-F4
Close module
Closes whichever module is open and selected in the IQ Central
window
Alt-F4
Close IQ Central
Closes the IQ Central application (after requesting verification)
Alt-F,x
Close IQ Central
Closes the IQ Central application (after requesting verification)
Alt-F,L
Log on
Log into a user account (when IQ Central is already running)
Alt-F,O
Log off
Log out of a user account (but keep IQ Central running)
Alt-F,p
Change password
Change the password of the currently-logged in user account
Alt-V,s
Status module
Opens the device Status module
Alt-V,m
Map module
Opens the Map module
Alt-V,i
Incident Management
Alt-V,u
User Comments
Opens the User Comments module
Alt-V,r
Reports
Opens the Reports module
Alt-V,t
Timeout
Change the value of the user inactivity Timeout value (5 to 60
minutes)
Alt-D,n
Add new device
Create a new device
Alt-D,i,u
Intersection
upload/download
Upload and download module for intersection controllers
Alt-D,m,c
Sign Control
Opens the message Sign Control module
Alt-D,m,a
Scenarios/Amber Alerts
Opens the message sign Scenarios and Amber Alerts module
Alt-D,m,m
Sign Summary
Open the message Sign Summary module
Alt-D,m,o
Bulk operations
Opens the message sign Bulk Operations module
Alt-D,m,b
Brightness control
Opens the message sign Brightness Control module
Alt-D,m,f
Edit Master Fonts
Opens the message sign Edit Master Fonts module
Alt-D,m,s
Edit Schedules
Opens the message sign Edit Schedules module
Alt-D,m,e
Error Logs
Opens the message sign Error Logs module
Alt-D,c,c
Camera Control
Opens the camera Control module
Alt-D,c,b
Camera Browser
Opens the camera Browser module
Alt-D,c,v
Video Configuration
Opens the camera Video Configuration module
Key Combination
Function
Description
Alt-M,m
Map management
Opens the Map Management module
Alt-M,p
Place Icon on map
Opens the Place Icon on Map module
Alt-M,i
Intersection display
Opens the Intersection Display module
Alt-M,g
GIS Layer Groups
Opens the GIS Layer Groups module
Alt-M,L
GIS Layers
Opens the GIS Layers module
Alt-M,z
GIS Zoom Settings
Opens the GIS Zoom Settings module
Alt-M,o,m
Polling option map data
Opens the Realtime Polling settings module
Alt-M,o,d
Map Dynamic Objects
Opens the STMP Polling module to allow for creation, editing and
deletion of dynamic map objects
Alt-M,o,r
Refreshes the polled data on map view objects
Alt-T,c
Connections
Opens the Connections editing module
Alt-T,d
Devices
Opens the Devices editing module
Alt-T,v
Archive and Restore
Opens the database Archive and Restore module
Alt-T,u,a
Add/delete user
Opens the module to add or delete user accounts
Alt-T,u,L
User Access Levels
Sets the security access levels for a user account
Alt-T,u,p
User profiles
Opens the Profiles module
Alt-T,u,c
Currently Logged-in
users
Shows a list of the users who are currently logged into IQ Central
Alt-T,L,d
Logging option: Device
types
Open the module to edit device types in the event log
Alt-T,L,s
Logging option: Max log
size
Sets the maximum size of the event log
Alt-T,L,e
Extended logging
Activates or deactivates the Extended Logging option
Alt-T,a,i
Icon management
Allows a user to add graphical icons to IQ Central so they can then
be used in the interface, either on maps or elsewhere.
Alt-T,a,t
Device Types
Opens the Device Type editing module
Alt-T,a,L
Link Icon to Device
Type
Allows a user to link an icon to a particular type of devices
Alt-T,a,b
BlockBuilder
Opens BlockBuilder, the advanced IQ Central database editing tool.
(This tool is normally deactivated for customer installations.)
Alt-T,a,f
FormBuilder
Opens FormBuilder, the advanced IQ Central form editing tool.
(This tool is normally deactivated for customer installations.)
Tile Vertical
Tile Horizontal
Cascade Windows
Alt-W,#
Switch to open window
#
If you press a number after pressing the Alt-W key combination, this
will switch the IQ Central focus to that numbered open module.
Alt-H,i
IQ Central Help System
Opens the help system you are currently reading
Alt-H,a
About IQ Central
Shows the About window for IQ Central, showing release version
info and system information.
35
Automatic Log Off
If there is no activity within IQ Central for a set period of time, a Log Off warning window will
appear. This warning tells the current logged-in user that they will be logged off
automatically, unless they take some action. If you do not want to be logged off, click on the
‘Stay Logged On’ button within one minute of the form displaying.
The period of inactivity time that the system waits before prompting the user is entered on
the Timeout form, which can be accessed in the menus at View > Timeout.
Profiles Module
Profiles allow you to set different access levels for different levels of operators. Profiles
function as an advanced version of user access level assignment. We recommend that
users avoid modifying any of the Profiles settings.
Closing IQ Central
Closing the application will automatically log off the current user, close any open modules,
and close all open connections that are currently active with devices. Whenever you attempt
to close the application, you will be presented with a dialog box asking you to verify that you
wish to proceed and actually close down. This prevents a user from accidentally exiting the
program when it wasn't intended.
To close IQ Central, you can use any of the following methods:
Go to the File menu and choose Exit
Or, Press Alt-F4 from anywhere in the program
Or, Press Alt-F, followed by the 'x' key, from anywhere in the program
36
Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and
Connections
Most of IQ Central's modules deal with a single type of field device , such as the modules
that handle messages signs, weather stations, traffic controllers, etc. But when it comes to
device creation, management, and interconnection within IQ Central, all types of devices are
managed using the same global management tools. Devices are created, and then each is
linked to a single communications channel, or 'connection'.
The Device Manager, Connection Manager, and Device Type Manager modules are
applications that allow the user to add to, delete from, and edit the contents of the lists of
items of their particular type. Devices are then assigned to be of a particular Device Type
(connecting to a record in the Device Type list) and to use one of the communications
channels from the Connections list.
Devices can also be grouped together into IQ Central Groups. These Groups are used in
the Alarms, Map View, and Time Sync modules to perform actions on all members of the
Group with a single command.
Keeping all of your devices synchronized with the same time information is important for
accurate reporting and Time-of-Day operations. A powerful interactive Time Sync module is
used to retrieve and set device clocks on device-by-device basis, or by device type, or
grouping.
And once devices have been configured with all of their parameters, or as a method to
analyze the current configuration of your devices, IQ Central provides a capability to export
a device database to a PDF file. The resulting file can be formatted to suit your needs,
including an added header photo or logo, font and layout options, and the file can be saved
to disk or printed to create a paper record of your device configurations.
Figure 30 – Assigning a Device to a Connection and a Device Type
37
Introduction to Device Management
The Device Management module, also known as Overview of Devices within IQ Central, has
the following columns of information about each device:
Name -- Entered in the Device Add/Edit window. Used to place and track the device
throughout IQ Central.
Description -- Entered in the Device Add/Edit window.
Type -- The device type, as pulled from the Device Types list, which can be modified
using the Device Type Management module. Add new device types is non-trivial and
should not be done without assistance from a Peek Traffic representative.
Connection Name -- The communications channel that will be used by this device, as
selected from the Connections list.
Address -- The drop address used to connect with this device.
Master -- The master address used to connect with this device.
<Blank> -- The second column from the right edge of the window is used to show which
physical communications channel is used for this Connection. If it is an Ethernet
connection, this column shows the IP address. If it's a serial connection, it shows the
COM port being used.
<Blank> -- The rightmost column shows further detail about the communications
channel. If the connection is an Ethernet channel, this shows the port number that will be
used when connecting with the device. If its a serial or modem channel, it shows the
baud rate that will be used to communicate with the device.
This module lists all the individual devices that have been configured within IQ Central. This
list shows all devices, grouped by device type. It also provides a general environment where
you can add, edit, and delete individual devices.
Devices are sorted automatically by the contents of the first column, the device name. The
list cannot be sorted by any of the other fields. Columns can, however be resized by moving
the mouse over one of the vertical edges of the column header box. When the cursor
becomes a left-right arrow, click and drag to resize the column.
38
Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and Connections
Add/Edit Device Window
This window is used to enter or make changes to the key details about a Device .
Figure 31 – Add/Edit Device Window
Adding a Device
These are the steps to add a new device to the IQ Central database. (This process requires
that the Device Type has already been defined in the database.)
1.
Open the Device Management module. This can be done by going to the menus and
choosing Devices > Add New Device, or by pressing Alt-D, followed by the letter
'n'.
2.
From the Device Management module (i.e. 'Overview of Devices,) open the
Enter/Edit Device Window by pressing the Add Device button at the bottom of the
window.
3.
The Enter/Edit Device Window will appear. Fill in the Device Name field with a
unique name.
4.
Fill in the Description field.
5.
Select a Device Type from the pull-down list.
6.
Select the Connection that will be used to communicate with the device in the field.
7.
Fill in the Drop Address. If the device type is a Master traffic controller, fill in the
Master Address as well. If the connection is an Ethernet type, make sure both of
these addresses are set to "0" (Zero).
8.
When you are finished describing the device, be sure to click on the Save button
before you close the window.
39
Note:
If you choose to close the window without saving the device, you will
be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If
you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit
Devices window and your previous entries will be preserved. If you
select Yes to the query, your settings will be discarded and the
Enter/Edit Device window will close.
9.
Close the Enter/Edit Device window.
10.
Verify that the new device appears as expected in the Device Management module's
device list.
This completes the creation of a new device. Next, you will need to attach it to a map view,
or simply monitor it in the other modules of the IQ Central system.
Editing a Device
If you need to change information for a particular Device , highlight that Device in the list
and click on the Edit Device Button. Or you can double-click on the device in the list that you
wish to edit. Either of these options open a window that will allow you to make the desired
changes. When you are finished describing the device, be sure to click on the Save button
before you Close the window. If you choose to close the window without saving the device,
you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in
this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Devices window.
Deleting a Device
If you want to delete a Device , highlight that Device in the list and then click on the Edit
Device Button. That will open the detail window that will allow you to verify that you have
selected the correct Device. Then click on the Delete Button to remove that Device.
40
Viewing Status - The NTCIP Device Status Module
This module allows the operator to see the overall connection state and history of all of the
devices in IQ Central. It uses a hierarchical tree view on the left for device type and device
item selection, and a detail window on the right to show information about whatever device
level is selected in the left window.
There are a couple of ways to launch the NTCIP Device Status Module:
Use the NTCIP Device Status module icon in the toolbar:
Use the keyboard shortcut F2.
Go to the menus and choose View and then Status.
Click on the screen below to see details about the top level view in the NTCIP Device Status
module: (This is the first screen that appears when you open the module.)
Figure 32 – Device Status module
Double-clicking on a device type, in either the device tree or the device type list, will
update the status window to show devices of only that type.
Double clicking on an individual device, in either the device tree or in the status screen
for a single device type, will update the status display to show connection and event log
details for that particular device.
Note
If any user is adding a new device while this module is open, the list will not
automatically update to show the new device. To see new devices in the
NTCIP Device Status module, you will first need to restart IQ Central.
41
Status of All Devices of a Type
In the NTCIP Device Status module, selecting a particular device type will change the status
list on the right to show all of the devices of that type that are currently configured within IQ
Central. Generally, this screen shows the descriptive name of each of the devices, and
connection status of the device, the logical communications status of the device, and
whether or not polling is enabled on that device. This same information is shown here, no
matter what type of device is selected.
This screen can also be used to proceed into a status screen for a single device. Just
double-click on the row for that device in the status display on the right, or single-click on the
device's name in the tree on the left. Either method will work. When you do this, you will be
taken to the Single Device status window.
In this example, the device type 'Overhead Sign' has been selected in the tree list. As you
can see, two devices are currently configured in this system with the device type 'Overhead
Sign':
Figure 33 – Device Status module for a single device type
Single Device Status - Device Logs
Selecting an individual device in the tree list of the NTCIP Device Status module, or
choosing a single device in the Device Type view, will open a status screen for the individual
device. This window shows the device logs, online history and communications stats for this
device. The resulting data can be filtered by a date range, and grouped into bins of different
time lengths.
42
Figure 34 – Device Status module - Device Logs pane
Single Device Status - Comm Stats
An alternate display in the NTCIP Device Status module is the Comm Stats view. This is
one of the three detail views of device status (along with Device Logs and Online History)
that is available within that module.
This screen shows the same eleven fields, no matter what device or connection type is
selected for that device. These communications parameters provide details about any
comms errors or event messages that have occurred while IQ Central was attempting to
connect with and share data with the selected device. The six fields on the left are for
general communications error types. The five fields on the right are specifically concerned
with comms errors that deal with dynamic objects (i.e. STMP data.)
Click on the sample screen below for more details about the interface of the Status:Comm
Stats display.
Figure 35 – Device Status module - Comm Stats pane
Single Device Status - Online History
Another alternate display in the NTCIP Device Status module is the Online History view.
This is one of the three detail views of device status (along with Device Logs and Comm
Stats) that is available within that module.
43
This screen shows the same four fields, no matter what device or connection type is
selected for that device. These historical count records provide details about how many
times connect or disconnect events occurred while IQ Central was attempting to
communication with the selected device. The settings for what exactly make up an 'Online',
a 'Marginal', or an 'Offline' event are defined in the Device Log Polling module. (For details
about these settings, see the section describing the 'Counts' parameters.)
Figure 36 – Device Status module - Online History pane
44
Connections
Overview of Connections Module
This module displays a listing of all the communications channels that have been
configured within IQ Central. It also provides the primary environment where you can add,
edit, or delete these connection channels.
Adding a Connection
If you want to add a new Connection, click on the Add Connection Button at the bottom of
the window. This will open a window where you can define the details about the new
Connection. Begin by choosing the Connections pull-down list and choosing Add new...
from the list at the top of the window. When you are finished defining the channel, be sure to
click on the Save button before you Close the window. If you choose to close the window
without saving the values, you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the
changes. If you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Connections
window. More detail.
Editing a Connection
If you need to change information about a particular Connection channel, highlight the row
for that connection within the list and click on the Edit Connection Button. That will open a
window that will allow you to make the required changes. Or you can double-click on the
connection row in the list to open the Connection edit screen. When you are finished making
the desired changes to the channel, be sure to press the Save button before closing the
window. If you choose to close the window without saving the values, you will be prompted
to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in this window, you will
be returned to the Enter/Edit Connections window.
Deleting a Connection
If you want to delete a Connection, highlight that Connection in the list and then click on the
Edit Connection Button. That will open the detail window that will allow you to verify that you
have selected the correct Connection. Then click on the Delete Button to remove that
Connection.
Editing a Connection
This window contains the details that you can edit for any Connection. The following fields
can be edited:
45
Device Types Module
The list of device types shows up in the Overview of Devices module, in the Device Type
pull-down list. This module provides an editing window where existing device types can be
edited or deleted, or new device types can be created. This module also allows you to
change the icon that is attached to a particular type of device when it is used in the Map
view.
IMPORTANT
Changing Device Types requires that you have a Master Table in
the database to which the new or modified device type can attach.
This Master Table is the database version of the NTCIP MIB for
that kind of equipment. A Master Table is not a trivial thing to
create, and should not be edited or added to by users. It is an
extremely bad idea to delete a device type, particularly if you have
any devices of that type installed in your system. If you delete the
device type for a set of devices that you are using, you will not be
able to recover the devices. The type will need to be recreated,
and the devices themselves will need to be re-attached to the
newly recovered device type.
Adding a Device Type
To add a new device type, you will have to have a Master Table for the new device already
stored in the database. If that is in place, open the Device Types Module, and select New
Device Type... from the top of the Device Type pull down list. Fill in the details, attach the
device type to its Master Table, and attach an icon to the device. When you are finished, be
sure to click Save before exiting the module, or your work will be discarded. Finally, click
Close to shut down the Device Type module.
Editing a Device Type
We strongly recommend that you not edit an existing device type except for changes to the
Name, Description, or Icon. Changing these things will not impact current devices that are
linked to this device type. If you wish to edit an existing device type, open the Device Types
Module, select the type of device you wish to modify from the top pull-down list, and make
the desired changes. When you are finished, be sure to click Save before exiting the
module, or your work will be discarded. Finally, click Close to shut down the Device Type
module.
Deleting a Device Type
Device types can be deleted from the Device Types Module, however DON'T DO IT.
Deleting a device type from IQ Central will cause major problems to your existing central
database.
46
Managing Device Groups
The Device Groups module was added to IQ Central to make it possible for operators to
combine devices together into user-defined sets, called 'Groups'. Currently, Groups are only
used in the Alarms, Map Viewer, and Time Sync modules. They can be used to:
Select and manipulate a set of devices in the Map View module
Define alarms for a set of devices
Set or monitor the time sync status for a set of devices
Send a central override pattern change to a group of controllers within the Map Viewer
Groups are created, modified, and deleted using the Device Groups module. There are
several ways to launch the Device Groups module. The only requirements for the creation of
a Group is that the devices you wish to add to your groups need to exist within IQ Central
before you attempt to add them to a group.
Launching the Device Groups Module
From the IQ Central main window, you can launch the Device Groups module by:
Going to the Tools menu and choosing Device Groups
or
Clicking on the Device Groups button (shown at right) in the Standard toolbar
The Device Groups module can also be launched from within the Device
Configuration module by clicking on the Groups button at the bottom of the window.
Managing Device Groups
The Device Groups module was added to IQ Central to make it possible for operators to
combine devices together into user-defined sets, called 'Groups'. Currently, Groups are only
used in the Alarms, Map Viewer, and Time Sync modules. They can be used to:
Select and manipulate a set of devices in the Map View module
Define alarms for a set of devices
Set or monitor the time sync status for a set of devices
Send a central override pattern change to a group of controllers within the Map Viewer
Groups are created, modified, and deleted using the Device Groups module. There are
several ways to launch the Device Groups module. The only requirements for the creation of
a Group is that the devices you wish to add to your groups need to exist within IQ Central
before you attempt to add them to a group.
Launching the Device Groups Module
From the IQ Central main window, you can launch the Device Groups module by:
Going to the Tools menu and choosing Device Groups
or
Clicking on the Device Groups button (shown at right) in the Standard toolbar
The Device Groups module can also be launched from within the Device
47
Configuration module by clicking on the Groups button at the bottom of the window.
Using the Device Groups window
When you open the Device Groups window, as described in the Managing Device Groups
topic, it provides a single window interface that lets you create, rename, add and remove
devices, and delete device groups. The interface is divided into three main areas. The top
left of the window shows a list of all of the currently configured groups in IQ Central. The
right side of the window presents a list of the devices that belong to the selected group (in
three different panes, showing three ways to see the device list) and in the bottom left
corner of the window is an area to create, rename, delete, and save changes to the selected
group or groups.
Figure 37 – Parts of the Device Groups window
Current Groups List
This list displays all groups that have been defined within IQ Central. The list can be sorted
by Group Name (ascending or descending order) or by Group Description (ascending or
descending order) by clicking on the column header. When an item in this table is
highlighted, the Group Name and Group Description fields in the boxes below the table are
editable copies of these settings. And the Device List window automatically changes to
show what devices are currently assigned to the selected group.
Devices List
This part of the Device Groups window provides a variety of ways to view which devices are
attached to the currently selected group. When a group is chosen in the Current Groups list
to the left, this area changes to show which devices belong to the group (checks) and which
do not (unchecked.) The only thing required to add a device to a group is to check the box
next to it in this window. The three tabs provide three methods of organizing the devices.
The default view is 'By Device' which shows a simple list of all devices in the system in
48
alphabetical order. The 'By Type' view shows a hierarchy of devices, divided by device
types. Again, check-boxes indicate which are in the group and which are not. Finally, the 'By
Group' view shows a simple listing of only those devices that belong to the group. The
Select All and Select None buttons at the bottom of the devices list provides a quick way to
check all of the boxes, or to clear all of them.
Description of Selected Group
These two fields are used to name a new group, or to rename an existing group. It's
important to realize that editing the name in the Group Name box will NOT create a new
group unless you first press the New Group button. Making an edit in these fields will simply
change the name of the currently selected group, or its description.
New Group Button
Click this button to create a new item in the Current Groups list. Edit the name and
description in the fields above to define the group. And be sure to save your changes.
Save Group Button
This saves any changes that were made to the currently selected group. This includes
changes to its name, description, or its list of included devices.
Delete Group Button
This button will delete the currently highlighted group, after you verify that you do actually
wish to delete it. The deletion will not be finalized until you save the change. There is no
way to undelete a group once it has been removed. It is possible to delete a group that has
devices assigned. Any devices assigned to the group will simply be removed from the group
and the group's name and description will be deleted from the IQ Central database.
Save All Button
This button will save all changes to any groups that have been modified. It saves group
names, descriptions, and member devices.
Close Button
This button closes the Device Groups module. If changes have been made to any of the
group names, descriptions or device lists, then it will prompt the user whether they wish to
save the changes or not. If the user chooses No, the changes will be discarded.
49
Creating a Group
A Device Group can be created at any time by following these simple steps:
1.
Open the Device Groups module (by choosing Device Groups in the Tools
menu, or by clicking on the Device Groups button in the Standard toolbar.)
2.
Press the New Group button. This will create a new entry at the top of the Current
Groups list above.
3.
Type in a name for the group. This can be any length up to 150 characters, but it
should be kept fairly short so it will show up correctly in the Alarms window and in
the Map Viewer. (Note: Do NOT type the new name until you've pressed the New
Group button, or you will simply rename the currently highlighted existing group in
your list.)
4.
Press the Save Group button.
5.
Go to the Device List on the right side of the window and pick which devices you
want in the new group. These selections will have no impact on previous group
assignments.
6.
Press the Save Group button again.
7.
Close the Device Groups module.
Figure 38 – Be sure to Save the new group once you've created it
50
Modifying an Existing Group
Changing a device group, either its name, its description or its members list, will not affect
the operation of any of IQ Central's modules. Alarms and Maps will automatically update to
reflect the new group memberships. Follow these steps to modify an existing group:
1.
2.
Select the group you wish to modify in the Current Groups list on the left side of the
window.
3.
To change the group's name, just highlight the current name in the Group Name field
and type in the new name.
4.
To change the group's description, highlight the current description in the Group
Description field and type in the new value.
5.
Look to the Device List on the right side of the window. (Make sure that either the By
Devices or By Type panes is selected.) Check the boxes next to those devices that
you wish to belong to this group. Uncheck the boxes next to the devices that you
wish to remove from the group.
6.
Press the Save Group button to save your changes.
7.
Close the Device Groups module.
Figure 39 – Be sure to Save the changes to the group
51
Deleting a Group
A Device Group can be deleted at any time without effecting the devices that are members
of the group.
1.
2.
Select the group you would like to delete from the list of groups on the left side of the
window
3.
Press the Delete Group button
4.
When asked, verify that you would like to delete the group.
5.
Close the Device Groups module and verify that the changes are saved.
Figure 40 – The Delete Group button in the Device Groups module
52
Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management
Although there are other sections of the IQ Central interface that deal with specific aspects
of working with traffic intersection controllers within IQ Central (such as the System
Scheduler for retrieving controller log files), this section will discuss the tools and methods
used to configure controllers for interactive usage on the IQ Central Maps. This means
providing an interface to define how a controller will appear at various levels of
magnification on one of your map displays, and also providing controls to directly interact
with the controller from within the map environment, namely via the upload and download of
controller settings between IQ Central and the device in the field.
Interactive Upload/Download Module – This module allows an IQ Central operator to
retrieve, modify and send out configuration data to controllers in the field. This module
was extensively enhanced in the version 1.2 release, and its speed and capabilities
were further improved in versions 1.3 and 1.4
Configure Intersections Module – An editor to design how an intersection appears
when viewed in the IQ Central map environment, and how this view changes as you
zoom in on the exact intersection.
Example Network – An example of a typical traffic control
network (click on the image at right to open)
Performing a Central Override – Using the IQCentral
software to take direct control of a traffic controller or master
controller
Coordination Checking – Programming traffic controllers for
coordinated operation can be a confusing operation. As an assisting tool, IQ Central
v1.6 added the capability to test a coordination setup before it is used in a live device
53
Traffic Network - Example Topography
This diagram shows how a typical traffic control network might be set up between IQ Central
and different kinds of traffic controllers in the field.
Figure 41 – Example IQ Central traffic controller network
54
Supported Traffic Controllers
At the time of this release (IQ Central version 1.7), the software provides complete
interactive upload, download, status display, and log retrieval capabilities for the following
traffic controllers:
Peek IQ ATC Controllers
Multisonics 820A Controllers
Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controllers
Peek 3000E Controllers
Peek M3000 Master Controllers
Peek LMD 9200 Controllers
Traconex 390CJ Controllers
Traconex TMM-500 Master Controllers
Transyt EL Controllers
Transyt EL Master Controllers
Note
The usage of IQ Central with controllers and master controllers in the
Multisonics, Peek, Traconex, and Transyt families requires that a
hardware translator box act as a communications intermediary between the
central software and these non-NTCIP compliant controllers. Peek Traffic
sells IQ Connect translator units and cards to serve this function. Contact
your local Peek Traffic representative for more information, or go to the Peek
website (http://www.peektraffic.com). Peek's IQ ATC controller line, as well
as any other true NTCIP compliant devices, can be used directly with IQ
Central and do not require an IQ Connect translator.
IQ Connect Hardware
IQ Connect is a line of electronic protocol translators that provide
communications links between the NTCIP speaking IQ Central, and
legacy traffic controllers and masters that use proprietary communications protocols. Peek
Traffic sells two hardware versions of IQ Connect: a standalone 'box' and a controller card
version. The card unit only works with 3000E controllers. The standalone versions will work
with all of the masters and controllers supported by IQ Central.
Note
Native NTCIP speaking controllers, such as the IQ ASTC and IQ ATC
controllers do not require a translator.
55
Multisonics Hardware
IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Multisonics controllers in the field:
820A Controllers
OSAM-32 Master Controllers
Note
820A Controllers can only be managed while operating under an OSAM-32
Master. There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 820A
local controller.
Parameter Fields of the 820A Controller
In the Upload/Download module, the entire 820A/OSAM controller database can be viewed,
saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, and
transmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and fields are available
for the 820A in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details on programming
the 820A controller, refer to the Multisonics 820A Controller Operating Manual.
Table 16 – 820A parameters editable in the Upload/Download module
Group
Page
Parameter
Manual Commands
Manual Commands
Command Selection
Manual Free Plan
Manual Coord Plan
Setup
Intersection Phasing
Allowable Phases
Pedestrian Phases
Flashing Walks
Density Phases
Anti-Backup Phases
Yellow Arrow Omit
Phase Features
Exclusive Ped Phase
Non-Actuated I Phase
Non-Actuated II Phase
Simultaneous Gap Phases
Simultaneous Max Phases
Last Car Passage Phases
Min Yellow Time
Red Revert Time
Soft Flash
Pre-Flash Phases
Flash Red Phases
56
Group
Page
Parameter
Flash Yellow Phases
Flash Red Overlaps
Flash Yellow Overlaps
Flash Ped Don't Walks
Flash Ped Clearance
Minimum Flash Time
Post-Flash Yellow Time
Post-Flash Red Time
Post-Flash Phases
Startup
Start In State
Start Up Times
Start Up Phases
Start Up State
Start Veh Calls
Start Ped Calls
Overlaps
Parent Phases
Green Extension Time
Yellow Change Time
Red Clear Time
Overlap 1 Type
Overlap 1 Force Output
Overlap 1 Flash OL Green
Overlap 1 Flash OL Yellow
Overlap Flash OL Red
LCD Setup
Intersection Shape
Southbound Thru (set to Phase #)
Southbound Turn (set to Phase #)
Westbound Thru (set to Phase #)
Westbound Turn (set to Phase #)
Northbound Thru (set to Phase #)
Northbound Turn (set to Phase #)
Eastbound Thru (set to Phase #)
Eastbound Turn (set to Phase #)
Southbound Ped (set to Phase #)
Westbound Ped (set to Phase #)
Northbound Ped (set to Phase #)
57
Group
Page
Parameter
Eastbound Ped (set to Phase #)
Detectors
Override Min Recall
Override Max Recall
Override Ped Recall
Detector 1 (to 16) Phases
Detector 1 (to 16) Locking (On/Off)
Phase Timing
Phase Timing
Ped Walk Time
Ped Clear Time
Add Time Per Actuation
Initial Time
Maximum Init Time
Extension Time
Min Ext Time
Time Before Reduction
Time to Reduce
Max Green Time
Max II Green Time
Maximum Step
Maximum Limit
Yellow Limit
Red Clear Time
Free Plans
Free Plans 1 - 16
Ring 1 Seq (Steps 1-10)
Ring 2 Seq (Steps 1-10)
Min Recall
Max Recall
Ped Recall
Soft Recall
No Skip
Conditional Service
Non Actuated
Dual Entry
Red Rest
Max II
Ped Recycle
Act. Rest-in-Walk
Detector Plan No.
58
Group
Page
Parameter
Active Sp Function Circuits
5-Section Prot. Only
Detector Plans
Detector Plans 1 - 8
Delay Time (Detectors 1-16)
Inhibit Delay (Detectors 1-16)
Stretch Time (Detectors 1-16)
Type (Detectors 1-16)
Switching (Detectors 1-16)
Alt. Phase Association (Detectors 1-16)
Revert-if-Green Phases
(Detectors 1-16)
Revert-in-Queue Phases
(Detectors 1-16)
Queue Detector Presence
(Detectors 1-16)
Speed Trap Type (Detectors 1-16)
Loop Length (1 Loop) (Detectors 1-16)
Avg Vehicle Length (Detectors 1-16)
Dist. Between Loops (Detectors 1-16)
Associated 2nd Loop (Detectors 1-16)
Detector Diag
Detectors 1-24
No Activity (Detectors 1-12)
Constant Call (Detectors 1-12)
Erratic Output (Detectors 1-12)
Diagnostic Recalls (Detectors 1-12)
Diag Green Ext (Detectors 1-12)
Misc
Parameters
Keyboard Beep
Password
Enable Security
LCD Contrast
LCD Backlight (On/Off)
Special Functions
Special Function 1-4 Polarity
Special Function 1-4 Type
Special Function 1-4 Mode
Dimming
Dim Green
Dim Yellow
Dim Red
Dim Walk
59
Group
Page
Parameter
Dim Don't Walik
Dim Flash Don't Walk
Dim Overlap Green
Dim Overlap Yellow
Dim Overlap Red
Disable AOR (Yes/No)
DST Adjustment
DST Enabled
Spring Day of Week
Spring Weed of Month
Spring Month
Spring Hour
Fall Day of Week
Fall Week of Month
Fall Month
Fall Hour
Hardware Configuration
Cab Flash Monitor Polarity
RTS/CTS Delay tic time
Preempt
Standard Preempt
Control Flags (Preempt 1-5)
Preempt Output (Preempt 1-5)
Override Min Greens (Preempt 1-5)
Override Walks (Preempt 1-5)
Override FDW (Preempt 1-5)
Delay Time (Preempt 1-5)
Hold Time (Preempt 1-5)
Clear 1 Phases (Preempt 1-5)
Clear 1 Overlaps to Darken
(Preempt 1-5)
Clear 1 Green Time (Preempt 1-5)
Clear 2 Phases (Preempt 1-5)
Clear 2 Overlaps to Darken
(Preempt 1-5)
Clear 2 Green Time (Preempt 1-5)
Preempt Phases (Preempt 1-5)
Interval 5 Flash (Preempt 1-5)
Interval 5 Overlaps to Darken
(Preempt 1-5)
60
Group
Page
Parameter
Interval 5 Min Time (Preempt 1-5)
Interval 5 Max Time (Preempt 1-5)
Interval 6 Yellow Time (Preempt 1-5)
Interval 7 Red Time (Preempt 1-5)
Return Phases (Preempt 1-5)
Return Veh Calls (Preempt 1-5)
Return Ped Calls (Preempt 1-5)
Low Priority Preempt
Enabled (Yes/No) (Preempt 1-5)
Phases (Preempt 1-5)
Max Hold Time (Preempt 1-5)
Max Queue Time (Preempt 1-5)
Queue Clear Time (Preempt 1-5)
Coord Constants
Coord Constants
TO Reference, hour
TO Reference, Minute
Offset Reference
Ext Coor Type
Num of Cycles of No Sync
Num of Cycles of Detector Accumulation
Num of Minutes of Detector Accumulation
Coordination Dual Entry Phases
Detector Accum. Interval
Coord Plans
Coordination Plans 1 - 48
Perm Strategy
Omit Strategy Max
TO Location
3% Window
Stretch 3% By
GBP Omits
Early Return
Once Around
Cycle Length
Offset
Min Cycle Length
Max Cycle Length
External Sync
61
Group
Page
Parameter
Active SF
Detector Plan #
Protected Only Enable
Calculated Walk
Rest-in-Walk
No Skip
Sequence (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
Start Perm (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
Accumulated Split
(Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
Call Options (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
Split Type (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
Reservice (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
Allow Ped (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)
TIC
Events 1-200
Events 1 - 50
Day Plans 1-16
Day Plan Event #
Week Plans
Day Plan # (Sunday to Saturday)
Year Plans
Week Plan # (Week 1-54)
Exception Days 1 - 30
Month
Day
Year
Plan #
Holidays
New Year's Day
M L King Day
President's Day
Good Friday
Easter Monday
Memorial Day
Independence Day
Labor Day
Columbus Day
Veteran's Day
Thanksgiving Day
Day after Thanksgiving
Christmas Eve
62
Group
Page
Parameter
Christmas Day
Day after Christmas
New Year's Eve
Comm/System
Remop Options
Remop Protocol
Remop Baud Rate Div.
Remop Tel #1
Remop Tel #2
Dial Retries
Modem Init String 1
Modem Init String 2
Intersection Name
Name
Error Logging
Power Up
Bad Coordination Plan
Bad Free Plan
Hardware Timeout
Coordination Error
Cyclic Error
Stop Time Detected
Flash Feedback Detected
Battery Backup Clock Bad
Cabinet Door Opened
EEPROM Write Timeout Error
SF1-6 Feedback Detected
MCE Detected
Detector No Activity
Detector Constant Call
Detector Erratic Output
Detector Repair
Detector Diag. Active
Clear Failed Detector
Printer Setup
Baud Rate Divisor
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
63
Group
Page
Parameter
Print Columns / Line
Printer Protocol
End-of-Line Delay
XON Char
Auto Line Feed
Print Form Controls
Print Det Plans
Print Coord Plans
Print TIC Events
Print TIC Day Plans
System
System Type
OSAM Local Address
System Baud Rate
Parameter Fields of the OSAM-32 Master
This topic has not been created yet.
64
Using Peek Hardware with IQ Central
IQ Central can be used to manage four types of PEEK controllers in the field:
IQ ATC Controllers
3000E Controllers
M3000 Master Controllers
LMD 9200 Controllers
Parameter Fields of the 3000E Controller
In the Upload/Download module, the entire 3000E controller database can be viewed,
transmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and parameters are
available for the 3000E controllers in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more
details on programming the 3000E controllers, refer to the 3000E Operating Manual .
Table 17 – Peek 3000E Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module
Group
Page
Parameter
Controller
Sequence/Startup
Startup Phases
Startup Interval
Startup Flash Time
Startup Red Time
Ring 1 Sequence
Ring 2 Sequence
Ring 3 Sequence
Ring 4 Sequence
Cophase 1 - 8 Sequences
XPed 1 Phase
Xped 1 Output
Xped 1 Soft Return
Xped 2 Phase
Xped 2 Output
Xped 2 Soft Return
Default Sequence
Xped 1 In
Xped 1 Ped Detector 1 (Y/N)
Xped 1 TOD Input (Y/N)
Xped 2 In
65
Group
Page
Parameter
Xped 2 TOD Input (Y/N)
Phase Modes
CNA 1 - 4
Walk Rest Modifier
Inhibit Max
Ped Recycle
Flash Walk
Flash Dont Walk -> Yellow
Flash Dont Walk -> Red
Conditional Ped
Phase Times (Timing Plans 1 - 4)
Min Green (Seconds)
Passage (Seconds)
Yellow (Seconds)
Red (Seconds)
Walk (Seconds)
Ped Clear (Seconds)
Max 1 (Seconds)
Max 2 (Seconds)
Max 3 Limit (Seconds)
Max 3 Adjust (Seconds)
Time Before Reduction (Seconds)
Time to Reduce (Seconds)
Min Gap (Seconds)
Added Initial / Actuation (Seconds)
Max Initial (Seconds)
Min Recall (Phase(s))
Max Recall (Phase(s))
Ped Recall (Phase(s))
Soft Recall (Phase(s))
Detector Non-Lock (Phase(s))
Vehicle Omit (Phase(s))
Ped Omit (Phase(s))
Walk Rest (Phase(s))
66
Group
Page
Parameter
Max 2 (Phase(s))
Red Rest (Phase(s))
No Skip (Phase(s))
Dual Entry
Dual Entry Enable (Yes/No)
Dual Entry Phase 1 - 16
Dual Entry Time Plan 1 - 4
Conditional Service
Cond. Serv. by Input (Yes/No)
Phase 1-16 CSV
Cond. Serv. by Plan (Yes/No)
Cond. Serv. by Plan Phase 1 - 4
Ped Options
Auto Ped Clear with MCE
Enhanced Ped
Detectors
Veh Assignments
Call Phases (Detectors 1-64)
Ped Assignments
Phases (Detectors 1-8)
Modes
Mode (for Detectors 1-64)
Lock (for Detectors 1-64)
Detector Times
Delay (Seconds) (for Detectors 1-64)
Str/Stp (Seconds) (for Detectors 1-64)
Delay (Seconds)
(Time Plan 2, Detectors 1-12)
Str/Stp (Seconds)
(Time Plan 2, Detectors 1-12)
Delay Inhibits
Plans 1-3 Inhibits for Det 1-12
Switch and Copy
Detector Switching Enable (Yes/No)
Detector Copy Group 1 Enable (Yes/No)
Detector Copy Group 2 Input Enable (Yes/No)
Copy During Phase Green Green 1
(Phase Greens 1-16)
Copy During Phase Green Green 2
(Phase Greens 1-16)
G1C: From Phase (Phases 1-16)
G1C: To Phase (Phases 1-16)
G2C: From Phase (Phases 1-16)
G2C: To Phase (Phases 1-16)
Switch from Phases (Detectors 1-64)
Switch to Phases (Detectors 1-64)
67
Group
Page
Parameter
Fail Monitoring
Erratic Enable (Yes/No)
Start Absence Mon Hour
End Absence Mon Hour
Lock Times (Detectors 1-64)
Absence Times (Detectors 1-64)
Min Presence (Detectors 1-64)
Erratic Counts (Detectors 1-64)
Loop Length (Detectors 1-64)
Fail Max Recall Phase (Detectors 1-64)
Fail Max Recall Times (Phases 1-16)
Ped Detector Diag > Absence
(Ped detectors 1-8)
Ped Detector Diag > Lock
(Ped detectors 1-8)
Ped Detector Diag > Erratic
(Ped detectors 1-8)
Overlaps
System Sensor Assignments
Assignment (Phases 1-16)
Assignments and Types
Parent Phases (OL A-P)
Flash Enabled (OL A-P)
MOD PHS (OL A-P)
Delay Enabled (OL A-P)
Overlap Type (OL A-P)
Green (Seconds) (OL A-P)
Yellow (Seconds) (OL A-P)
Red (Seconds) (OL A-P)
Delay (Seconds) (OL A-P)
Flash Code (OL A-P)
Startup, Card, Alternate Flash
Start Up Interval
O/L Card Enable (Yes/No)
Alternate Flash Rate (flashes/minute)
Ped Overlap Min Walk (Seconds)
Ped Overlap Min Ped Clear (Seconds)
Double Clear (Trailing)
Enable (Yes/No)
Phase Yellow (OL A-P)
Phase Next (OL A-P)
Group Yellow (OL A-P)
68
Group
Page
Parameter
Group Next (OL A-P)
Release Phases (OL A-P)
Pedestrian Overlaps
Mode (OL A-P)
Enable (Y/N)
Phase Assign (OL A-P)
Advance Warning Logic
Ped Overlap Enable (POL A-H)
Deact-Delay (Seconds) (POL A-H)
Cond Overlap (POL A-H)
Advance Green Overlaps`
Enable Leading Overlaps (Yes/No)
Advance Green Enables
Lead Overlap Green Time (Seconds)
Phase Next (POL A-H)
Group Next (POL A-H)
Controller - Enhanced
Dynamic Omit/Recall
Dynamic Omits (Groups 1-2) (Y/N)
Omit Phase (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)
If Phase On (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)
If O/L Green on Group (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)
Dynamic Recall (Groups 1-2) (Y/N)
Recall Phase (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)
Recall If Phase On
(Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)
Recall If O/L Green on Group
(Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)
UCF/Soft Flash
UCF Override Hold (Yes/No)
UCF Test A or B
UCF Last
UCF Exit
Density Enables
Density Enable (Yes/No)
Last Car Passage (Yes/No)
Density Phase Enable
Simultaneous Gap Out
Simult. Gap Out Enable (Yes/No)
Simult. Gap Phases
Max 3 Setup
Max Outs to Adjust MX3 (Phases 1-16)
Gap Outs to Adjust MX3 (Phases 1-16)
69
Group
Page
Parameter
Passage Sequence/ Red Revert/
Preemption Override
Red Revert Time (Seconds)
Passage Sequence Enabled (Yes/No)
Min Red Revert = 2 Seconds (Yes/No)
Ext Start Override Preemeption (Yes/No)
Preemption Override Stop Time (Yes/No)
Dimming
Dim Red
Dim Yellow
Dim Green
Dim Dont Walk
Dim Ped Clear
Dim Walk
Overlap Red
Overlap Yellow
Overlap Green
Overlap Dont Walk
Overlap Ped Clear
Overlap Ped Walk
Lead/Lag
Pattern 1-8, Set 1-4, Mode 1-2
Soft Flash
UCF Soft Flash (Yes/No)
Phases to Wig
Phases to Wag
Phases to Yellow
Overlap to Wig
Overlap to Wag
Overlap to Yellow
Coordination
Selection Source
Cycle Source
Free Source
Split Source
Flash Source
Offset Source
Inter TOD Revert (Seconds)
Basic Options/ Offset Seek
Ref to end of Main St. (Yes/No)
Use % for Phase Allocation (Yes/No)
Use % for Offset Entry (Yes/No)
70
Group
Page
Parameter
Use Fixed Force Offset (Yes/No)
Permissive Type
Offset Seeking Mode
Cycles / Offsets
Cycle Length (Seconds)
(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)
Offset 1 (Seconds)
Offset 2 (Seconds)
Offset 3 (Seconds)
Min Length (Seconds)
Coord Enhanced
Coord Phases
Phases (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)
Phase Allocations
Phase Allocations
Cycle/Offset/Split/Free to TOD Circuits
COS/F to TOD#(1-10)
Operating Options
Enhanced Perm (Yes/No)
Invert Free (Yes/No)
Central Override (Yes/No)
Split Matrix (Yes/No)
No PCL Offset Adj. (Yes/No)
4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)
No Early Coord Ped (Yes/No)
Yield Percentage
EGB Percentage
RGB Percentage
# Cycles to out of step
Cycle Sync Options
`Sync Source
Cycle 1-6
Manual Permissives
Auto Perm and FO (Yes/No)
Ped Perm (Seconds)
Start (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)
End (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)
Manual Force Offs
Force Offs (Phases 1-16)
71
Group
Page
Parameter
Adaptive Split
Cycles per Period
Min Force Offs
Splits 1-4 Phases
Offsets 1-5 (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)
Split Matrix
Enable Split Matrix (Yes/No)
Adaptive Split Inhibits (Offsets 1-5) (Cycles 1-6)
No Early Release
No Early Release phases
CS to Time Plan
Time Plan # (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)
COS to Lead/Lag
Configs 1-10
Offset to Free
Number of Sync Pulses (Cycles)
No Offset Line (Seconds)
Multi Offsets (Seconds)
Time of Day (TOD)
Day Plans
Day Plans 1-300
Circuit Plans
Active Circuits (Circuits 1-4) (Plan 1-50)
Week Plans
Sunday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Monday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Tuesday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Wednesday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Thursday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Friday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Saturday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)
Year Plans
Week Plans (Weeks 1-53)
Exception Days
Exception Days 1-50
Circuit Overrides
Circuit State (On/Off/TOD) Ckts 1-255)
Daylight Savings
Spring (Month of Year / Week of Month)
Fall (Month of Year / Week of Month)
Sync Reference
Mode
Time Clock Reset Hour
Time Clock Reset Minute
72
Group
Page
Parameter
Interrupter
Pulses per Cycle
Time Dep Ref HH (Cycles 1-6)
Time Dep Ref MM (Cycles 1-6)
Preemption
Runs 1-6
Run Enable (Yes/No)
Railroad (Yes/No)
PE Input Lock (Yes/No)
Early PE Out (Yes/No)
Max Intervals
Override Flash (Yes/No)
Go to Higher PE (Yes/No)
NEMA Priority (Yes/No)
Hold Only (Yes/No)
User Priority
Double Clear Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)
Lead Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)
Delay Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)
Force Off to 1st Interval (Yes/No)
User Interval Data for Overlap (Yes/No)
Enable Coord During Cyclic Int (Yes/No)
Duration Time (Seconds)
Delay Time (Seconds)
Reservice Time (Seconds)
Omit All last portion of Delay (Seconds)
Fail Max Time (Seconds)
Double Clear Overlap Mode (Seconds)
Red Revert Override (Yes/No)
Green
Walk
Ped Clear
Yellow
Red
Overlap Yellow
Valid Intervals (1-32)
73
Group
Page
Parameter
Dwell Intervals (1-32)
Fixed Intervals (1-32)
Tenth Intervals (1-32)
Exit Intervals (1-32)
Ped Clear -> Yellow Intervals (1-32)
Exit Mode
Exit Phases
Wig Flash Plans 1-16
Wag Flash Plans 1-16
Comm/System Setup
ID / Comm / Phone
Master Type
Intersection ID
Master Identification
Master Port
Monitor Port
Central Port
Port 2 Hardware Type
Port 2 Comm Copy
Port 2 Baud Rate
Port 2 Data bits
Port 2 Parity
Port 2 RTS -> CTS
Port 3 Hardware Type
Port 3 Baud Rate
Port 3 Data bits
Port 3 Parity
Port 3 RTS -> CTS
Modem Init string
Phone 1
Phone 2
Event / Log Data
Event Log Call In 1 and 2
Vol Log Sample Period (Minutes)
MOE Log Sample Period (Minutes)
Speed Trap (1-4) Lead Detector
Speed Trap (1-4) Trailing Detector
74
Group
Page
Parameter
Speed Trap (1-4) Distance
Event Log Enable Options
Port 1 / HDLC Settings
Type 2 I/O Mode
BIU Enables
MMU/Secondary Enables
Channel Assign Phases 1-16
Channel Assign Peds 1-16
Channel Assign Overlaps A-P
Channel Assign Ped Overlaps A-P
Secondary to Secondary 1-16
System Name
Contact Name
Port 2 Physical Address
Port 2 HDLC Group Address
Port 3 Physical Address
Port 3 HDLC Group Address
Unit Config / Security Codes
Security Codes
Supervisory Security Code
Restricted Security Code
Intersection Name
EEPROM Loaded w/Keyboard
Audio Adjust
I/O Steering
I/O Steering
Enable Signal Head Program (Yes/No)
Phase Signal Heads (1-16)
Ped Signal Heads (1-16)
O/L Sig Heads (1-16)
Ped O/L Sig Heads (1-16)
Check Next On Outputs (1-16)
75
Parameter Fields of the M3000 Master
U.S. Traffic Hardware
Parameter Fields of the ATC Controller
In the Upload/Download module, the entire IQ ATC controller database can be viewed,
transmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and fields are available
for the IQ ATC controllers in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details on
programming the IQ ATC controllers, refer to the IQ ATC CBD Operating Manual or the IQ
ATC TS-2 / 2 Operating Manual.
Table 18 – IQ ATC Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module
Group
Page
Parameter
Phase
Phase Options (PHases 1 - 16)
Enabled (Yes/No)
Auto Flash Entry Phase (Yes/No)
Auto Flash Exit Phase (Yes/No)
Non Actuated 1 (Yes/No)
Non Actuated 2 (Yes/No)
Non Lock Detector Memory (Yes/No)
Min Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)
Max Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)
Pedestrian Recall (Yes/No)
Soft Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)
Dual Entry (Yes/No)
Simultaneous Gap Disable (Yes/No)
Guaranteed Passage (Yes/No)
Actuated Rest in Walk (Yes/No)
Conditional Service Enable (Yes/No)
Added Initial Calculation (Yes/No)
Phase Timing (Phases 1 - 16)
Walk (Seconds)
Ped Clear (Seconds)
Min Green (Seconds)
Passage (Seconds)
Max 1 (Seconds)
Max 2 (Seconds)
Yellow (Seconds)
Red Clear (Seconds)
76
Group
Page
Parameter
Red Revert
Added Initial (Seconds)
Max Initial (Seconds)
Time Before Red (Seconds)
Cars Before Red (Seconds)
Time to Reduce (Seconds)
Reduce By (Seconds)
Min Gap (Seconds)
Dynamic Max (Seconds)
Dyn Max Step (Seconds)
Start Up
Sequence
Sequence
Sequences 1 - 16, Rings 1-4 (phase)
Ring Number for Phases 1-16
Concurrency phases for Phases 1-16
Detector
Vehicle Detectors (Detectors 1 - 64)
Detector Options
Call Phase
Switch Phase
Delay (Seconds)
Extend (Seconds)
Queue Limit (Seconds)
No Activity (Minutes)
Max Presence (Minutes)
Erratic Counts (Counts/Minute)
Fail Time (Seconds)
Reset (Yes/No)
Ped Detectors
Call Phase
No Activity (Minutes)
Max Presence (Minutes)
Erratic Counts (Counts/Minute)
Status
Alarms (Detectors 1-64)
Reported Alarms (Detectors 1-64)
Alarms (Pedestrian Detectors 1-8)
Vol/Occ
Vol/Occ Setup
Period (Seconds)
Vol/Occ Report
Sequence Number
Volume (Count) (for Detectors 1-64)
Occupancy (%) (for Detectors 1-64)
77
Group
Page
Parameter
Unit
Unit
Start Up Flash (Period/State)
Auto Ped Clear (State)
Backup Time (Seconds)
Red Revert (Seconds)
Coordination
Coord Setup
Correction Mode
Maximum Mode
Force Mode
Pattern Cycle Time (Patterns 1-48)
Pattern Offset Time (Patterns 1-48)
Pattern Split Number (Patterns 1-48)
Pattern Sequence Number (Patterns 1-48)
Splits 1 - 16
Split Time (Seconds)
Split Mode
Split Coord Phase (Yes/No)
Preempts
Preemptions 1 - 6
Link
Delay (Seconds)
Min Duration (Seconds)
Min Green (Seconds)
Min Walk (Seconds)
Enter Ped Clear (Seconds)
Track Green (Seconds)
Dwell Green (Seconds)
Max Presence (Seconds)
Track Phase
Dwell Phase
Dwell Ped
Exit Phase
Non-Locking Memory (On/Off)
Override Flash (On/Off)
Override Next Preempt (On/Off)
Flash Dwell (On/Off)
Channel Assignments
Channel Setup (Channels 1 - 16)
Control Source (Phase or Overlap)
Control Type
Flash Yellow (Yes/No)
Flash Red (Yes/No)
78
Group
Page
Parameter
Flash Alt Half Hertz (Yes/No)
Dim Green (Yes/No)
Dim Yellow (Yes/No)
Dim Red (Yes/No)
Dim Alt Half Line Cycle (Yes/No)
Overlaps
Overlap Setup
Type
Included Phases
Modifier Phases
Trail Green (Seconds)
Trail Yellow (Seconds)
Trail Red (Seconds)
TS 2 Port 1
TS 2 Port 1 (BIUs 1-8)
Device Present (Yes/No)
Frame 40 Enable (Yes/No)
Status
Fault Frame
Configuration
Configuration (1-3)
DeviceNode
Make
Model
Version
Type
Timebase
Timebase Setup
ASC Pattern Sync
Actions 1 - 48
Pattern
Auxiliary Function 1
Special Functions
Scheduling
Time
Global Time
Daylight Savings
Local Time Differential (Seconds)
Time Base Schedules 1-32
Month
Day
Date
Day Plan (Number)
Day Plans 1 - 32
Day Plan (Hour) (Events 1 - 16)
79
Group
Page
Parameter
Day Plan Minute (Events 1 - 16)
Timebase Action (Events 1 - 16)
Traconex Hardware
Using Traconex Hardware with IQ Central
IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Traconex controllers in the field:
•
390CJ Controllers
•
TMM-500 Master Controllers
Note: 390CJ Controllers can only be managed while operating under a TMM-500 Master.
There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 390CJ local controller.
Parameter Fields of the 390CJ Controller
Parameter Fields of the TMM-500 Master
Transyt Hardware
Using Transyt Hardware with IQ Central
IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Transyt controllers in the field:
•
1880EL Controllers
•
3800EL Master Controllers
Note: 1880EL Controllers can only be managed while operating under a 3800EL Master.
There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 1880EL local
controller.
Parameter Fields of the 1880EL Controller
Parameter Fields of the 3800EL Master
Configuring Intersection Display on Maps
80
Configure Intersections Module
When you've got your maps configured and your devices and connections set up, the next
logical step is to make your devices show up on your maps. For intersection devices (traffic
controllers and masters), there is a special module included with IQ Central to define how
the device will appears in the map environment.
The Configure Intersection module is the very powerful interface used to define what an
intersection will look like on a map. It can be used to define what 'All devices' look like on a
map, how a particular 'Type' of device will appear, or it can be used to define a unique
appearance for each individual device in your database. And it also does this for each of the
'zoom levels' that are available for 'All devices', 'Device type', and individual devices. A
traffic controller, for instance, can have up to four different appearances, based on what
'zoom level' the map is currently showing. Zoom 1 is displayed when the map is showing a
large area and you only want the device to show up with minimal detail. At the other end of
the spectrum, Zoom 4 is displayed when the map is zoomed into a small area around the
device, and you will probably want the device to show a great deal of detail about its current
operation. The Configure Intersection module allows you to set up how the device will
appear in all of these situations.
Note
The actual point where the map switches from one Zoom level display to
another is not defined in this module. If you are using the BMP version of
mapping, the zoom level is defined when you build the static map. If, on the
other hand, you are working with GIS maps, the zoom level is defined using
a special Device Zoom Levels module.
Launching the Configure Intersection Module
The Configure Intersection module can be opened in a number of ways:
Go to the Maps menu and choose Intersection Displays.
Click on the Configure Intersections icon (shown at right) on the Map Configuration
toolbar
The Basic Steps to Set Up an Intersection
When one wants to define how a particular device , or all devices of Device Type, will
appear on the maps, follow these steps:
1.
Make sure the device, the map, and the connection to the device have all been
configured properly.
2.
Open the Configure Intersection module.
3.
Select the Device Type you are working with from the pull-down list at the top of the
window.
4.
Next, pick the particular device you are interested in, using the 'Devices for the
selected Device Type' drop-down list. (If you want to define a default view for this
Device Type, skip this step.)
5.
Select the Zoom level you wish to define.
6.
Make sure that the Settings by option is set to Device Specific.
81
Use the icon buttons and the preview display in the middle of the Configure Intersection
window to set up the display as you wish it to be. Start by defining a background, and then
add control and signal icons.
Make sure each icon is linked to a data field. This will allow you to later poll for those data
items, which will then be updated on your maps. (Note: Version 1.4 of IQ Central added the
very useful Auto Populate Polling tool to the Device Specific view of Configure
Intersections. This will allow you to populate the intersection with all of the icons you wish it
to have, then press Auto Populate Polling for IQ Central to fill in the data fields for all of
those icons.)
When you are finished defining the intersection and zoom level, click on the Save button to
store the settings to the database.
Notes about Opening the Configure Intersection module
The Configure Intersection module can be opened in a couple of ways:
Go to the Maps menu and choose Intersection Displays
or click on the Configure Intersections icon (shown at right) on the Map
Configuration toolbar
82
The Configure Intersection Interface
Figure 42 – Overview of the Configure Intersection interface
Adding an Icon to an Intersection
Within an intersection display, each data object from the device is represented by by an
icon, or control. The terms are used interchangeably in the interface. They just mean a
graphical element that is linked through the communications channel to a data object within
the field device. When the state of the data object changes, the icon is either hidden or
displayed. Some icons, like status icons, can also be used to present text values from the
device within the intersection display.
To add an icon to the display, it's just a matter of selecting the type of icon being inserted by
selecting from the array of icon buttons in the Configure Intersection interface. This array of
buttons changes, depending on what zoom level is being edited. The following table shows
what buttons are available for each zoom level. Each increase in zoom level increases the
number of icon types that can be placed on the intersection display, since one normally
wants to provide more details as one zooms into map view of the intersection.
83
Table 19 – Icons by Zoom Level in the Configure Intersection module
Zoom level
Available Icon buttons
Zoom 1
Zoom 2
Zoom 3
Zoom 4
Each of these buttons presents a drop-down list of all of the icons of a particular type that
are available, based on the type of device with which you are working. Select a background
first, and then add icons for the signals and indicators that you want to appear on the map
view for a device.
Table 20 – Icons used to Configure an Intersection
Button
Purpose
Add a background image. When creating a new intersection display, this should be selected first.
(Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)
Add a simple status dot (changes color based on object value) (Zoom 1 only)
Green phase icon (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)
Yellow phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Red phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Vehicle detector (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Pedestrian signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Don't Walk signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Pedestrian Clearance signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Status field icon (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)
Label text icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Pedestrian Call indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
84
Button
Purpose
Green Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Yellow Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Red Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Phase ON indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Phase NEXT indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Intersection ONLINE indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Intersection Flash indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Intersection Failed indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)
Alarm indicator (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)
After an icon button is pressed (or a particular item is selected from the pull-down list of an
icon button) a default graphic appears in the middle of the preview display area, in the right
half of the Configure Intersection module. You can click and drag this default icon to locate
the signal against the background image.
Changing the Appearance of an Intersection Icon
The controls to change the appearance of an intersection icon appear in the middle left
portion of the Configure Intersection window.
Figure 43 – Selecting an image for an intersection element
The main control that you have over the appearance of an icon is what image file will be
used to represent the data object. IQ Central can use files of type .bmp (the default), .jpg,
.gif, or .wmf. IQ Central comes with a library of icons from which you can choose, or you
can provide your own icons. The only requirement for this is that IQ Central must be able to
locate the image files whenever it is launched.
With only a couple of exceptions, all of the icon types are simple ON/OFF indicators that are
linked to the status of one simple binary variable. When the linked data is ON, the icon
85
appears in the intersection. When the bit is OFF, it is hidden. A phase green icon is a good
example of this type of behavior.
Changing the Graphic File for an Icon
To change the image that is attached to the icon, click on the icon in the preview area.
(Make sure you have the correct icon selected by referring to the text label that appears
above the preview window.) You can then either type in the path to the new image file, or
you can use the Browse button to locate the file in your file system.
Note
It may be easier for you to find the image you want by switching to the
Thumbnail view in the Browse window, and also make sure you are viewing
files of type ALL . . . otherwise you will only see the .bmp image files on your
system.
Intersection Icon Image Library
IQ Central is installed with a large collection of image files that can be used within the
Intersection Configuration module. These include many intersection background images, as
well as a couple of different styles of arrows and other signal indicators. These image files
are stored in the IQ Central\Device Icons\Intersection\ directory, wherever IQ Central was
installed on your system. (The default install location is C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic
Corp\IQ Central\Device Icons\Intersection\.)
Linking Intersection Icons to Data Objects
Each icon in the intersection display is linked to a single data object for the device. The
bottom left section of the Configure Intersections window is used to define what data is
attached to the icon. Below, you can see the general appearance of this area:
Figure 44 – Linking data to an intersection element
a drop down Data list showing all of the data objects in this type of device's master table,
a check box to limit the list to only objects that are typically used for map polling objects
(i.e. icon data linkages that will be updated with live data in the map viewer)
86
An area to select a particular section of the data object that is to be linked to the icon.
This area changes based on the type of data object that is chosen in the Data dropdown list. ('Select a phase' list in the above example.)
When you select and add many of the icon types, a data object will automatically be
selected based on the icon you choose. In the above example, the Data object and phase
selection were chosen automatically when the user selected the Green Phase 1 icon. In
this case, the particular linkage is to the 'Phase 1' bit of the 'phaseStatusGroupGreens.1'
data object.
Another example of the particularity of this area, is shown with this next example, which
appears if one inserts an Alarm icon and links to the data object 'alarmGroupState.2':
The exact data object list that appears depends on which type of device is being edited. But
a good rule of thumb is that the data objects for traffic controller type devices that are most
commonly used for intersection icons are in the 'phaseStatusGroup' portion of the list.
Note that although this interface allows you to connect an icon to a bit of data in the device,
that data is not automatically retrieved when you view the device in the Map Viewer. To set
up that functionality, you will need to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling
for these data objects. Map polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data
across the device's communications channel. The configuration of map polling is done
manually using the Realtime Map Polling module, or you can let IQ Central help you set it
up by using the Auto Populate Polling tool.
Figure 45 – Linking to alarmGroupState.2
87
Setting Up Map Polling
Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons
Once you have configured the icons and linked data of an intersection display, you will
need to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Map
polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device's
communications channel. This polling allows IQ Central to show the current state of the
linked data objects as graphic icons, when the intersection is viewed in the Map View
module. The configuration of map polling can be done manually, using the Realtime Map
Polling module. Or you can let IQ Central help you set up map polling for the specific icons
you've set up in your display, by choosing the Auto Populate Polling tool.
Auto Populate Polling
The Auto Populate Pooling tool is a dialog box that can be called from the Configure
Intersections module. It inspects the intersection that you have set up in that interface, and
based on the icons and data objects that have been placed in the intersection, it attempts to
compile a complete map polling list for you.
Figure 46 – Auto Populate Polling button from the Configure Intersections window
Note
If you have configured some, but not all, of the map polling for a device,
and you decide to launch the Auto Populate Polling tool, the tool will prompt
you with the message at right before you can proceed. Be aware that the
tool will erase your current map polling entries for this device and
attempt to create a completely new table based on the icons currently in the
intersection display.
Figure 47 – Auto populate polling warning message
The Auto Populate Polling tool runs, performs its duty, and then reports on how many rows
of map polling data have been created for this device. An example is shown below.
88
Figure 48 – Auto populate polling completion message
To view the resulting map polling settings, open the Realtime Map Polling module. Default
values are chosen for the polling parameters (such as polling interval and whether to leave
the connection open between polls or not.) These settings can, of course, still be edited on
a row-by-row basis using the controls in the Realtime Map Polling module.
89
The Upload/Download Interface
Controller Upload and Download
Traffic controllers and master controllers are a quite a bit more complex in their data
handling needs than most of the other traffic hardware that IQ Central tracks. They not only
have their internal configuration settings, which are quite extensive, but they also generate
very large sets of logging data, as well as alarm states and interactive controls. Because of
this complexity, and the fact that every controller handles all of this data slightly differently
from one another, IQ Central has a special module just for sending and receiving
configuration parameters from these controllers.
The Controller Upload/Download module provides an environment where a user can
connect with a single traffic controller or master, and the display window will fill with tabs
and data fields appropriate to that device. And the interface then allows the user to send and
retrieve individual parameters to the device in the field, as well as to the IQ Central
database. The state of individual fields are indicated by color coded backgrounds. These
background colors are used to indicate when the memory settings are the same as the
database versions of these settings, and when they are the same as the field device's
values.
Figure 49 – Upload/Download Module
90
Launching the Upload/Download Module
There are several methods that can be used to open the IQ Central Upload/Download
module:
From the Devices menu, open the Intersections group and choose Upload Download
From either the Devices toolbar or the Intersections toolbar, choose the Upload
Download icon(shown below)
Or you can open the Upload/Download module from the Map View module. If you rightclick on an intersection controller or master controller, you will see a context-menu that
looks like the one shown below.Select Upload Download from this menu, and IQ
Central will not only load the module, but also automatically select the device that you
clicked on in the Map Viewer and load its current database values.
Once open, this module allows you to perform the following functions when working with
traffic controllers and masters:
Set single parameter values on a controller
Set whole groups of values on a controller
Retrieving one parameter, a group of parameters, a page, or the entire database from a
controller
Sending and receiving one parameter, a group, a page, or the entire database from the
IQ Central database
Copying a database from one controller to another (of the same type)
Editing default device parameters
Performing a coordination check
See the related topics below for more details about how to perform these functions.
91
The Upload/Download Interface
When the Upload/Download module is launched, it initially presents a blank expression. It
needs to be told with which device type and individual device it will be communicating. (The
exception to this is if you open the module from the Map Viewer, in which case it will
automatically load the groups, pages, and data cells for the selected device automatically.)
Figure 50 – The Upload/Download module with no device selected
The screen is divided into three regions:
the top of the screen is where one selects the device type and device
the middle of the screen is where the device-specific groups, pages, and parameter cells
appear
the bottom of the screen provide controls for sending and receiving parts of the
controller database to the central database and to the device.
Figure 51 – Interface elements of the Upload/Download module
92
When a device is selected, the middle of the module's window is filled with the data fields for
that type of device. The illustration above shows a typical screen for a Peek 3000E
controller. In this example, you can see how the groups and pages of data are modeled to
match the way the data is stored in this particular type of controller, as well as the colorcoded parameter cells in the table, and the data transfer status area just below the data
table. Here, we are in the process of sending all pages and groups to the device. (The
screen reports that IQ Central is currently transmitting Block 98, which is the coordination
phase allocation splits for phases 17 through 24, and the overall transfer is currently 32%
complete.)
Memory, the central database, and the device
One important thing to keep in mind when working with the Upload/Download module is that
you will be working with three copies of the data. There is the copy stored in the IQ Central
central database. There is the copy in active memory. And there is the copy stored out in
the device's memory. The window here always shows the data stored in active memory.
When you first open the module and select a device, IQ Central automatically loads the
copy of the database from the central database into active memory. You can also use the
controls at the bottom of the screen to copy the entire database from the device into active
memory. And then you have the option to make changes to individual cells in the data
tables, or you can send and receive groups of data between the central database or the
field device. All of this can create some confusion about what parameter values are stored
where. This is the reason for the color coding in the data cells, and in the icons that appear
on the Group and Page tabs. The purpose of these codes are to indicate when active
memory matches and differs from the other two copies of the device database. The way
these color codes and icons are used are described in the next topic.
Editing Values in the Tables
The tables that appear under the Groups and Page tabs of the Upload/Download module
represent all of the configurable settings for the selected device. Simple entries can be
editing simply by clicking once and typing the new value. But some fields have more
complicated settings, so these provide a special entry dialog box. To access these entry
windows, just double click the cell. There are three basic types of data that can be edited
on these forms:
Simple Numeric Data
To enter a value in a number field, you can either double click on the cell or simply place the
cursor in the cell and start typing. In either case, the number entry window will open,
allowing you to type in an appropriate value:
Figure 52 – Number entry window
If the field allows a decimal, you can type it in directly. If it is an integer-only field, the dialog
box will not accept the decimal point. If you enter a value that is outside of the range for the
93
parameter, IQ Central will report the error as soon as you press OK. Pressing Cancel will
retain the value that was stored in the parameter before you started editing it.
These general entry rules (error checking, OK, Cancel) are also true for the other two kinds
of data entry.
Phase Input
Fields that require you to choose one or more of the traffic phases for a particular parameter
provide a special phase entry dialog box, shown at right. You can either use the mouse to
check or uncheck the desired boxes, or you can use the keyboard, as follows:
Figure 53 – Phase selection entry window
Table 21 – Keyboard shortcuts to edit phase parameters
Key
Function
1
Toggles the check box for Phase 1 on and off
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Turns all the check boxes on
0
Turns all the check boxes off
Enumerated Values
This is used when there is a fixed list of optional values available for the cell. When a field
can only contain a predefined range of values, when you click on that field, a window will
open allowing you to select one of those predefined values. An example of this kind of data
entry is shown at right, in this case the type of permissive can only be one of three values:
Yield, Single, or Multi. Highlight your selection and click OK to accept it. Or you can click the
Cancel button to retain the old value.
94
Figure 54 – Example of an Enumerated value selection window
Color Codes and Symbols in the Upload Download Module
The Upload/Download module uses color coding, and icons on the page and group tabs, to
indicate how data is synchronized between active memory, the central database, and the
device. It is important to remember that IQ Central always knows the states of the central
database and the active memory versions of the data, but it does not always know what is
stored in the device in the field. The color coding assumes that the device version matches
the database version, until you actually retrieve data from the device and the module
discovers that it does not match.
Color Coding of Table Cells
When data is edited or displayed, the color of the data cell background will indicate the if the
value matches the central database, and if it doesn't, what is the source of the difference:
a Yellow background (shown at right) indicates that the value in active memory matches
the value stored in the IQ Central Database
Figure 55 – Yellow and green cell backgrounds in Upload/Download tables
a dark Green background (also shown at right) indicates that the value has been edited
in active memory by the user, and it now differs from the value stored in the central
database.
95
a Purple background (shown below) indicates that the value is different between active
memory and the central database because it was retrieved from the device, and the
value stored in the device doesn't currently match the central database.
Figure 56 – Purple cell background in the Upload/Download module
These cell background colors work with the difference icons that appear on the Group and
Page tabs of this window to indicate where data has been stored and how it is currently
synchronized with the central database.
Tab Icons
When any value is different between active memory and the central database, an icon
appears on the tabs containing the data. One of the 'difference icons' appears on both the
Page tab and the Group tab containing the data. The icon that appears indicates whether
the data is different in active memory, in the device, or in both places. The illustrations at the
top of this topic show examples of two of the three icons.
Table 22 – Upload/Download module 'Difference' icons
Icon
Meaning
'Different in Active Memory' - The current value of one or more parameters in this page or
group of data is different from the central database
'Different in the Device' - The Device's value for one or more parameters in this page or
group of data is different from the central database
'Different in Both Places' - The values of one or more parameters in this page or group of
data is different from both the central database AND the values stored in the device
Note
96
A group tab that has two pages with different kinds of 'difference' icons
showing will display the combined 'differing in both places' icon.
Getting Data From the Controller
When working with the retrieval or transmission of data objects to and from the database
and the controller, it's important to remember that, when you load a device in the
Upload/Download window:
All of the tabs together are referred to as the entire database, or 'All'
Each top tab is referred to as a 'Group'
Each second tier tab is referred to as a 'Page'
Individual data objects are referred to as 'Selected Cell(s)'
If you want to retrieve the data that is actually stored in the controller, follow these steps:
1.
Open the Controller Upload/Download module by either going to the Devices
menu and opening Intersection > Upload/Download, or clicking on the
Upload/Download button in the Intersection toolbar (shown at right).
2.
Select the required Device Type and the particular Device that you wish to
communicate with.
3.
If you want to retrieve the entire database from the controller, select All from the
Device Values pull-down list in the lower left corner of the Upload/Download window.
4.
If you want to retrieve a whole group of data, select the top level tab for the group
you want to retrieve, and choose Group from the Device Values pull-down list.
5.
If you want to retrieve a single page of data, select the top level tab of the group, and
then pick the particular second tier tab that shows the page you want to retrieve.
Select Page from the Device Values pull-down list.
Figure 57 – An example of choosing the scope of data to retrieve from the controller
6.
If you want to retrieve single data objects, navigate to the group and page where the
cells are located. You can select individual data cells, click and drag to select a block
of cells, or click on a row or column header to select the whole line of cells.
7.
Press the Get button. At this point, IQ Central will communicate with the controller,
and request the data. The Upload/Download status bar will show the progress of the
data retrieval. When the retrieval is finished, the field values will be displayed in the
Upload/Download table.
97
Sending Data to the Controller
Sending data to the controller from IQ Central is very similar to retrieving data. Again, the
same interface elements represent data objects, pages of data, groups of pages, and the
whole database ('All'). If you want to send the data the data that is currently on-screen to a
controller, follow these steps:
1.
Open the Controller Upload/Download module by either going to the Devices
menu and opening Intersection > Upload/Download, or clicking on the
Upload/Download button in the Intersection toolbar (shown at right).
2.
Select the required Device Type and the particular Device that you wish to
communicate with.
3.
Set the values that you wish to send to the controller.
4.
If you want to send the entire database to the controller, select All from the Device
Values pull-down list in the lower left corner of the Upload/Download window.
5.
If you want to send a whole group of data, select the top level tab for the group you
want to send, and choose Group from the Device Values pull-down list.
6.
If you want to send a single page of data, select the top level tab of the group, and
then pick the particular second tier tab that shows the page you want to send. Select
Page from the Device Values pull-down list.
Figure 58 – An example of choosing the scope of data to send to the controller
7.
If you want to send single data objects, navigate to the group and page where the
cells are located. You can select individual data cells, click and drag to select a block
of cells, or click on a row or column header to select the whole line of cells.
8.
Press the Send button. At this point, IQ Central will communicate with the controller,
and transmit the data. The Upload/Download status bar will show the progress of the
data transmission. When the transmission is finished, the field values will be
displayed in the Upload/Download table.
Interacting With the Central Database
The data for each controller that is connected to IQ Central will be stored in the IQ Central
database. Previously, we showed how to send and retrieve data from a controller using the
controls in the 'Device Values' area of the Upload/Download module. Sending and retrieving
data to the central database works very similarly, except it uses the controls in the Database
Values area at the bottom of the module.
98
Figure 59 – Controls in the Upload/Download module to interact with the IQ Central database
Just as with getting data from the controller and sending data to the controller, getting and
sending data to the database involves selecting the scope of data to move, i.e. individual
Cells, a whole Page, a whole Group of pages, or the entire controller database ('All'). Once
you've select the information to move, just press the Refresh button to pull data out from the
central database, or press the Save button to store the data to the central database.
Copying Settings Between Controllers
The ability to copy parameters and entire databases from one traffic controller to another
was added in IQ Central version 1.3. This is done using a new module, the Copy Device
Data module, which can be launched in a couple of ways:
By clicking on the Copy button in the Controller Upload/Download module
Or by going to the Devices menu, opening the Intersections group, and selecting Copy
Devices.
Figure 60 – Copy Device Data module
The Copy Device Data module allows one to copy all or part of a traffic controller (or master)
database to another device of the same type. Although it will allow you to specify types other
than controllers and masters, when you do so, you will be presented with a blank list of
options for copying. It's important to remember that this module is merely copying the data
entries inside the IQ Central database. You will need to send the new settings out to the
destination device after you have copied them here, for them to actually work on the new
hardware.
The interface has the following parts:
Database component selection window – The left half of the module's window is
populated by a representation of a device database. This area isn't filled in until you
make a selection in the Device Type selection list. If the type is one that cannot currently
99
be copied, no database listing will be provided. At the moment, the module only allows
copying between devices in the traffic controller category.
Device Type selection – Use this pull-down menu to select the type of device you will
be copying from and to. The copying function works only within a device type, meaning
you can only copy from one Traconex TMM-500 to another, or from one Peek 3000E to
another. But you cannot copy from a Traconex controller to a Peek controller, or from a
controller to a master.
Copy From/Copy To fields – These allow you to select which devices will serve as the
source of the configuration parameters, and which will serve as the destination.
Select All/Select None buttons – These buttons allow you to check all or remove all
the checks from the database component selection window list in the left half of the
module's window.
Copy button – Once the source and destination devices are selected, and you've
selected which parts of the database to copy using the Database component selection
window, press this Copy button to actually copy the data from one device to the other.
Copy progress bar – As the data is copied from one device's database to the other,
this progress bar shows how the copying process is proceeding. A complete database
copy can take some time, depending on the size of the database, and the speed of the
computer.
Close button – This shuts down the Copy Device Data module.
100
Central Override of Traffic Controllers and Masters
In the parlance of traffic controllers and masters, an 'override' is a command sent by a
central system software package that tells the device to exit from its normal operating mode
and switch to the operation specified by the override command. This could be a change
from the normal coordination pattern to a new pattern, the entry into a preemption sequence,
entry into intersection Flash mode, or any other central-software specified operational
change.
Figure 61 – Central Override control window
With the release of IQ Central version 1.4, the capability was added for IQ Central to send
central override commands to traffic controllers and masters that have been configured to
accept such commands. This is done in IQ Central through the Map Viewer module. Using
the Map View module, override commands to change to a new pattern, to free operation, to
Flash operation, or to resume Normal operation can be done for one controller, or a group of
controllers. When a central override command is requested for a device, IQ Central
presents the window shown here, which allows the operator to specify which type of
override command to send to the field device. (This capability, naturally, assumes that the
communications channel to this device is available and properly configured.)
Note
If you decide to send a central override command that puts the intersection
into Flash mode, IQ Central will ask you to verify your IQ Central login. This
is a security feature, since going to Flash at the wrong time can be a safety
concern. It also emphasizes the need for your IQ Central systems
administrator to manage and maintain user accounts with traffic network
security in mind.
101
102
Chapter 5 – Camera Management
IQ Central can manage, monitor and interactively control NTCIP cameras. Using its normal
device and connection management tools, IQ Central can be used to configure and
communicate with these traffic monitoring cameras. Once a camera is configured and
communicating with the central software, you can go further and set up a video
communications channel, over which actual video from the device can be routed into IQ
Central. The program also includes a couple of dedicated modules for working with NTCIP
cameras, allowing a central operator to control focus, zoom, iris, pan, tilt and video detection
zones (for cameras that have those control available) using a graphical interface.
If you want to both control and see video from a camera, two communications channels will
need to be defined. The simple control channel is the same type of Connection channel as
defined for any other type of device in IQ Central. The channel for video from your camera,
however, requires that you set up a special 'Video Connection', using the module of the
same name within IQ Central. Both steps are described below.
103
Creating a Camera-NTCIP Device
Creating a camera device in IQ Central is basically just like creating any other type of
device, but we'll walk through the exact steps here for clarity.
1.
First, we need to verify that the Camera-NTCIP device type is available in your
version of IQ Central. Not all versions of IQ Central include the camera device type.
Go to the Tools menu and open the Advanced Options submenu. From this area,
select Device Types. This opens the Enter/Edit Device Type window.
2.
Open the Device Type pull-down menu from the top of the Enter/Edit Device Type
window. Verify that the device type 'Camera NTCIP ' appears in the list. If it does not,
you will need to contact your Peek Traffic technical support representative to request
assistance in installing this device type.
3.
Close the Enter/Edit Device Type window.
4.
Open the Overview of Device Configuration window (Devices menu > Add New
Device...)
5.
Double-click on a blank row to open a new device window.
6.
From the pull-down list at the top of the Device window, select New Device... (It
appears at the top of the list.)
7.
In the Device Type field, select Camera NTCIP.
8.
Select the Connection that will be used for the control channel for this camera. (The
video channel for the camera will be set up separately, later.) This Connections list is
populated by channels that have already been defined in the Overview of
Connections module. That process was described previously, and can be read about
here.
9.
Give the camera a unique Device Name and Description. (Uniqueness is not
required by IQ Central, it's just a good idea.)
10.
Set the Device Address field or fields. The number of Address fields to fill out and
how to populate them depends on the type of device and the type of connection it is
using. These fields are important to the proper functioning and routing of SNMP
messages (of which, NTCIP is the type being used in IQ Central.) Read 'Setting
Device Addresses' for a detailed description of how to set these values.
11.
Select the Save button.
12.
Click on Close to exit from the Enter/Edit Devices screen.
13.
Close the Overview of Device Configuration list.
Before the new device will appear in device lists throughout IQ Central, you will first need to
restart the application.
104
Chapter 5 – Camera Management
Camera Control Module
This module is only useful if the system has devices installed with a Device Type of
"Camera". Opening the Camera Control module allows the operator to change the settings
for a camera. The controls within this module that may be used depend on the options
available in the selected camera. Before you can make changes to settings, you will first
need to select a camera from the pull-down listing.
Once a camera is selected, depending on its available features, you may be able to
remotely adjust its zoom, focus, iris, tilt, and pan. And, no matter what the available features
are for a particular camera, you can save those that are available as a preset configuration.
105
106
Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management
IQ Central includes a set of modules specifically designed to allow a central technician to
manage variable message signs in the field. Message signs can be configured as devices
and placed on maps just like any other device in IQ Central, but the following modules let
the operator interact directly with these kinds of devices. This allows IQ Central to be used
to upload and download font sets, define and select sign messages, configure message
schedules, set up on-board error logging and log retrieval, as well as more advanced
features like automatic incident management.
107
Controls to Manage Traffic Signs
Traffic sign management can be performed either from the Message Sign toolbar (individual
buttons from that toolbar are shown in the table below), or by going to the Devices menu,
choosing Message Signs, and choosing the desired module to open.
Table 23 – Toolbar buttons used to perform traffic sign management
Button
108
Opens module...
Description
Control module
This is the interface used to directly view or set the message that appears on a
single message sign.
Summary module
This module allows one to send and receive multiple data objects (such as time
settings, diagnostics commands, sign status, error log setup) for a single
selected message sign.
Bulk Operations module
This module can be used to perform bulk data transfers (such as all messages
or all fonts) to and from a message sign.
Brightness Control module
As the name suggests, this interface is used to change the brightness of the
message on a message sign, or to view the status of a photo sensor, for signs
with those capabilities.
Edit Master Fonts module
This is used to retrieve, send, or edit the individual characters of a sign's font
files.
Edit Schedules
The Sign Scheduler module allows for the set-up of a kind of 'Time of Day'
operation for message signs. This module can be used to set up pre-timed
message change events, day plans, and weekly and annual schedules.
Error Logs
This module is used to configure what sign status data to monitor for error
conditions, when to log errors, and also provides an interface to retrieve and
clear event logs.
Allows SNMP security settings to be configured for a message sign device.
(Note: The menu command for this is at Devices > SNMP Device Security.)
Sign Control Module
The Sign Control form is used to interact with all the signs that you have connected . The
current data for that sign will be displayed in the fields. All the available pre-programmed
and changeable messages will be displayed. If you want to display all the pre-programmed
messages, make sure that Message Type pre-programmed is selected. If you want to view
the changeable messages, make sure that Message Type changeable is selected.
Both the Changeable Messages and Preprogrammed messages are stored on the sign
controller. IQ Central allows you to display the pre-programmed messages on the sign from
your computer, but you cannot edit the pre-programmed messages in any way. The
Changeable messages are also stored on the sign controller. Using IQ Central, you can
check the contents of these messages (by using the Get selected Message from Sign
button). You can also change these messages and download them to the sign for future or
current displaying on the sign.
The Connect\Disconnect (red/green) button will display Connect (red) if you are not
connected to the sign and Disconnect (green) if you are connected to the sign. If the button
is green, a connection has already been established. If the button is red, establish a
connection by selecting the required device and clicking on the red button.
To Send a Changeable Message to the Sign
If you want to send a changeable message to a sign, you should first select the device by
clicking on the drop down list box and highlighting the required sign. Then, select
Changeable Message type by clicking on the Changeable radio button.
All the available Changeable Messages for that Device will be displayed in the message
window. Highlight the one that you want to send to the sign. The message itself and its
display information - Duration and Priority will display in the field below the message list.
Now that you have the message selected, you can choose from the range of Message
Commands that are available. To send the message to the sign (and not display it) click
Send Only. To send the message to the sign and display it, click on Send and Display.
Note about the Display Message on Sign
You should be cautious when using this option. The message number that you have
highlighted in the Device Messages list will be the message that is displayed on the sign.
This may not be the same message on the sign – in other words, the text of the message
that you see in IQ Central may not be the same as the text of the message that is loaded on
the sign controller. To avoid this happening, highlight the number of the message that you
want to display on the sign. Click on the Retrieve Selected Msg button. The text of that
message as it is loaded on the sign controller will then be displayed on IQ Central. If the text
is OK, click on the Display Only button and that message will be displayed. If the text of the
message is incorrect, you can edit that message (by clicking the Edit Message button), and
then click the Send and Display button. Alternatively, you may want to select another
message and check if the content of that message is correct and then display that message.
Add a New Message
If you want to add a new message, position the cursor on an “empty” line in the message list
and then click on the New Message button. The Edit Message window will open, allowing
you to create your new message.
109
When you have finished creating your message click on Close. The message will be
displayed in the Message List and the MULTI Msg window. Click on the Save button to save
the message to the database and Send Only if you want to send the message to the sign. If
you want to send and display the message on the sign, click on the Send And Display
button.
Edit an Existing Message
If you want to edit a message that already exists, highlight that message in the Device
Messages list and click on the Preview Button. This will open the Sign Message Edit window
so that you can make the required changes. Remember to send the message to the sign
and save it in the database.
Sign Message Edit Screen
The Message Editor allows you to create new messages of varying types or configurations
as well as edit existing messages. This application gives you the flexibility of sending what
you want to your sign, along with how you want the message displayed.
To open the message editor, open the Sign Control Module, select a sign type Device ,
highlight one of the messages in the message list, and press the Edit Message button. This
will open the basic Sign Message Edit window, as shown here. Click on the image below to
see details about this interface.
Figure 62 – Sign Message Edit screen
Sign Message Editor - Advanced Screen
Clicking the Advanced button in the basic Sign Message Edit screen will open a screen of
advanced message options. This interface allows an operator to insert advanced tags into
the MULTI string that control how the pages will appear and how they will be displayed. The
tags that can be inserted from the Advanced screen are:
New Line (nl)
New Page (np)
Line Justification (jlx)
Page Justification (jpx)
Flash On/Off and Time (fltxoy and /fl)
Page On/Off and Time (ptxoy)
110
Click on the sample screen shown below to see more details about each control.
Figure 63 – Advanced Sign Message Edit screen
Moving Text Editing Screen
This option allows you to insert various types of moving text into your MULTI Msg input box.
It is available only on the Advanced screen of the Sign Message Editor. An example of the
Moving Text editing screen is shown here. Click on the sample screen to see more details
about the controls.
Figure 64 – Moving Text Editing screen
Displaying a Message Page with Preset Times
If you want the page to be displayed for a specific length of time (other than the default time), enter the
required values in tenths of a second, in the Page On and Page Off fields. Then click on the Timer button and
the new page tag will be inserted with the specified page on and page off times. Then type in the text for the
new page.
111
Displaying a Message Page for the Default Time
The default time for Page On and Page Off is specified on the Message Defaults tab located
under Maintenance, in the Sign Summary module. If you want the page to display using
these defaults, you need only click the New Page button and then type the text for the new
page in the MULTI Msg window.
112
Overview of the Sign Summary Module
The Sign Summary module contains several tabs that provide information about the
currently selected message sign. This is also the place where system defaults are set for
message signs.
A connection must be established to the sign before data can be sent to or retrieved from a
sign. To connect to the sign, select the required sign from the Device : list and click on the
Connect button (just to the right of the Device list.) If the button is green, IQ Central is
already connected to the sign.
To display information about the sign, select the Tab that contains the required information,
and click on the Refresh button on that tab. Note that each tab has its own Refresh button
and each time the Device is changed or another tab is selected, the refresh button must be
clicked to retrieve data.
The following tabs are available in the Sign Summary module:
Sign Configuration
Sign Status
Time
Message Defaults
Manual Poll
Sign Information
Pixels
Diagnostics
Note
If you just want to run one or more quick diagnostic checks on the message
sign, use the Diagnostic Tests tab of the Bulk Operations module.
Sign Configuration
The Sign Configuration module contains details of the physical attributes of the sign. The
following information can be obtained by clicking on the refresh button one the device has
been selected and a connection has been established.
Sign Status
The Sign Status tab of the Sign Summary module provides details of the current status of
the sign as far as temperature, door status, fan status and electrical information is
concerned. This information can be retrieved from the sign by clicking on the Refresh button
once a connection has been established with the sign.
The following information is available on this tab:
Time
This represents the number of seconds that should be used when periodic mode is
selected.
113
Message Defaults
The Message Defaults Tab contains details of the default messages that are to be used by
the sign under certain specific conditions. In addition, it contains the defaults that the system
is to use when creating a new message.
If you want to view the defaults that are currently in use by the sign, select the sign from the
drop-down Device list box. Then click on the Refresh button, and the values that are
currently in use by the sign will be returned. If you make any changes to these defaults, you
should save them to the database (click Save) as well as send them to the sign (Update
Sign).
Manual Polling
This is a utility that will poll the selected device and display the retrieved information. The
information that is displayed can be edited by the user. These values are defined using the
Configure Logs option in Maps.
Sign Information
This returns details about the Make, Model and Software Versions of the Device .
Pixels Tab
This tab in the Sign Summary module is to allow for a more detailed analysis of the pixel
operation of the selected message sign. Although the group test for Pixel operation in the
Bulk Operations module does provide an overall health assessment for pixel operations, this
tab allows for a much finer diagnostic of pixel operation.
Diagnostics Tab in the Sign Summary module
Although several of the tabs in the Sign Summary module can have diagnostic functions, the
Diagnostics tab is particularly designed to allow for interactive analysis of the operation of a
message sign. After selecting a Device from the list at the top of the window and pressing
Refresh, the operator can make changes to the white fields in this window and use the
values in the grayed (read-only) fields to understand how the sign is operating.
Control Mode - This field indicates what equipment is driving the message sign. Do not
change this value unless you are fully aware of the implications of that change. The
available Control modes are: Other, Local, External, Central, Central Override, Simulation.
SW Reset - This control can be used to send a controller reset command to the sign. To
reset the sign, change the value to Reset. Once the sign's controller has been reset, this
field will change back to No Reset.
Message Table Source - This field indicates the message number that is used to generate
the currently displayed message. This is a read-only field that cannot be edited.
Message Requestor - This read-only field stores a copy of the value in the Activate
Message field. If the current message was not activated, then this field will display a value of
0.
Memory Management - This field can be used to manage the sign's onboard memory.
'Other' is used on a by-sign basis. 'Normal' is the normal operating mode for memory. 'Clear
Changeable Messages' tells the sign to delete this part of memory. 'Clear Volatile
Messages' can be used to delete this part of memory.
114
Activate Message Error - An Activate Message is a code that tells the sign which message
to display. This value is set when a message is sent to the sign for display. If a problem
occurs when the sign attempts to activate the selected message, an error occurs and the
message is not displayed. When this happens, an error is reported in this field.
Short Error Status - This indicates a summary of all of the errors that currently exist for this
sign. It is a read-only field, some details about these error codes are listed below.
Controller Error - The value in this field indicates the particular type of error that has
occurred with the sign's controller. This is a read-only field and the valid values are: Other
controller error, PROM error, Program/processor error, or RAM error. Details about what
these errors mean require consulting your sign's controller documentation.
Syntax Error - This error code identifies the first detected syntax error within a MULTI
message. It is a read-only field and the valid values are: Other, None, Unsupported tag,
Unsupported tag value, Text too big, Font not defined, Character not defined, Field device
does not exist, Field device error, Flash region error, Tag conflict, and Too many pages.
Syntax Error Position - This indicates the offset from the first character of the MULTI
message where the syntax error has occurred.
Other Error Description - This indicates any IQ Central specific error messages.
Note
For a quick overall assessment of the sign's systems, try using the
automatic Diagnostic Tests that are part of the Bulk Operations module.
115
Bulk Operations Module
This Tab contains utilities that will allow you to perform bulk downloads to and from a
message sign.
To retrieve the information from the sign, check the check boxes for the information that you
wish to retrieve and then click on the Refresh button. Then Save that information to the
database by clicking on the Save button. To update the sign controller with the information,
click on the Update Sign button.
If you select a sign and then click Update Sign, the information that is currently stored in the
database will be sent to the sign.
It is recommend that as part of the regular housekeeping of your signs that you ensure that
the information on the signs and the information in your database is synchronized on a
regular basis. To do this, select a sign and then click on the Refresh button. This will cause
all the information (as indicated by the check boxes selected) to be uploaded from the sign
so that you can then click on Save to update the database.
To update a sign with information that is stored on the database, check the applicable check
boxes and then click on the Update Sign button.
Diagnostic Topics
The Diagnostic Tests tab, located within the Bulk Operations module, allows you to do a
quick check of all the subsystems on a message sign. Check the box next to each test that
you wish to perform and then click the Run Diagnostics button. A Green check mark will be
displayed if the test was successful and a red X will be displayed if the test failed.
If a test fails, you can run more detailed diagnostics (or simply see more details) using the
Sign Summary module:
Table 24 – Diagnostic Tests available for Message Signs
Diagnostic Test
Location for Further Details
Pixels
Sign Summary/ Pixels
Fans
Sign Summary/Sign Status
Door Status
Temperature
Line Volts
Controller Error
Sign Summary/Diagnostics
Power Supplies
More detailed and more targeted diagnostics tools for message signs are located in the
Sign Summary module.
116
Brightness Control Module
If you are controlling the brightness of the sign manually, you can set the desired level of the
brightness here. Enter the required level and then Send to the Sign.
Master Fonts Module
The Master Fonts Module is also known as the Font Editor. Whatever it is called, this
module allows a user to view and edit the fonts that are used by message signs connected
to IQ Central. The following topics describe how to access the Font Editor and how to use
the interface.
Using the Font Editor Interface
The Font Editor allows a user to edit the fonts and special characters that are used in your
traffic message signs.
Figure 65 – Font View screen
See the following topics on the parts of the Font Editor window to see more information
about each piece of the interface.
Editing a Font
To edit any selected font, manipulate the pixels into their desired format by clicking on them
in the display box in the left hand side of the form. This allows you to customize any
character in any set of fonts.
117
Schedules Module
IQ Central includes a schedules module that is designed especially for message signs that
is completely separate from the Traffic Controller Scheduler. Message sign schedules
contain a collection of Day Plans that determine what should be displayed on the sign at a
particular time and/or a particular day or selection of days.
See Day Plans and Schedules for more information.
When schedules are created and saved to a Device , they need to be activated before they
will run. When schedules are activated (see Activate Schedule), you must remember that
each and every schedule that has been saved to the Device will be activated and displayed.
Please check all the schedules that are resident on the Device before activating schedules.
To do this, select a schedule number on the Schedules tab and Refresh. This will recover
the schedule details from the sign so that you can check the contents of the schedule.
Repeat this for each available Schedule number.
Opening the Message Sign Schedules window
These controls can be accessed under the Devices menu by navigating to the Message
Signs > Edit Schedules control.
Day Plans and Schedules
This function allows you to specify certain events that are to occur at certain times on
selected days. The simplest way to describe how this works is to work though an example.
We'll walk through how one would create a day plan and schedule for a message sign:
118
1.
You must be connected to the sign before you send data to the sign. To connect to
the sign, open the Sign Control window; select the required sign from the Devices list
and click on the Connect button. Then return to Edit Schedules.
2.
Let's assume you want to display Changeable Message 1 at 6am and Changeable
Message 2 at 6pm every weekday of the year. In addition, you want Changeable
Message 2 to be displayed all weekend (from 6pm on Friday until 6am on Monday)
every weekend. To do this, we need to set up a schedule that will be tied to a
specific day plan that will activate two separate events. To accomplish this, configure
Schedule 1 to activate Day Plan 1 every month (all months checked), Monday
through Friday (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday checked)
every day of the month (all days checked).
3.
Save this schedule to the database by clicking on the Save button.
4.
Update the sign by clicking on the Update Sign button. The schedule is configured,
but the day plan has not been defined yet. That's our next thing to do.
5.
Click on the Day Plans tab so that we can set up Day Plan 1, which is already linked
to the Schedule 1 schedule that we have just created.
6.
Select Day plan Number 1, and select Day Plan Event Number 1. This Day Plan
event is to be activated at 6am so the Day Plan Event Time should be set to have
Hour = 6 and Minute = 0.
7.
We then need to indicate what action is to be taken by this event number. Indicate
Day Plan Action 1, which will be set up on the Events and Actions tab to display
Changeable Message 1.
8.
Save the Day Plan to the Database (click on Save to Database) and update the sign
(click Update Sign.)
9.
Select the Events and Actions tab. Here we need to set up Display Message Action
1 to display Changeable Message 1.
10.
It is important that you check the content of the message that you specify here
before you create the schedule. To do this, click on the Sign Control Button, select
the sign and highlight the required message (in this case Changeable Message 1).
Then click on the Get from Sign button and preview the message.
Note
Each message has a CRC number that is calculated for it when that
message is created and whenever it is changed. This is a calculated
value that indicates the current version of the message. When you
specify a message for an action, you must retrieve the CRC for that
message from the sign. That CRC number is then stored together
with the message number in the database and on the sign. If, when
the schedule runs, the message that is specified in the schedule has
a CRC that is different than the one that was saved at the time the
schedule was created, the message will not be displayed and the
action will be ignored. This eliminates the probability that another
operator could change a message that is allocated to a schedule,
causing an incorrect message to be displayed.
11.
Before you click on Save to Database to save this action to the database and Update
Sign to save this information on the sign, click on the Refresh CRC from sign so that
the current version of that message is allocated to the action.
12.
We must now repeat the previous two steps to create a day plan event for displaying
changeable message 2 at 6pm.
13.
Select the Day Plan tab.
14.
Next, we need to set up Day Plan Event Number 2, which will call Day Plan Action 2
at 6 p.m. Note that the Day Plan Event Time is in military time format – 6pm is
18h00.
15.
Save to the database and update the sign again.
16.
Click on the Events and Actions tab to set up Day Plan Action 2 which will activate
17.
Once again, remember to check the contents of changeable message 2 before
adding it to the day plan, and retrieve the CRC from the sign for that message.
18.
Save the information to the database and update the sign again.
Now, as far as the displaying of Changeable Message 2 on the weekend is concerned,
remember that Changeable Message 2 has been set to display at 6pm on Friday. No other
action has been specified to take place until 6am on Monday morning. So, we do not have
to do anything else to keep Changeable Message 2 displaying all weekend.
119
Error Logging on Message Signs
This module is used to set up error logging for a message sign, viewing the messages that
the sign has recorded as a result, and it also provides controls for clearing some or all of the
backlog of error messages from the IQ Central database. As with all of the tools for message
signs, first one needs to select the message sign you wish to configure using the drop down
list at the top of the module, check that the communications channel is open by verifying the
connection indicator to the left of the selected device is GREEN. (If not, click on the indicator
to tell IQ Central to connect to the selected device.)
The Error Logs module has three tabs:
Event Groups and Events - Configuration of how IQ Central logs message sign events
and what events are recorded
Clear Event Logs - Provides tools to clear some or all of the stored events for this sign
View Recorded Events - View some or all of the event log messages for this particular
sign
When you've made changes to any of the settings on these Error Logs tabs, be sure to
choose the Update Sign and/or Save the changes to record the new settings to the device
and the IQ Central database, respectively.
Event Groups and Events
This portion of the Error Logs module is used to configure which message sign events IQ
Central pays attention to, and what events are recorded to the sign's event log. Message
sign event logs are stored in the IQ Central database.
Error logging for message signs allows you to configure logging based on a defined event,
which is just a test condition where a particular NTCIP object is monitored for one of several
conditions. Each event can be given its own label. And groups of events can be put together
into Event Groups, also with their own labels. And Event Groups can then be pulled up for
viewing on the View Recorded Events tab, or deleted using the Clear Event Log tab.
The fields and controls on this tab are described in the following topics.
Clear Event Log
This option is used to clear logs. You can select to clear a specific Event Group or you can
clear all the entries in the log.
To clear a specific Event Group, click on the drop down list box for Event Group and select
the required Event Group. Under Device Action, select the date before which you want the
entries deleted by clicking on the drop down list box and selecting the required date from
the calendar that opens. Then check the “Clear Event Log Entries for the Selected Event
Group Only” check box. A message will be displayed asking that you confirm your next step.
If you are sure that you have made the correct selections, click on Yes to proceed and the
Event log will be cleared as requested. If you need to amend your selections, click on No to
return to the Clear Event Log screen so that you can make the necessary changes.
120
View Recorded Events
This allows you to view the contents of the message sign's Log File. You can select to view
just those events for a specific Event Group. You also have the option, within the selected
Event Group, to see only events within a certain date range.
The bottom of this screen also has two check-boxes that can be used to clear out some of
the events in this sign's event log, although you'll have more detailed controls over event log
clearing if you use the Clear Event Log tab of the Error Logging module.
121
SNMP Device Security Module
Using this feature without fully understanding the consequences of the changes you make
could result in communication with any or all of your Devices being permanently disabled.
To understand a little bit about the device-level security that is provided as part of the SNMP
protocol, we've described how it operates in a separate topic. This device-level security is
managed in IQ Central using the Device Security module, also known as the SNMP Device
Security module.
Note
In IQ Central versions up to and including version 1.4, the Device Security
module only supports SNMP Device Security settings for message sign
devices. At present, the editing of SNMP Device Security settings is not
implemented for traffic controllers, cameras, weather stations, or any of the
other device types within IQ Central.
Opening the Device Security Module
There are a couple of ways to launch the SNMP Device Security Module:
•
Use the SNMP Device Security module icon, which is located in the Message Sign toolbar:
•
Or you can open the Devices menu and choose SNMP Device Security.
To see how the Device Security interface works, check out this Example Screen.
Device-Level Security
SNMP communications, the basis for the NTCIP protocol, provides for a password to be
created to control who has access to Devices. This password is referred to as the
Community Name. The default Community name is public. The “public” Community Name
can only be changed using a “Super Password”. The default “Super Password” is
administrator.
Note
In IQ Central versions up to and including version 1.4, the Device Security
module only supports SNMP Device Security settings for message sign
devices. At present, the editing of SNMP Device Security settings is not
implemented for traffic controllers, cameras, weather stations, or any of the
other device types within IQ Central. And the rules listed here for the operation
of device-level security are currently only in force for message signs.
All of your Devices must use the same Community Name. If you change it for one Device ,
you must change it for all Devices, and any new Devices that are connected must also be
updated to this Community Name as soon as they are connected. This is not an insignificant
challenge and we recommend that you do not make any changes to either the User
Community Name (Password) or the Administrator Community name (Super Password)
unless you are absolutely sure of what you are doing, and the advantages of restricting
unauthorized access to your Devices far outweigh the disadvantages of ensuring that the
changes to Community Names are administered correctly.
Effectively, if a transaction is sent to a Device with the incorrect Community Name, the
transaction is “silently discarded”. The Device appears to be broken and the transaction is
ignored. No error message is returned advising you of this action.
122
Chapter 7 - Incident Management Module
Incident Management is a tool that allows you to automate processes that are predefined,
depending on data that is received from external sources. At preset intervals, IQ Central will
poll the Devices, retrieve specified data, and use that data in calculations to determine the
action (if any) that should be triggered. Incident Management uses Excel as the calculation
engine. A standard Excel spreadsheet template is provided and this forms the basis for all
the calculations that are performed by the Incident Management feature.
The spreadsheet consists of three sheets. The first sheet contains the input that is to be
used to determine if any action needs to be taken. The data from this sheet is passed to the
second sheet which manipulates the data and thus determines if any action needs to be
taken. The results of the data manipulation are passed to the third sheet which then triggers
the required output, depending on the outcome from the second sheet.
123
Configuring the Incident Spreadsheets
Some functionality of the Incident Management module is controlled using Excel
spreadsheets. These spreadsheets are stored in a single Excel file in the IQ Central
directory where you installed the system. It's called 'Incident Management Template.xls'.
The file consists of three separate sheets. The first sheet ('Input Objects') contains the input
that is to be used to determine if any action needs to be taken. The data from this sheet is
passed to the second sheet ('Calculations') which manipulates the data and thus determines
if any action needs to be taken. The results of the data manipulation are passed to the third
sheet (Output Actions') which then triggers the required output, depending on the outcome
from the second sheet.
To select the input for the first sheet of the spreadsheet:
1.
Click on the Configure Spreadsheet button.
2.
Select the Device Type from the list. All the Devices of that Type that are configured
in IQ Central will be listed, as well as the available Log Table objects. Note that the
objects that are displayed for selection here are the only objects that can be used as
data for the calculations in the Incident Management module.
3.
The available Log table Objects are those objects that are included in the Log
Configuration for each Device. The Log is configured in Maps, and the maps Log
determines which objects will be retrieved from a Device when it is polled.
Note: If the Device(s) that you are intending to use as the source of data for your
Incident Management calculations is not one of the Devices on your Map and does
not have a Log Configured, no objects will be available to you for selection when you
configure the spreadsheet in Incident Management.
4.
Click the checkboxes next to the Devices that are to be used in the Spreadsheet.
Once the Devices have been checked, the list of Available Log Table Columns will
be un-grayed and you will be able to select them for your spreadsheet.
5.
Highlight the required object and then click on the double right arrow to move the
selected object for each of the selected Devices to the Spreadsheet Column
Selection window.
6.
Once you have made all the required selections, click on the Update Excel
Spreadsheet button.
Note: Until you Retrieve the values for the spreadsheet, the Log Date Time, the OID
Value, and Status fields will remain empty.
The Calculation spreadsheet will use the data that it retrieved into Sheet 1 (Input Objects)
and will then perform calculations to determine what action should be taken. The
calculations are performed using standard Excel formulas and macros. Calculations will be
triggered by a change in the Input values in sheet 1 (Input Objects) when the Devices are
polled. If there is no change to the input data, no calculations are performed and no output
actions are triggered. If there are changes in the data retrieved, the calculation is triggered
and output Actions are triggered.
When it has completed its calculations, specific cells will be marked and the program will
use these cells to determine if any action is to be taken. If some action is to be taken, that
action will be performed by Sheet 3 (Output Actions).
124
Defining Actions
There are a range of actions that can be triggered by Incident management.
1.
To define Actions, select the 3rd Sheet (Output Actions) and double click on an
empty line – preferably the first empty line, in the Action Column. Select from one of
the following Actions:
Activate Message -- This will activate the message specified in Message on the
specified Device, using the Duration and Priority settings indicated here.
Download and Activate Message -- This will download the message generated
by Sheet 2 (Calculations), on the Device specified by the Output Actions using the
Duration and Priority settings specified on the Output Actions sheet.
Trigger Scenario -- This will trigger the Scenario selected in the Scenario and
SOPs field. If there is a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) attached to the
Scenario, that SOP will also be included in the activation.
Trigger Scenario SOP -- Only the selected Standard Operating procedure will be
triggered and not the Scenario to which it is attached.
Trigger Camera Preset -- This will trigger the camera presets indicated in the
Camera Preset field.
2.
Each row of the Output Action sheet will contain one action that is to be triggered. If
you want to trigger a message that should be displayed on multiple Devices, you
would create a scenario that would cater for that and then trigger that Scenario in
Incident Management.
3.
The Status cell for each action is the indicator that Incident Management uses to
trigger each Action. If the status is Active, the Output Action specified in that row will
be activated.
4.
Close Excel and Save the spreadsheet.
125
126
Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central
IQ Central has a single module that is designed to make IQ Central an important and useful
tool for dealing with emergency and crisis situations. We've divided the discussion of these
topics into two areas: Scenarios and Amber Alerts, even though they are both managed
with a single tool.
In IQ Central, both types of situations are primarily assumed to be concerned with message
sign operations, although scenarios can also implement traffic camera events as well.
Configuring a Scenario or Amber Alert
To configure either a Scenario or an Amber Alert, you just need to open the module and
create a event plan of the selected type. There are a couple of ways to launch the Scenario
and Amber Alert module:
Go to the Devices menu, open Message Signs, and choose Scenarios and Amber Alerts
Press the F6 key
Press the Amber Alert button on the Message Sign toolbar.
What is a Scenario?
A scenario is any public emergency or special event situation that would call for a special
utilization of your networked traffic hardware. This could include emergency response for a
terrorist attack or other catastrophe, practice work for such events, weather emergencies, or
anything else that can temporarily and suddenly disrupt normal operations.
What is an Amber Alert?
An Amber Alert is a special type of Scenario. Amber Alerts deal specifically with a
mobilization that occurs when a child is missing and/or feared abducted.
127
Activating an Amber Alert
Follow these steps to activate an Amber Alert:
128
1.
Expand the Scenarios and Amber Alerts tree to display all the available Scenarios
and Amber Alerts.
2.
The pre-prepared messages and the signs on which the messages should be
displayed can easily be seen when the “tree” is expanded.
3.
It is advised that you Verify the Amber Alert before actually activating it. This step will
walk through the Amber Alert without actually activating it, verifying that the signs are
connected and then retrieving the selected message so that it can be verified that the
correct message will be displayed when the Amber Alert is activated.
4.
To activate an amber alert, highlight the required Amber Alert, and click on the
Activate button. Full details of the procedure that is activated will be displayed in the
Activity Log.
5.
When the Amber Alert has to be stopped or cancelled, the devices can be reset
using a Blank Signs scenario (if one has been created for you). In this case, select
the required group of signs and activate the blank scenario. If there is no scenario to
blank the signs, blank the signs using the Sign Control module.
Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central
Displaying a Scenario
To display a Scenario, follow these steps:
1.
First, open the Scenarios and Amber Alerts module.
2.
Expand the Scenario tree until the Scenario that you want to activate is displayed in the tree.
3.
Highlight that Scenario and click on the Verify button. This will run through the Scenario as if it was
being displayed, checking that the devices are available and that the messages that have been
allocated to display are still the same on the sign controller.
4.
The results of this verification will display in the Activity window. If you are satisfied with the results,
click on the Activate button to activate the Scenario.
5.
The Message will display for the duration indicated. If it has been set to run forever, the message
will be displayed until you display another message, or blank the signs. Blanking manually can be
achieved by individually accessing each sign and either displaying a different message or blanking
the sign. Or you can create a new Scenario to display another message or blank all the signs used
in the previous scenario. If the message in the scenario has a number of minutes duration, when
that number of minutes is reached, the End Duration message specified for that device will be
displayed.
Creating a Scenario
A scenario is a pre-defined message that is sent to a specified group of devices (or a set of
camera positions sent to a group of cameras if the camera module is installed) when a
certain event occurs. An Administrator creates scenarios, so that a user can implement the
prepared procedure. This ensures that the correct information is displayed on the devices at
the correct time.
Creating a Scenario
1.
Expand the Scenarios and Amber Alerts tree and highlight SCENARIOS.
2.
Right click the mouse and select New and then select Scenario Group. A new
directory will be added to the tree.
3.
Rename the directory to meaningfully indicate the contents of that group of
scenarios.
4.
Once this is done, highlight that directory and then right click the mouse. Select New,
and then choose Scenario Sign Group.
5.
Enter a specific name for this Scenario, as well as a description of the Sign Group.
6.
Indicate the Activation priority for the Scenario message. In addition, indicate if the
message that is sent is to override the priority of the message this is being displayed
on the Device when the Scenario is activated, and if the CRC check for the message
should be ignored.
7.
Click Save to update the scenario tree with the Sign Group.
8.
To define which signs and which message on the sign will be activated, right-click on
the Sign Group.
9.
Select New and then Device.
129
10.
Select the Device that is to be added to the Sign Group and select the actual
message that should be displayed.
11.
Repeat these last couple of steps until all of the signs (and messages) that you wish
to appear in the scenario are included.
Note: If the message that you wish to display does not appear in the Device
Messages list, you will need to add a message to the device using the Sign Message
Edit function which is available in the Sign Control module.
Standard Operating Procedure
Each Scenario that is added may have a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) attached to
it. This procedure will provide instructions to the Operator, detailing the steps have to be
followed in the event of the Scenario occurring. This standardizes the response to scenarios
and ensures that all the necessary steps are taken and all the necessary people have been
advised of the situation.
To set up a Standard Operating procedure for a Scenario, highlight the Sign Group for
which the SOP is to be created. Right click the mouse and select New and then Standard
Operating Procedure.
The following parameters define an SOP:
Title
Name
Description
Contact Name
Mode
Notify
Path in Scenarios
Phone
Priority
130
IQ Central has the ability to display devices on a map, showing their locations relative to one another, and
allowing an operator to navigate to field hardware using their map locations. IQ Central's map capability
provides a pictorial representation of the position of all connected devices that have been positioned on one
of the installed maps. Using the map interface, you can then see the status of a group of nearby devices, and
then drill down to check the status of an individual device.
Figure 66 – BMP maps versus GIS maps
There are two methods that IQ Central uses to provide this capability: either BMP or GIS
mapping. These represent the two methods used to store the map information that IQ
Central presents to the operator. The basic IQ Central approach uses static bitmap images
(i.e. BMP files) as the mapping environment. This is the normal out-of-the-box capability of
IQ Central. However, a more powerful approach is provided using IQ Central with GIS
Mapping capability. Where BMP maps are static and fixed in scale and scope, GIS map files
provide a much more interactive environment. GIS maps can be layered with overlaid data,
such as geographically tagged road and business information. GIS maps can also be
zoomed into and panned across.
Does your IQ Central use BMP mapping or GIS mapping?
There are two ways to determine which mapping method is used by your version of IQ
Central. The easiest manner is to look in the title bar. If the title bar shows that you are
running simply 'IQ Central', then you are using the BMP version. If, on the other hand, it
shows 'IQ Central - GIS ', then obviously you are using the GIS mapping version of IQ
Central.
The other way to see which version you are using is to go to the Help menu and choose
About IQ Central. If your version of IQ Central has the GIS mapping capability, the
application title shown in the About window will be 'IQ Central with GIS Mapping'.
Whether you are using basic IQ Central BMP maps, or the GIS-enabled IQ Central, the
system automatically provides four levels of device details, depending on how far into the
map environment you have zoomed. The BMP maps do this simply by providing four fixed
zoom levels, over which device data of a user-selected scale, can be displayed. GIS maps
131
provide a continuous level of zooming and panning capability, but with the same four levels
of device details overlaid on the map images. Once you zoom down in a GIS map so that
you have reached a new device detail level, that level of detail for that type of device is
displayed over the map image.
Note
132
Peek does not distribute BMP or GIS data files along with IQ Central. When
you purchase IQ Central, your local IT or electronic resource representative
will need to contact Peek Traffic in order to integrate your local mapping
data into IQ Central.
Getting Started With Maps
When IQ Central is first installed, the mapping function is installed, but it needs to be
configured before you can use it. The steps required to get mapping up and running on a
new system are:
1.
Save map data files onto your system.
2.
Verify proper map file paths in the IQ Central database
3.
(GIS systems only) Define Layer Groups
4.
(GIS systems only) Configure Layers
5.
(GIS systems only) Set zoom settings by device type
6.
Define views
7.
Pick a default view for the Map View module
8.
Open the Map View module
9.
Place device icons on the map view, as desired
When you complete these steps, the map system of IQ Central is up and running and ready
for use.
133
Setting Map Paths in the IQ Central Database
Letting IQ Central know where the map files are located is done inside the program for BMP
maps. However, it is a bit more complicated if you are using GIS maps. If you installed IQ
Central to its default location, namely C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central, and
you have stored your GIS-based map files to the default MapFiles directory located there,
then the proper path to those files is known by IQ Central, but you will need to let the
program know what the shapes files are called for your particular environment. And, if you
installed to a non-standard location, you will also need to modify the paths to those map
files. For GIS map files, none of this work can be done directly in IQ Central. Instead, you
will need to open the IQ Central database.
For BMP Map files:
Setting map file names and locations within IQ Central can be done entirely within the Map
Management module. (Maps > Map Management)
For GIS Map files:
134
1.
Make note of the locations and names of all of the GIS shape (.shp) files you intend
to use within IQ Central. (Each shape file represents one layer of map data.)
2.
Open the IQ Central database using Microsoft Access™.
3.
Open the tblMapLayerDetail table.
4.
Edit the LayerName and File fields so that you have one row in the table for each
shape file you wish to add to IQ Central. If you need more rows, type the extra
information in the bottom row of the table, and the AutoNumber feature will provide
additional LayerDetailID numbers.
5.
Give each row in the table a unique LayerOrder number, starting from '1' for the
layer that will be painted in the map window first, to '2' for the layer that will be
painted on top of it in the window, and so on.
6.
Set values for WidthFrom and WidthTo in each row of the table. As a rule of
thumb: leave all of the WidthFrom values set to '0' (zero), and set the WidthTo value
to the full size of the map in miles. For example, if your data covers an area 100
miles across, set WidthTo to 100 for each row.
7.
Close the table.
8.
Open the tblLayers table.
9.
Create a row for each of the shape files you will be using. Fill in the LayerFileName
parameter for each row, matching the names you entered in the Map Layer Detail
table above. Don't include the .shp extension in the name.
10.
Scroll over the eighth column from the right edge of the table: DataPath. Locate your
shape files and identify the complete path to the directory where the files are stored.
Enter that value into each row. As an example, this might be the location of the files
on my system: D:\Data\Geographic\GIS Data\City Shape Files\. Be sure to include
the last slash '\' as the last character in the DataPath field.
11.
Fill in the following placeholder values in each row in the table: (We'll change these
values to their final settings after we go back into IQ Central.)
Table 25 – Default Layer Values
Parameter
Default value to enter
LayerGroupID
1
LayerLoadOrder
1
SymbolType
2
Style
0
SymbolSize
1
ColorRed
1
ColorGreen
1
ColorBlue
1
OutlineColorRed
1
OutlineColorGreen
1
OutlineColorBlue
1
WidthShapeFrom
0
WidthShapeTo
5
WidthNamesFrom
0
WidthNamesTo
FieldName
AllowDuplicates
5
NAME
0
FontName
Arial
FontBold
0
FontItalic
0
FontSize
8
UseDefault
0
MaskLabels
0
DataPath
(You've already set this one)
PlaceOn
1
PlaceBelow
0
PlaceAbove
1
LabelPosition
0
FontColorRed
0
FontColorGreen
0
FontColorBlue
0
12.
Repeat the above values for each layer in the table.
13.
Close the table
14.
Close Microsoft Access.
15.
Open IQ Central using an account with Administration privileges.
16.
Open the Layer Editor by opening the Maps menu and choosing GIS Layers.
135
Use the Layers window to edit the layer values to the settings you need. Use the Map
Manager to verify the appearance of your Layer settings.
Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons
Once you have configured the icons and linked data of an intersection display, you will
need to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Map
polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device's
communications channel. This polling allows IQ Central to show the current state of the
linked data objects as graphic icons, when the intersection is viewed in the Map View
module. The configuration of map polling can be done manually, using the Realtime Map
Polling module. Or you can let IQ Central help you set up map polling for the specific icons
you've set up in your display, by choosing the Auto Populate Polling tool.
136
Overview of Map Management
Maps must be configured for use before they will appear as you want them to in the Map
View portion of IQ Central. To configure the map system, you will need to use the Map
Management module. However, the way that maps are configured is highly dependent upon
whether you are using the basic BMP version of IQ Central or the GIS-mapping enabled
version. In both cases, after the map files have been successfully stored on your IQ Central
computer, the primary tool to configure how maps operate is the Map Management module.
Opening the Map Management module
Press the Map Management icon:
OR
Go to the Maps menu and choose Map Management
OR
Press Alt-m, then the letter 'm' again
Storing Map Data
Before the various map modules can be opened or utilized, you will need to load some map
data onto your IQ Central system. This is especially true if you are using the GIS version of
IQ Central, since launching any of the IQ Central map modules without any data loaded will
result in error messages.
Loading BMP Map Data
BMP map data is much more simple than GIS data, usually consisting of nothing more than
a couple of bitmap image files. Because of this, and the way that IQ Central handles BMP
map management, you do not need to preload map data files before you use the BMP
version's map modules. Instead, you just need to save the images you want to use
somewhere on your system or network, then point to these image files from within IQ
Central's Map Management module. If you want to make it easier for yourself, you can just
store the bitmap files you plan to use in IQ Central's MapFiles folder:
<User-Selected Install Location>\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\
By default, IQ Central installs with a blank default bitmap file called blankdefault.bmp, stored
in the above folder. Again, if you installed IQ Central to the default location, the directory is:
C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\
Loading GIS Map Data
To load GIS data to your IQ Central system, save all of the ESRI GIS data files to the
following location:
<User-Selected Install Location>\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\GISData\
As installed, the GISData folder will not exist in the MapFiles location. You will need to
create it first, and then copy the GIS data into that folder.
The default location for this data (if the installer chose the default installation directory) is:
137
C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\GISData\
If the user installed IQ Central elsewhere, the installation directory for GIS map data will be
<User-Selected Install Location>\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\.
Managing BMP Maps
The standard version of IQ Central has the capability of monitoring objects that have been
placed against a bit-mapped background image, such as a map or satellite photo. Unlike the
GIS-mapping-capable IQ Central, which uses a single, dynamic map environment, the
standard version uses BMP maps, which are discrete image files. These BMP map images
are linked to the program using the Map Management module, and can then be linked to
one another via user-defined zoom areas within the images. In the standard version of IQ
Central, the Map Management module is used to add, edit, delete, and set the zoom areas
for these BMP map image files. The Place Device on Map module then allows you to place
devices in a set location on one or more of the map images. Finally, the Map View module
allows you to see the bitmapped images, navigate between them using their zoom areas,
and shows the status of 'placed' devices against the map background images.
Figure 67 – Example BMP map file displayed in the Map Management module
The following topics describe each of the functions that can be performed to manage and
use maps in the BMP version of IQ Central.
Adding a New BMP Map
To add a new BMP map or maps, you must first have stored the bitmap (*.bmp) file or files of those maps
somewhere that can be accessed from this computer. If the map or maps are to be accessible from multiple
networked work stations, make sure the file location is a network drive so that the file path is the same from
all workstations. Then follow these steps to add the map to IQ Central:
138
1.
Go to the Maps menu and select Map Management.
2.
When the module opens, select the Add a New Map button.
3.
Enter the Name of the map as you want it to be described on the pull-down 'Maps'
lists in the Map Viewer and Map Management modules.
4.
Enter a Description of the map. This description is displayed when the map is
opened. It can contain pertinent information about the map itself as well as the
devices that are located in that map area, or any other details you would like to add.
5.
You can either type in the name and full path of the map file, or you can click on
Browse to navigate to the location where you stored the bitmap file. Highlight the
.bmp file that is to be added and click on the Open button. The file name and its
complete path will be stored in the IQ Central database.
If you enter the path and file name manually, you can click on the Test Map button to
“test” that the path and file name that you entered is correct.
6.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 above for each bitmap file you wish to add to IQ Central.
When you are finished adding all of your bitmapped file images to the Map Management
module, you may wish to add navigation features by creating zoom links between the map
images. To do this, refer to the topic called 'Adding Zoom Areas to BMP Maps'.
Editing an Existing Map
There are two meaning for 'editing a map' that may potentially cause some confusion. In IQ
Central, editing a map means changing the link to the external map file or editing the zoom
areas associated with that image. On the other hand, editing the actual image itself can be
done, but it must be done using an external image editing software package, such as
Microsoft® Paint, Corel® Paint Shop Pro®, Adobe® Photoshop®, or any similar program. Any
changes made to the actual image file that is currently linked to IQ Central will appear in IQ
Central's Map View and Map Management modules the next time that map is viewed.
To edit the link to a map file in the BMP version of IQ Central, follow these steps:
1.
If not opened yet, launch the Map Management module by going to the Maps
menu and choosing Map Management, or by clicking on the Map
Management icon in the toolbar. (Shown at right.)
2.
Go to the Maps pull-down list and select the map for which information is to be
changed.
3.
Make the desired changes to the map information, such as the map's name,
description, or the path to the file.
Note: This is the point where you would also make changes to zoom areas. For
details about changing or editing Zoom Areas of a BMP map, refer to this topic.
4.
When you've made all of the desired changes, click the Update button, which will be
enabled as soon as any change is made to the current settings.
Deleting a Map
To delete a map from IQ Central when you are using BMP maps, follow these steps:
139
1.
If not already open, open the Map Management module in your BMP version of
IQ Central. This can be done by going to the Maps menu and selecting Map
Management, or by clicking on the Map Management button in the toolbar
(shown at right).
2.
Select the map that is to be deleted from the Maps drop down list.
3.
Press the Remove button to delete the link to the map image file.
This button is active when a map is currently selected in the Maps pull-down list.
Selecting this option will delete the current link to the map image file within IQ Central.
This does not delete the source file, just the link to it, and the descriptions and map
names you have assigned to it within IQ Central. You will also lose any zoom areas that
were defined for this map.
Warning The Remove button does not ask for verification and the data cannot be
recovered once it is removed. To recover a map that has inadvertently been
'Removed', you will need to recreate the map link within IQ Central by
creating a new map and linking to the same map image file.
Adding a new zoom area
To add a zoom area, meaning a hyperlink from one map to another, make sure that both
maps (starting location and destination) are already set up in IQ Central, and then follow
these steps:
140
1.
If not already open, open the Map Management module in your BMP version of
IQ Central. This can be done by going to the Maps menu and selecting Map
Management, or by clicking on the Map Management button in the toolbar
(shown below).
2.
Go to the Maps drop down list at the upper left corner of the module's window and
choose the map to which you want to add the zoom area.
3.
Make sure that the Set Zoom Co-Ordinates checkbox is checked. This will allow
zoom areas to be set for this image.
4.
Click on the New Zoom Area button at the bottom of the window. As shown in the
image at right, the cursor will now turn into a zoom area indicator with a black box
around it. Click on a location within the map near where you'd like the final zone to
appear. This is the current location of the center of your zoom area. (Don't worry, you
will be able to relocate the zone in the next step, if you don't put it exactly where you
want it right now.)
Figure 68 – Placing a zoom area
5.
After you click on the map, the zoom area indicator will switch to a blue indicator
showing the center of the zoom area, along with four corner indicators. (Shown
below.) Position the zone and the corners by clicking and dragging on any of them.
Figure 69 – Using the zone corner handles to resize the zoom area
Try to shape the zone so that it is approximately the same area that appears in the
map that will function as the destination of this link.
6.
In the Zoom Area control, type in a name for this zone.
7.
In the Zoom to drop down box, select the other map that will function as the
destination of this hyperlink.
8.
When you are satisfied with the location of the zoom area, as well as its name and
linked map, press the Save button in the Zoom Area box.
141
This will store the settings to the IQ Central database. The zoom area icon will turn
green to indicate that it has been saved and is now active when this map is opened
in the Map Viewer (as shown here.)
Figure 70 – Green zoom area icon indicating that the zone has been saved
9.
Verify that the new Zoom Area appears in the pull-down list of the Zoom Areas
control.
10.
Repeat the above steps to create more zoom areas on the same map. Note that
while you are creating additional zoom areas, you will not be able to see where
existing zones have been set up. It's best to select adjacent areas before
configuring the new zoom area, so you know approximately where the edges of the
new zone should sit.
Modifying an existing zoom area
Follow these steps to modify the name, link or area settings of a Zoom Area in the BMP
version of IQ Central Map Manager. If you are going to link to a new map, make sure the
map is already configured in the Map Manager before performing the following steps.
142
1.
If not already open, open the Map Management module.
2.
choose the map for which you want to edit a zoom area.
3.
In the Zoom Areas box, select the zoom area to be edited from the drop-down list.
The zoom area center and corner indicators will appear on the map.
4.
If you want to change the position or shape of the zone, click and drag the zoom
area indicators on the map.
5.
If you want to rename the map, type in a new name in the Zoom Areas box.
6.
If you want to change the hyperlink target of the zoom area, select a different map in
the Zoom to drop down list.
7.
When you have finished making changes to the zoom area settings, press the Save
button to store the changes in the IQ Central database.
Deleting a zoom area
Follow these steps to remove a map zoom area from a BMP map.
1.
If not already open, open the Map Management module.
2.
choose the map for which you want to delete a zoom area. The center indicator of
the selected zoom area will appear.
3.
Press the Remove button to delete the zoom area.
Using the Map Management Module With GIS Maps
For a GIS-enabled IQ Central system, the Map Management Module is used to view the
installed shape file data, activate and deactivate layers of information, and create and delete
pre-configured 'map views'. These map views are then available for use in the Map View
module.
Figure 71 – Map Management module (GIS version)
The way that the layers of GIS data appear within the Map Management module is actually
defined elsewhere, in the Layers module. The best way to first get GIS shape files up and
running on your system is to open the three modules at the same time: Map Management,
GIS Layers, and GIS Layer Groups. Then make changes in the GIS Layer Groups and GIS
Layers modules, save the changes, and then see how the maps look in the Map
Management module.
The Layers module will be populated based on what shape files have been installed on your
system. Investigate the list in the Layers module, and then go into the GIS Layer Groups
module to define what each layer will be called when viewed in the map modules. Then you
143
can go into the Layers module and assign one of these layer groups to each layer. When
you return to the Map Management module, these layer groups will now appear as items on
the Layers drop-down box.
The actual appearance of layer data within the Map Management and Map View modules is
set by adjusting the parameters for each layer in the Layers module. This includes the fill
and outline colors for each set of shapes, the font, font color, and font size for text labels,
which shape file field will provide the label information, and at what zoom levels each bit of
information will appear. A detailed discussion of how to configure layers is described here.
Note
Peek does not distribute BMP or GIS data files along with IQ Central. When
you purchase IQ Central, your local IT or electronic resource representative
will need to contact Peek Traffic in order to integrate your local mapping
data into IQ Central.
Adding a New GIS Map
This option is available only if you have the GIS Maps version of IQ Central installed. It
cannot be accessed in the BMP Maps version of IQ Central. Follow these steps to create a
new GIS map to your IQ Central environment.
1.
Open the Map Management module.
2.
Select Create New Map View from the Map View drop down list box, the Full extent
map will be opened.
3.
Enter the Name of the Map View in the map View Name field. This is the name that
will reference the map when it is selected for display.
4.
Enter a description of the Map in the Description field.
5.
Target the area for the map view by positioning your cursor around the area that is to
constitute the map view. Hold down the left hand mouse button and drag the cursor
to define an area. Release the mouse button and the map will zoom in to display
only the selected area. Continue this process until you have a view that displays the
correct area for your map.
6.
Click on the Save View button to save the map view and add it to the Map Views list.
Deleting a GIS Map View
To delete a Map View that is no longer used, select the Map View that is to be deleted from
the Map View drop down list. Click on the Remove View button and verify that you wish to
delete the view.
Creating Map Views
A 'map view' is a map display defined to appear in a certain way in the Map View module of
IQ Central. The meaning of 'map view' is different on BMP and GIS systems, because the
way that a 'view' is defined is fundamentally different in the two environments.
Map Views in BMP systems
A 'map view' in the standard BMP version of IQ Central is just a single map file. Each
bitmap map file creates a single map view. So the creation of views for the Map Viewer
module is just the normal process of adding BMP files in the Map Manager module.
144
Map Views in GIS systems
The GIS mapping version also uses the Map Management module to create map views.
However, in GIS environment, a map view is actually a stored set of viewing parameters
that defines how the data will appear when it is opened in the Map Viewer. Since GIS data
can be viewed dynamically in the Map Viewer, these map view definitions can be important
when you want to focus the attention of the operator on a particular region of the map, or
even on a single intersection.
Creating a GIS Map View
As described in the Map View Creation Overview, GIS mapping allows you to save a set of
map viewing parameters as a 'map view.' These map views can then be pulled up within the
Map Viewer module so the operator can see these pre-defined views of the map data. A
'map view' stores the four corners of the viewable area of the GIS data set, the zoom level,
and which of the GIS data layers are visible.
To define a GIS map view:
1.
If it is not already open, launch the Map Management module. This can be
done by either pressing the Map Management button in the toolbar (shown at
right,) pressing Alt-m,m, or by going to the Maps menu and choosing Map
Management.
2.
Use the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Pan controls to display the portion of the map you
wish to appear in this view.
3.
Use the Layers drop down box to define which of the GIS data layers will be visible
in the view. Place a checkbox next to those layers you wish to appear in the view.
Remove the checkbox from those layers you wish to hide.
4.
Fill in a Map View Name and a Description in the two fields at the bottom of the Map
Management window. These fields will accept any alphanumeric entry, including
punctuation. The Map View Name must be unique.
5.
Note: The current list of Map View names can be seen by pulling down the Map
Views list at the top left corner of the Map Management module. But if you select any
of these other views before you define this new view, you will lose your view settings.
6.
Press the Save View button, located at the top of the Map Management window.
Close the Map Management module.
Open the Map View module (Press F3, or press the Maps button (shown at right) on the
standard toolbar to open the Map Viewer) and select the new map view to verify that it
appears as you wish it to appear.
145
Working With GIS Map Layers
In a GIS-enabled IQ Central system, the GIS Layers and GIS Layer Groups are handled
using two modules with those same names available on the Maps menu. The following
illustration shows how GIS shape files create layers within IQ Central, which are mapped to
Layer Groups within the GIS Layers module.
Figure 72 – Placing a zoom area
These layer groups then are available under the Layers button in the Map Management
module. Which layers are visible or invisible are set before a Map View is saved in the Map
Management module. The Map View module then uses these settings to determine what to
display when a user selects a particular view of their GIS maps.
Creating GIS Map Layer Groups
Layer Groups are a way that IQ Central maps the layers of your GIS shape files into the
Layers that appear in Map View and the Map Management module. If you want to just use
the layers that are provided by your shape files, just create a single layer group for each of
them. Otherwise, you can create a group of layers of similar qualities. Say that you have
shape files of 'lakes', 'rivers', streams', and 'oceans'. You may want to create a single Layer
Group called 'Water' that will allow you to activate and deactivate them on your maps as a
group. But be warned that linking them together will prevent you from activating or
deactivating any of the shape file layers individually in your maps. Shape layers can be
assigned to one, and only one, Layer Group. And Layer Groups are what you have access
to in the Layers pull-down list in the Map Management module. You do not have access to
the actual shape file layers in that setting. The actual assignment of shape layers to your
layer groups is done in the GIS Layers module.
146
Figure 73 – Layer Groups module
Adding a Layer Group
To add a new layer group to your list, follow these steps:
1.
Open the Layer Groups pull-down list to see what groups have already been
created. If the group you need is not already on the list, select New Layer Group...
This item appears at the top of the list.
2.
Type in the name of your new layer group in the Layer Group Name field. This is the
text that will appear in the Layers pull-down list in the Map Management module.
3.
Press the Save button to store the name of the new Layer Group.
Important
If you type in a new layer group name and press Save without first
choosing New Layer Group... from the top field of this dialog box,
you will not be creating a new layer group, but instead you will
rename whatever layer group was currently visible in the top list. For
instance, on the screen above, if you neglect to change the Layer
Groups pull down list from 'parks' to 'New Layer Group...' before
typing in 'streets', you won't be adding a new Layer Group, but will
instead be renaming the 'parks' group to 'streets'.
Changing the Name of a Layer Group
To change the current name of a layer group, follow these steps:
1.
Select the Layer Group you wish to modify in the top pull-down list on this dialog box.
2.
Type in the new name in the Layer Group Name field.
3.
Press the Save button. This will change the name of the group.
147
GIS Layers
The GIS Layers, or just 'Layers', module is used to configure how GIS data will appear in the
IQ Central map viewers. In this window, each row represents one layer of geographic data,
and each layer represents one GIS shape file that has been stored on your system and
configured in the IQ Central database. Some examples of the data that shape file layers
could contain are:
Roadways
Water features
City boundaries
Landmarks
A shape file can store information about three types of geographical features: line features
such as rivers and roadways, fill features such as cities and neighborhoods, and point
features such as landmarks and mile markers.
The Layers module displays a list of layers in the table at the top of the screen, and the
controls at the bottom to edit a single selected row of data. For more information on how to
edit a layer, click on the sample screen shown above.
Note
When using GIS maps, the "Layers' button in the Map Management module
actually does not represent these shape-file based layers, but rather shows
the names of the GIS Layer Groups that have been defined in IQ Central.
Shape file layers are assigned to these layer groups here in the GIS Layers
module.
Opening the GIS Layers Module
There are a couple of methods to open the GIS Layers module:
Go to the Maps menu and choose GIS Layers
OR
Press Alt-m, and then the letter 'L'
Details About Configuring Layers
The Layers module displays a list of layers in the table at the top of the screen, and the
controls at the bottom to edit a single selected row of data. The table columns and the rows
below are roughly aligned, so you will edit entries, generally, from left to right. The table
itself is only used to display current settings and select which layer to edit. It is not used to
edit values, with one exception. The Color columns can be double clicked, and if you don't
like the current value, selecting No will open the color edit dialog box.
These values all determine how and when a layer's components are displayed on a map.
The File Name, and Symbol Type and Style, are all set automatically when you add a new
layer to the system. But the symbol type and style can be changed by the operator, if
desired. The values that appear in the Field Name drop-down list are pulled directly from the
GIS shape file. The rest of the values in a layer are defined solely by operator preference,
based on how they want the shapes and labels of the data on that layer to appear on IQ
148
Central maps. The best method is to keep this module and the Map Management module
open together as you go back and forth, tweaking the layer settings, saving them, and then
refreshing the map view to see how the layers appear in the map environment. After the
layer values have been tweaked to the operator's satisfaction, that is the best time to create
views that will be available to day-to-day operators in the Map View module.
Important
When changes to layer values are saved, they do not appear on the
Map Management module until that window is closed and reopened.
Figure 74 – Using the Layers module to configure GIS map layers
Always remember to Save your settings whenever you make changes, otherwise they will
be lost when you exit the Layers window.
Adding a New Shape File as a GIS Layer
The following steps describe how to point IQ Central at an existing GIS shape file and pulling
the information in as a new layer in the Layers module:
1.
Store the shape file on your computer somewhere where it will be permanently
accessibly by IQ Central.
2.
Go to the Maps menu and open the Layers module by selecting GIS Layers.
3.
Press the New Layer button.
4.
Using the Open dialog box, navigate to the place where you stored the GIS shape
file, highlight it, and press the Open button.
5.
The new layer will appear at the bottom of the list and will be selected. Before
working with the layer, be sure to set a couple of the values immediately. First, set
149
the Symbol Characteristics > Size value to '1'. (It will start out as '-1', which will
cause an error in the Map Management module.)
6.
Set the Layer Group value to one of your available layer group values. It may already
show that a value is present, but set it again anyway.
7.
The Field Name value is pulled from within the Shape file itself. Select a field to use
for the text labels of this data by choosing one of the entries in this list.
8.
At least set a fill color for this data by pushing the Color > Layer button and choosing
a color for this new layer.
9.
Press the Save button to store the new layer in the IQ Central database.
10.
Open the Map Management Module and verify that the new layer data is visible.
(You may need to work with the Shape and Name range values (To/From) in the
Layers module to get the data to appear.)
Deleting a GIS Layer
The following steps describe how to remove a GIS layer from the list that appears in the GIS
Layers module:
Note
This procedure does not delete the source file for the GIS layer, namely the
GIS shape file stored somewhere on your system.
1.
Go to the Maps menu and open the Layers module by selecting GIS Layers.
2.
Highlight the layer that you wish to delete.
3.
Press the Delete button at the bottom of the window.
4.
When the following dialog box appears, if you are in agreement with the deletion of
all of this layer's settings, press Yes, otherwise press No to retain the layer.
Figure 75 – Verification is requested when deleting a layer
This completes the process of deleting a layer. If you wish to clean up your system of
unnecessary files, you may also want to remove the shape file itself, the one that was the
source of this layer, from your system.
150
Managing Devices on Maps
The ability to work with devices in IQ Central's map viewer module include these functions:
Table 26 – Functions available from device icons in maps
Global Functions
(Works for all device
types)
Traffic Controllers &
Masters
(Additional functions)
NTCIP Cameras
(Additional
functions)
Message Signs
(Additional functions)
Place a device on the
map so that it will appear
in the same location
whenever the Map
Viewer is opened
Perform central override
functions on single units or
groups of devices
Streaming video in
upper three zoom
views
Open the Sign Control
module
View the current status
of the device
Open the Database
Upload/Download module
for a single controller or
master
Open the
Pan/Tilt/Zoom
camera control
Run sign pixel
diagnostics
Dialup
connect/disconnect
Configure up to 4 zoom
level representations of
the device
Interactively change the
zoom level view for a
single device
Placing Devices on Maps
Devices can be placed at locations on pre-configured maps whether you are using BMP
maps or GIS maps. Placing devices on maps is not done in the Map Management module.
The basic process for using devices on maps follows these steps:
1.
Configure the maps to operate as you want them to
2.
Add devices to your system and configure their connections to the real world
hardware
3.
Configure how devices change their appearance as one zooms into a map
4.
Use the Maps > Place Icon on Map command to position devices on your maps
5.
Open the Map View module and track the status of your devices. Zoom into the map
to see more details about the state of each device .
For the most part, devices function the same way in the Map View module no matter which
version of mapping you are using. However, there are differences on when the various
device zoom icons are activated as you navigate around on the maps. The following topics
describe how to place device icons on maps and how to specify how they will operate in the
Map View environment.
151
Zoom Level Icons
Important
Aside for the fact that the maintenance icon is often used as the
Zoom Level 0 icon, maintenance icons are not the same as zoom
level icons
The two, four, or five icons that represent an individual device in the IQ Central map view
are not the same as the device icons that are specified elsewhere in IQ Central. Those
icons (as configured in Tools > Advanced Options > Icon Management and Tools >
Advanced Options > Link Icon to Device Type) are called 'maintenance icons' and are
used everywhere else in IQ Central when displaying a list of device types. These
maintenance icons are used in Device Types drop-down lists and when first placing a
device on a map. But the icons or graphics that appear when viewing a live map are
different than these maintenance icons.
1.
First of all, 'Zoom Level Icons' is a misnomer, because these are not restricted to
small iconic images; they can actually be large graphics files. This is in contrast to
maintenance icons, which, in order to work properly in the interface, must be small
images (i.e. actual 'icons').
2.
A second difference is that there is only one maintenance icon assigned to each
device type, but up to five Zoom Level Icons can be assigned to each device type.
(By default, two images are assigned to sensor and weather station devices, four
images for controller and camera devices, and five images for traffic sign devices.)
3.
A third major difference between maintenance and Zoom Level icons is that
maintenance icons can be entirely user-defined. The operator of an IQ Central
system can change all of the maintenance icons for all device types in his or her
system using the Tools > Advanced Options commands in the interface. Zoom
Level icons, on the other hand, are fixed, at least for camera, weather station,
sensor, and sign device types. (As of IQ Central version 1.2.)
The Zoom Level icons for controller type devices can be edited in IQ Central, using the
Maps > Intersection Displays command.
Placing an Icon on a BMP Map
Each device that you can connect with using IQ Central can be displayed on a map. To do
this, you should first have allocated an icon to each device. The available icons are
displayed along the bottom of the map. The drop down list boxes attached to each icon will
list all the devices that have been added to the system.
Note
You will only be allowed to position one instance of each device on a map. If
you attempt to position a device a second time, an error message will be
displayed.
The Device Icons Displayed window will list the description of each device that has been
saved as an icon on this map. The Device Icons Temporarily Displayed is a list of those
icons that you have added to the map but have not yet saved as a permanent part of the
map. Any devices that are not in either of these lists, but do appear when you click on the
drop-down list box attached to the icons, have not been added to the map.
152
Follow these steps to add a device to a BMP map:
1.
Click on the drop down list box attached to the icon that represents the device that
you want to add to the map. You will notice that those devices that have already
been added to the Map will be grayed out in the list so that you cannot select them a
second time.
2.
Highlight the name of the actual device from the drop down list box and release the
mouse button. The list will close and the cursor will change to a square with a cross
inside.
3.
Drag this square to the point on the map where you want the device located and
click the left-hand mouse button. The icon will be displayed and the description of the
device will be added to the Device Icons Temporarily Displayed window.
4.
Repeat these steps for each Device that you want to see on the map.
5.
When you are certain that the icons are in the correct position, you should save the
icons to the map so that next time you access the map the icons remain positioned
in the right place.
Placing an Icon on a GIS Map
Icons that are place on GIS maps are geo-located using latitude and longitude values. This
means that they will move with the map when the map is panned or zoomed. The icons will
always be located in the same geographical position, regardless of which portion of the map
is being displayed. If you zoom in to a smaller area, you might find that some of the devices
“disappear”, since those devices are no longer physically located in the actual area that you
are now viewing. The same thing will happen if you pan the map in any direction.
Follow these steps to place an icon on a GIS map:
1.
Select the Device that is to be placed on the map from the drop down lists at the
bottom of the page. All devices that are currently configured in IQCentrol will be
listed here. Devices that have already been placed on the map will also not be
available for placement.
2.
Drag the Icon representing the Device to its exact location on the map.
3.
The name of the device will appear in the Devices Temporarily Displayed list. When
you are sure that it is correctly placed, click on the Device Icon and then on the Save
button on the Toolbar. The device will now be listed in the Devices Displayed list.
Setting GIS Zoom Levels
If GIS maps are enabled on your system, then you have the power to control how each type
of device appears as you zoom into the map image. Up to five distinct zoom appearances
can be set, depending on the device type. Using the GIS Zoom Levels window, you specify
at what upper zoom level a particular device appearance shows up on the map. Zoom level
0 is the view to assign when you have zoomed way out on the map, showing the entire city,
state or region. Zoom level 5, on the other hand, is the view you wish to see of this device
when you have zoomed all the way into the map and are showing a very localized area.
What you are selecting on this screen is the threshold level IQ Central will use to decide
when to display the next higher level of detail about the device on the map view. The
parameter that is tested against is the horizontal size of the displayed map.
153
GIS Zoom Levels - Example
This example shows some settings that might be used for a portable sign device . Notice
that these settings switch from the top level (simple icon) view of a portable sign to the
'small icon' view when the map display is at or below 19.8 miles. Then the GIS Map Viewer
switches to the 'Medium Small Size' view of the device when the map's horizontal size is
less than 6.6 miles. This process continues as you zoom into a map, until you reach the
maximum detail display of the sign (Large Size) when the map displayed is less than 1.32
miles across.
Figure 76 – Setting Device Zoom Levels
Opening the GIS Zoom Settings module
To open the GIS Zoom Levels window, you have a couple of options:
Go to the Maps menu, and choose GIS Zoom Levels.
or press Alt-m together and then press the letter z
Setting the GIS zoom levels for a particular Device Type
These are the steps required to set the zoom levels for one kind of device:
154
1.
Open the GIS Zoom Level window (Maps > GIS Zoom Levels)
2.
In the Device Types pull-down list, choose the type of device you wish to edit.
3.
Starting at the right side of the screen, set the Zoom 0 level. Set it to the horizontal
size of the map where you want the device to first show up as you zoom into the
image. You can either use the slider or you can type in the number (in miles) directly.
4.
Set the Zoom 1 level for the next level of detail.
5.
Repeat the process for each of the available zoom levels. (In general, signs have
five levels, controllers and cameras have four levels, and sensors and weather
stations use only two zoom levels.)
6.
Press the Save button to store the new values in the IQ Central database.
7.
If you want to modify zoom settings for other device types, select another device
type and repeat the process.
8.
When you are finished editing the zoom levels of devices, press the Close button to
exit the Zoom Level module.
155
Viewing Maps
The Map Viewer module is the primary interface for dealing with all of your devices
geographically. It allows you to show pre-configured maps of your city or region, with the
devices that are connected to IQ Central positioned on the map(s) at their physical locations.
The Map View module not only shows device locations, but also can be used to interact
with the devices directly. The viewer can be used to:
Navigate between maps (BMP mapping) or zoom and pan across the available map
data (GIS mapping)
Select pre-defined 'Map Views' to display
Poll visible devices at regular intervals
Retrieve the current status of individual devices
Left open with all device status windows open so that you can verify at a glance the
current status of all devices
Zoom into detailed 'front panel displays' of controller devices
The BMP version of Map viewer, shown below, is described in the following section, titled
"Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface."
Figure 77 – Map Viewer interface (BMP version)
The GIS version of Map viewer, shown here, is described in the section after that, titled
"Using the GIS Map Viewer Interface."
156
Figure 78 – Map Viewer interface - GIS version
Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface
When the BMP version of the Map Viewer module is first opened during a user's session,
the Map Viewer module displays the first bitmap map in its list. The interface provides a
group of buttons above the map, the map display area (showing any devices that are
located within the area of this map), and a log of map loading activity at the bottom. Click on
the portions of the Map Viewer window shown below for more details about using the BMP
viewer's interface:
Figure 79 – BMP Map Viewer
157
Using the GIS Map Viewer Interface
When the GIS version of the Map Viewer module is first opened during a user's session, the
Map Viewer module displays the first map view in its list. The interface provides a group of
buttons above the map, the map display area (showing any devices that are located within
the area of this map, and a log of map loading activity at the bottom. Click on the portions of
the Map Viewer window shown below for more details about using the interface:
Figure 80 – GIS Map Viewer
158
Accessing Devices in the Map Viewer Module
Whether using the GIS or BMP versions of Map Viewer, there are several functions that can
be performed directly from device icons located on the map. To access these functions,
highlight the icon on the map that represents the device that you want to work with and click
the right-hand mouse button. Each particular device type has its own set of options. The
following table illustrates which options are available for which Device Type. For more
information about any of these options, click on the particular function to open a pop up
window with more detail.
Table 27 – Commands available in the device icon drop-down menu
Type of Device
Command
Intersection/Sensor
Save Icon Position
Remove Icon
Display Object Polling Rate
Save Object Position
Type of Grid Display (Standard,
Hide, Alarm)
Camera
Sign
(Portable, Overhead, VSL,
etc.)
Status
Save Icon Position
Remove Icon
Camera Control
Save Icon Position
Remove Icon
Display Object
Polling Rate
Sign Zoom
Type of Display
Sign View
Grid (Standard,
Hide, Alarm)
Weather Station
Status
Save Icon Position
Remove Icon
Display Object
Type of Display
Polling Rate
Weather View
Grid
Weather Status
Selecting a Map in the Map Viewer
The image shown at right shows the steps to changing the currently selected map view in
the GIS version of the Map Viewer. But the process is essentially the same in the BMP
version of the viewer. The only difference is that instead of selecting a pre-defined window
into the GIS map data, a 'view' in the BMP environment is just a single bitmap map file.
159
Figure 81 – Map Views menu
In either case, clicking on Map Views or Maps opens a drop-down list of the available map
images configured on your system. This list is always shown in alphabetical order. Select
one of the available map views and it will display in the Map Viewer window.
You cannot define maps or map views inside the Map Viewer module. That work must be
done in the Map Management module. For GIS map views, the layers of data that are
available in any given map view are also defined in the Map Management environment.
These layers cannot be turned on or off inside the Map Viewer.
Setting the Default Map
There is no place in IQ Central to explicitly select which map will appear by default in your
Map Viewer. However, there is method to pick which of your map views or map files will be
shown automatically whenever the Map Viewer is opened. The Maps button (BMP version)
and the Map Views button (GIS version) both list the available maps that can be loaded into
the viewer. These lists are alphabetical, and the first item in this list is what the Map Viewer
loads as its default map.
To set a default map for the Map Viewer:
160
1.
Open the Map Management module
2.
Open the view that you wish to use as the default
3.
Change the Map View Name (GIS version) or the Map name (BMP version) by
adding a '0-' (a zero followed by a dash) before the actual name. This will force the
map to appear first in the Map list.
4.
Press the Save button to store the new name (Save View in the GIS version of Map
Management.)
5.
Look in the Map Views list in the Map Management module to verify that your newly
renamed map appears at the top of the list.
6.
Close the Map Management module.
7.
Open the Map Viewer. Your selected default view should now load as the default map.
Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events
Polling and scheduling are two different methods used by the central software to
automatically retrieve data. IQ Central performs both polling and scheduling functions, and
in fact several types of each.
Polling
Polling is the regularly occurring attempt by the central software to go out to all devices of a
specific type and retrieve their current status information. There are two kinds of polling in
IQ Central: Map Polling and Log Polling.
Map Polling - Map Polling is used to define which data objects to retrieve from field
devices and how often. After the data is retrieved and used by the program, it is
generally discarded. Map polling is used, as the name suggests, to update the status of
devices in the Map Viewer, but it also used as the source for Alarm monitoring data. The
only time when this data is stored is when an alarm condition is detected, and then the
details are stored to the Alarm log. The details of configuring and utilizing Map Polling
are described in the Map Polling section below.
Log Polling - Log polling is similar to Map Polling in that it is used to define which data
objects to retrieve from field devices and how often to do so, but unlike Map Polling, the
resulting data is then stored to a data log for that device. The details of configuring and
utilizing Log Polling are described in the Log Polling section below.
Note
One other note about Map versus Log Polling concerns the Device
Status viewer. One might expect the Status module to use the general
data object polling capability of Map Polling, but that is not the case.
Instead, it displays current data as retrieved by the Log Polling process,
as well as general communications status information. It does not use
Map Polling data.
161
Scheduling
There are two types of scheduling available in IQ Central: Message Sign log retrieval
scheduling, and Traffic Controller log retrieval.
Message Sign Scheduling – The Message Sign scheduling process is handled entirely
within IQ Central. The details of configuring and utilizing Message Sign Scheduling are
described in the Message Sign Scheduling section below.
Traffic Controller Log Retrieval – The second kind of scheduling, Traffic Control log
retrieval scheduling, requires that an external software module be installed along with IQ
Central. This software is called the IQ Central Scheduler. If installed on your system, you
can schedule times for the central software to connect to traffic controllers or masters,
and to retrieve that data logs back into the IQ Central database. These events can occur
either immediately, once in the future, or at regular intervals in the future. The resulting
data can then be used to generate reports. Traffic Controller Log Retrieval is described
in the section below.
Map Polling
Map Polling is a method in IQ Central to request that individual NTCIP data objects be
retrieved from devices at regular intervals. The resulting data is used for the monitoring of
devices in the Map Viewer, and also as a source of data to test for Alarm conditions. Map
Polling data is not generally stored to the IQ Central database, except for individual data
points when an alarm condition is detected or cleared. Because most of this data is not
stored to the database, most data polling is done with Map Polling. (The IQ Central
database file would grow very rapidly if too many data objects were polled using the Log
Polling version of polling.)
There are four tools used to work with Map Polling:
The main map polling configuration window
The Polling Assistant
The Batch Update window
and the Dynamic Objects Configuration window.
Launching the Main Map Polling Configuration Window
Map polling is configured using the Polling Options commands available under the Maps
menu. The primary settings are in Maps > Polling Options > Map Polling Configuration. The
Map Polling Configuration module is used to define what data objects are polled, based on
device type or individual devices.
162
Map Polling Configuration
The Map Polling Configuration module is used to tell IQ Central what data objects and
dynamic objects should be requested from a device when it appears in the Map Viewer. This
can be set by Device Type or by individual device. The Map Viewer uses this list of objects
as a starting point. If the device's view in the map uses any of the objects in this map polling
list, then those objects are requested from the device. The Map Viewer then uses the data
to update the device's representation on the map.
Opening the Map Polling Configuration module
This screen is opened by going to the Maps menu and choosing Polling Options > Map
Data.
Or, by clicking on the Map Data button, which is available on either the Standard toolbar or
the Map Configuration toolbar.
Using the Map Polling Configuration interface
This 'Realtime Map Polling' window (shown at right) is used to define what data is retrieved
(at regular intervals) from devices that are currently visible in the Map View module. A single
retrieved data object is defined by creating a single row in the map polling list, displayed at
the top of the Realtime Map Polling window.
Figure 82 – Interface elements of the Map Polling Configuration module
Polling object list – This list shows all of the NTCIP objects that are currently configured to
provide data to the Map Viewer when the device is visible on the map.
163
Filter - Device Type – Filters the content of the polling object list to show only the data
points that are currently configured for devices of this type.
Filter - by Selected Device Type – Turns the device type filter on or off.
Filter - Device – Allows a user to filter the list to show only polling objects currently
configured for that specific device.
Filter - by Selected Device – Turns the device specific filter on or off.
Object – Shows the name of the object currently highlighted in the Polling object list. When
a New Row button is pressed, this is where you select what object will be polled.
OID – Displays the numeric object ID of the currently highlighted data object in the Polling
object list.
Description – This text shows some hints about the contents of this object, as well as its
internal structure (if the object is used to store more than one data point, as many are.)
Poll frequency – This shows how often the data specified in the currently selected row of
the Polling object list is requested from the device (in whole seconds.)
Enable – This is an on/off switch for this data object. An object can be configured in the
Polling object list, but turned off, if you temporarily don't want to poll for that data.
Leave Connected – This defines whether the connection channel is kept open in between
instances of polling for this data object.
Protocol (Normal/Dynamic) – This should be kept set to 'Normal', unless you specifically
wish to poll for dynamic objects that you have defined using the Dynamic Object module of
IQ Central.
New Row – Adds a new object row to the Polling object list for the selected Data Type or
specific Device, whichever is currently selected in the window. Once you select the new
row, you'll need to fill in the Object, Poll Frequency, Protocol, Enabled, and Leave
Connected fields, and then choose the Save Row button to store it to the list.
Remove Row – Deletes the highlighted map polling object from the above polling object list.
Save Row – Stores the current settings for this data object into the table above.
Filtered Group - Enabled – This control can be used to set the Enabled state for all of the
objects currently listed in the Polling objects list. The change isn't performed until you press
the Save All button.
Filtered Group - Leave Connected – This control can be used to set the same Leave
Connected setting for all objects currently listed in the Polling objects list. The change isn't
performed until you press the Save All button.
Poll Frequency – This can be used to set the same polling frequency value for all of the
rows currently listed in the Polling object list. When you enter a value here, click the Save
All button to store the frequency in all of the objects listed.
Save All – Used in to store changes made to multiple rows of the Polling object group
(made using the three controls to the left - Enabled, Leave connected, and Polling
Frequency.)
Refresh Server Polling – This sends the current list of map polling object values to the
device or all devices of this type (depending on what is selected in the Filter section above.
164
Polling Assistant – A tool that can help fill in the polling data object table when working
with traffic controllers. (Note: The Polling Assistant is only available when a single device is
selected. The button is grayed out when you have all devices, or all devices of a type,
selected.)
Copy From – This command allows you to copy the entire Polling object list from another
device. Note that this device does not have to be of the identical type.
Note
Using 'Copy From' will overwrite the current data in your Polling object list.
This control gives you an option to cancel out of the process if you decide
not to do so.
Close – This closes the Configure Map Polling window. If you've made changes within the
window that haven't been saved to the database, you will be asked if you wish to proceed. If
you select Yes, your changes will be discarded. If you choose No, you will be returned to
the window.
Using the Polling Assistant
Since configuring map polling can be a complex process, particularly for devices such as
traffic controllers that can have many data objects, IQ Central includes two tools to assist
you in configuring map polling objects. The first was the Auto Populate Polling tool,
available in the Configure Intersections module. The second is described here: the Polling
Assistant. Unlike the Auto Populate tool, which works only for traffic controllers, the Polling
Assistant can be used with any device type.
The Polling Assistant is a very smart module that presents a list of logical bits of data based
on the type of device on which you are currently working. It asks you what data you wish to
poll on, in the form of one screen of check boxes. It then takes the items that you check,
and populates the Polling Objects list with exactly the data objects that contain that
information. It uses one polling interval value for items that are considered cycle or interval
status data points, and a different polling interval for more general device status objects,
such as Alarms and Patterns. The example below shows how the Polling Assistant appears
when working on a 3000E TS2 traffic controller.
Again, the resulting data will be used in two places, in the map viewer, and in the Alarms
system.
165
Figure 83 – Intersection Polling Assistant dialog box
Controls at the bottom of the window allow you to select all of the check boxes on the
window, or clear all of the check boxes.
Finally, you can either cancel out of this window to make no changes to the current Polling
objects list, or you can choose OK to tell the assistant to erase the current contents of the
Polling objects list and fill in the objects for all of the checked objects in this window.
Note
The Polling Assistant is only available in the Map Polling Configuration
window when a single device is selected. The button is grayed out when
you have all devices, or all devices of a type, selected.
Caution
Using the Polling Assistant will overwrite the current data in your Polling
object list. Choose the Cancel button in the Polling Assistant if you do
not wish to overwrite the current list.
Notes About Configuring Map Polling for Alarm Monitoring
This Polling Assistant tool can be very useful when you are attempting to set up polling for
the IQ Central Alarms monitoring system. A couple of important points should be considered
when picking what data to poll specifically for alarm monitoring:
The basic alarms that most users watch for are based on one item in the above checklist:
Short Alarms (basic alarms)
166
The Second-by-Second Status data objects are generally not polled for alarm monitoring
(i.e. phase states, overlaps, ped states, rings, etc.)
The alarm monitoring system uses the 'Poll When Map Closed' value as its data
collection interval. However, if the Map Viewer module is open, and you've configured
the polled data to be retrieved more often while the map is open, AND the device in
question is within the Map Viewer window, the alarm viewer will monitor the data at this
higher rate.
Most users monitor the Short Alarms data objects at an interval of about 60 seconds.
Another set of data that may be important for alarm monitoring is the Detector Data that is
configured in the lower right corner of the Polling Assistant window. These data objects
concern Volume and Occupancy detector data, and they have their own polling interval
values. Again, the alarms system uses the polling interval of 'Poll When Map Closed' unless
the Map Viewer is open and the device in question is visible in the Map Viewer, at which
point the Alarm monitoring system uses the Map Open polling interval.
167
Performing a Batch Update
If you've configured a bunch of data objects to be polled from devices as part of your Map
Polling (and Alarm Monitoring) strategy, you may, at some point, wish to set a bunch of
polling objects to have the same intervals or connection settings. The Batch Update option
in the Map Polling Configuration module gives you that capability. To perform a batch
update, follow these steps:
1.
Open the Map Polling Configuration module (Maps menu > Polling Options >
Map Polling Configuration, or click on the Map Polling Configuration button in
the Standard toolbar)
2.
In the Map Polling Configuration, select the device that you wish to modify.
3.
Select the group of polling objects that you would like to batch change.
4.
Click on the Batch Update button (shown in the illustration below)
Figure 84 – Batch Update button in the Map Polling Configuration window
5.
This will open the Batch Update dialog box. You can use this tool to change a group
of objects to use the same map polling interval, map closed polling interval, polling
object enabled flag, and leave connected flag.
Figure 85 – Batch Update dialog box
168
6.
Set the value or values that you want to have applied to ALL of the objects you
selected in the main Map Polling Configuration window.
7.
Click OK to make the changes to those objects, or Cancel to leave the values where
they were.
Dynamic Object Configuration
The Dynamic Object Configuration module, also known as the 'STMP Polling' module, allows
the user to configure multiple NTCIP objects in a single device into a single 'dynamic object'.
Dynamic objects are part of the NTCIP standard. They are intended to be compound data
objects that can easily be created and recreated, as necessary, in order to cut down on
network overhead. For example, if 20 objects are called using a single command, the
network traffic required to send and receive 20 separate data objects is cut down
dramatically.
Figure 86 – Interface elements of the Dynamic Objects Configuration window
Dynamic objects are defined in this window, but they are actually used elsewhere within IQ
Central. Once a dynamic object has been created, it is given a Dynamic Object number. It
can then be called, by number, from within the Map Polling Configuration window.
Opening the Dynamic Object Configuration module
The Dynamic Object Configuration module can be opened a couple of different ways in IQ
Central:
Go to the Maps menu, open the Polling Options submenu, and choose Dynamic
Objects.
or Press the Dynamic Objects button (shown at right) on the Map Configuration
toolbar
169
Using the Dynamic Object Configuration Interface
The Dynamic Object Configuration module is used to create and modify the dynamic objects
list. The list is displayed at the top of the window. The rest of the window provide tools to
add rows, delete rows, and save changes made to rows.
A row in the table is made up of a definition of which dynamic object to assign the object,
which device type or device it applies to, and which object. In this environment, a dynamic
object is defined as all of the rows that are assigned to the same dynamic object number.
Device Type to Verify OID - Why do we have a second field to select a Device Type? If we
leave the 'For Device Type' field set to All Devices, we still need a device type master table
to populate the object selection list. This field tells the Dynamic Object Configuration module
to use this device type's object list to populate the Objects list control.
ActiveX Type - This is almost always set to 'Integer'. The only time to change this is when
the Description of the object specifies that the data object is something else, such as an
'octet'.
OID Length - This should always be set to '1'.
170
Log Polling
Overview of Log Polling
The two Log Polling tools mentioned in this section are used for several functions. The
primary function of the Log polling module is to retrieve data objects from devices at regular
intervals and to store the resulting data in the IQ Central database. A secondary function of
this module is to configure how IQ Central monitors the communications connection status
of each type of device. And finally, the Log Polling windows are also used to configure how
often 'Time Syncing' is performed between the central IQ Central computer and the devices
in the field.
Device Type Data - This module is used to define what Log Polling data should be
requested from each Device Type.
Device Type Polling - This module is used to determine how often the above data should be
polled for from each type of device and individual device. This module is also used to
configure how often the time should be synchronized between the central computer and
field devices. It is also used to define how IQ Central judges the status of communications
with a device.
Launching the Device Type Data window
Go to the Tools menu, open the Logging Options submenu, and choose Device Type
Data.
Launching the Device Type Polling window
Go to the Tools menu, open the Logging Options submenu, and choose Device Type
Polling.
About the System Log
The data from Log Polling is stored to the IQ Central System Log, which is discussed in
detail in the "System Log" section of the Database Maintenance and Archiving chapter of
this manual, beginning on page YY.
171
Device Type Data
Log polling is defined on these two modules: Device Type Data and Device Type Polling.
The Device Type Data module is used to define what data objects will be polled for each
Device Type. It does not configure how often polling will occur. All of the rest of the poll
settings, and any per-device choices, are done in the Device Type Polling module (along
with a few other related settings.)
The primary function of this interface is to set up the data table that will be used within the
IQ Central database to store the resulting log polling data for each type of device you are
tracking. The basic steps to use this interface are:
1.
Select a device type
2.
Select a data object
3.
Add the object to the log polling list
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired objects are in the list
5.
Update the database table so it can receive data from the selected objects
6.
Refresh the IQ Central server so that it polls for the requested data for devices of this
type
Interface Controls
These are the controls in the Device Type Data window:
Device Types – Use this pull-down list to choose the device type for which you will be
setting the log polling objects list
Devices –This list merely operates as a reference list to show you what devices are
currently configured in your system under this device type. Selecting a device in the list
doesn't do anything.
Object – The NTCIP data object within the device that you wish to poll at regular intervals.
Note that the interval to poll each object is set in the Device Type Polling module, not here.
Instance – In some cases, but not all, data objects are split up into several pieces to
accommodate all of the values assigned to the object. For instance, the DetectorVolume
object has 28 instances, one for each detector. The phaseStatusGroupGreens object (and,
in fact, all of the objects in the 'phaseStatusGroup' class) have two instances: '1' for phases
1 through 8, and '2' for phases 9 through 16.
Data Type – This is a read-only field showing what type of data will be returned when the
object is polled.
Description – This read-only text shows a description of what type of data the object
contains, and in some cases, a bit about how the data is stored within the object. (For
instance, which bit is used to track a simple binary state in the device.)
Base OID – This read-only data shows the object ID of the currently selected Object.
Add Object to List button – This button tells the module to add the currently selected
Object to the 'Log Object List for Device Type' list.
Log Object List for Device Type – This shows a list of all of the data objects that are
currently configured to be log polled for this type of device. Note that this table contains all
172
of your recent changes, so it may not be the same list currently being used by the IQ Central
data server or within the database tables.
Update Database Table – This tells IQ Central to create the log polling data table for this
Device Type, if none currently exists. Or it tells IQ Central to update the current table to
include the fields that have been added since the last time the list was edited. If you have
double-clicked an item in the list to tag it as a 'REMOVE' item, this button will delete the
object from the Device Type table, including all the data that was previously recorded for
these types of device for this data object. In such a case where you are removing data, you
will be asked to verify that you do actually wish to delete the data from the IQ Central
database.
Refresh Server Polling – Tells the NTCIP Data server to use the new list of objects
for this type of device. This button serves the same function as the Refresh Server
Polling button (shown at right) located on the Standard toolbar.
Close button – Closes the Device Type Data module without saving any changes you've
made, although it will prompt you to save if it detects any changes.
173
Device Type Polling
The Device Type Polling module has several functions, but the primary one is to take the
objects that were defined as log polling data points in the Device Type Data module, and set
up a polling interval for devices of that type. Unlike the Device Type Data module, this
window allows you to set the schedule by individual devices, rather than by the whole
device type. But this environment also allows you to set other polling parameters on a
device-by-device basis. These include:
Intervals for Communications status checks (which show up in the Status module.)
How often to perform a time synchronization on the device (based on server PC's
current date and time)
and parameters used to judge the current communications status when the device is
viewed in the Map Viewer the IQ Central system log
Figure 87 – Device Type Log polling window
174
Communications Failure Testing
'Communications Failure Testing' means "How does IQ Central know when to report that a
device has gone offline, or whose communications can be judged to be 'marginal'?" The
parameters that determine when IQ Central will switch the comms status of a device to
'marginal' and then 'offline' are actually defined in the Device Log Polling window.
IQ Central tests a device's communications status using a cascading set of rules:
1.
Open the Device Log Polling window (Tools menu, then Logging Options > Device
Log Polling.)
2.
Locate the communications failure testing parameters in the lower right corner of this
window. These parameters use the number of poll intervals as the test conditions.
Each device is polled as often as is necessary to fulfill all of its Map Polling AND its
Log Polling requirements. These may be irregular intervals between polls if, say, the
shortest map polling interval is 7 seconds, and the device type polling interval is set
to 5 seconds. In this case, the interval between subsequent poll attempts could be 1,
2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds. No matter . . . the following tests just count poll attempts and
whether or not they succeed.
3.
Set the Marginal Count value. This is the number of polls that must be missed in a
row before the device is judged to be in a 'marginal' comms state.
4.
Set the Marginal Poll Skip value. After a marginal state is determined for a device, IQ
Central is instructed to skip polling for his device for this many poll intervals. It then
tries again. If the attempt succeed, the device returns to a good communications
status. If it fails again, IQ Central increments the count of polling failures and waits
another Marginal Poll Skip duration before it tries again. It repeats this process until it
either succeeds in communicating with the device, or it reaches the next test
condition.
5.
Set the Offline Count value. This is the number of bad poll attempts in a row
(counting each marginal poll skip interval as ONE failure) before the device is judged
to be 'offline'.
6.
Set the Poll Persistence value. This determines how many hours, minutes, and
seconds IQ Central will wait before it retests a device that has gone 'offline'. This is
to prevent devices that are offline from eating up bandwidth as IQ Central repeatedly
tries to regain a connection.
7.
As soon as IQ Central receives a reply from the device in any of the above rules test,
it changes the device's state back to 'online' and starts the testing process over again
from the top.
Important
Remember, the above comms failure test parameters apply to all
polling, both Map Polling and Log Polling attempts at
communications.
175
Message Sign Scheduling
Schedules Module
IQ Central includes a schedules module that is designed especially for message signs that
is completely separate from the Traffic Controller Scheduler. Message sign schedules
contain a collection of Day Plans that determine what should be displayed on the sign at a
particular time and/or a particular day or selection of days. See Day Plans and Schedules
for more information.
When schedules are created and saved to a Device , they need to be activated before they
will run. When schedules are activated (see Activate Schedule), you must remember that
each and every schedule that has been saved to the Device will be activated and displayed.
Please check all the schedules that are resident on the Device before activating schedules.
To do this, select a schedule number on the Schedules tab and Refresh. This will recover
the schedule details from the sign so that you can check the contents of the schedule.
Repeat this for each available Schedule number.
Opening the Message Sign Schedules window
These controls can be accessed under the Devices menu by navigating to the Message
Signs > Edit Schedules control.
Day Plans and Schedules
This function allows you to specify certain events that are to occur at certain times on
selected days. The simplest way to describe how this works is to work though an example.
We'll walk through how one would create a day plan and schedule for a message sign:
176
1.
You must be connected to the sign before you send data to the sign. To connect to
the sign, open the Sign Control window; select the required sign from the Devices list
and click on the Connect button. Then return to Edit Schedules.
2.
Let's assume you want to display Changeable Message 1 at 6am and Changeable
Message 2 at 6pm every weekday of the year. In addition, you want Changeable
Message 2 to be displayed all weekend (from 6pm on Friday until 6am on Monday)
every weekend. To do this, we need to set up a schedule that will be tied to a
specific day plan that will activate two separate events. To accomplish this, configure
Schedule 1 to activate Day Plan 1 every month (all months checked), Monday
through Friday (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday checked)
every day of the month (all days checked).
3.
Save this schedule to the database by clicking on the Save button.
4.
Update the sign by clicking on the Update Sign button. The schedule is configured,
but the day plan has not been defined yet. That's our next thing to do.
5.
Click on the Day Plans tab so that we can set up Day Plan 1, which is already linked
to the Schedule 1 schedule that we have just created.
6.
Select Day plan Number 1, and select Day Plan Event Number 1. This Day Plan
event is to be activated at 6am so the Day Plan Event Time should be set to have
Hour = 6 and Minute = 0.
7.
We then need to indicate what action is to be taken by this event number. Indicate
Day Plan Action 1, which will be set up on the Events and Actions tab to display
8.
Save the Day Plan to the Database (click on Save to Database) and update the sign
(click Update Sign.)
9.
Select the Events and Actions tab. Here we need to set up Display Message Action
1 to display Changeable Message 1.
10.
It is important that you check the content of the message that you specify here
before you create the schedule. To do this, click on the Sign Control Button, select
the sign and highlight the required message (in this case Changeable Message 1).
Then click on the Get from Sign button and preview the message.
Note
Each message has a CRC number that is calculated for it when that
message is created and whenever it is changed. This is a calculated value
that indicates the current version of the message. When you specify a
message for an action, you must retrieve the CRC for that message from
the sign. That CRC number is then stored together with the message
number in the database and on the sign. If, when the schedule runs, the
message that is specified in the schedule has a CRC that is different than
the one that was saved at the time the schedule was created, the message
will not be displayed and the action will be ignored. This eliminates the
probability that another operator could change a message that is allocated
to a schedule, causing an incorrect message to be displayed.
11.
Before you click on Save to Database to save this action to the database and Update
Sign to save this information on the sign, click on the Refresh CRC from sign so that
the current version of that message is allocated to the action.
12.
We must now repeat the previous two steps to create a day plan event for displaying
changeable message 2 at 6pm.
13.
Select the Day Plan tab.
14.
Next, we need to set up Day Plan Event Number 2, which will call Day Plan Action 2
at 6 p.m. Note that the Day Plan Event Time is in military time format – 6pm is
18h00.
15.
Save to the database and update the sign again.
16.
Click on the Events and Actions tab to set up Day Plan Action 2 which will activate
17.
Once again, remember to check the contents of changeable message 2 before
adding it to the day plan, and retrieve the CRC from the sign for that message.
18.
Save the information to the database and update the sign again.
Now, as far as the displaying of Changeable Message 2 on the weekend is concerned,
remember that Changeable Message 2 has been set to display at 6pm on Friday. No other
action has been specified to take place until 6am on Monday morning. So, we do not have
to do anything else to keep Changeable Message 2 displaying all weekend.
177
Scheduling of Traffic Controller Log Retrieval
IQ Central Scheduler adds a scheduled traffic controller data log retrieval capability to the IQ
Central traffic management central system. This is an add-on module that must be installed
separately from the rest of IQ Central. Contact Peek Traffic to order the IQ Central
Scheduler module if it is not currently installed.
The IQ Central Scheduler is a separate application that works in conjunction with IQ Central.
It maintains its own database of tasks to be performed on devices that have been configured
in IQ Central. The Scheduler functions as a Windows service, always running in the
background. After a user schedules a particular event for a particular IQ Central device , the
scheduler makes sure that those events occur on time.
With release version 1.0 of the IQ Central Scheduler, the only kind of events that can be
scheduled are log retrievals from three types of traffic controllers: Peek 3000E controllers,
Peek M3000E masters, and Multisonics OSAM masters. An interface is provided within IQ
Central to program tasks for these kinds of devices. The full IQ Central Scheduler is
composed of this interface, which is used to schedule tasks at some single point in the
future or at regular intervals in the future, and the Windows service, which makes sure that
those task occur at the defined time or times.
This package requires a properly installed and configured IQ Central system, version 1.2 or
higher, to operate. Scheduled log retrieval can be configured for the following traffic
controllers using this module:
Table 28 – Traffic Controller support for scheduled log retrieval
Type of Traffic Controller
Translator Firmware
Controller Firmware
Required
Part #
Version
Multisonics OSAM-32 Master
Controller
97-599
v1.0.1 or higher
v2.22
Peek 3000E Controller
97-602
v1.0.1 or higher
v3.6.2
Peek M3000E Master Controller
97-601
v1.0.1 or higher
v2.8.2
Once the data logs have been retrieved from one or more traffic controllers using this
Scheduler module, they show up as data sets in the IQ Central Reports module.
Installing the IQ Central Scheduler
To install IQ Central Scheduler on your IQ Central system, you will need the IQ Central
Scheduler v1.0 installation CD. The scheduler must be installed on each computer where IQ
Central is installed. The installation will require a system restart at the end of the process.
178
1.
If a previous version of IQ Central Scheduler was installed on your system, you will
need to remove it before you can install the newer version. To do this, go to the Start
menu and choose Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs > IQ Central
Scheduler. With the Scheduler highlighted in the programs list, choose Remove.
2.
Place the IQ Central Scheduler v1.0 installation CD in the CD-ROM drive on your IQ
Central computer. If you are going to install the program to a server and one or more
IQ Central workstations, start by installing the Scheduler on the IQ Central server.
3.
Autoplay should automatically start the scheduler installation script, but if your
system is configured not to use Autoplay, browse to the CD directory and run the
Setup.Exe file.
4.
Follow the displayed steps to install the files. You will need to agree to the license
agreement to continue with the install. On the third screen, Custom Setup, you have
the option to pick which components will be installed and to pick where the files will
install. For a single computer system or the server of an IQ Central network, go
ahead and install everything. But you can use the Browse button to select a different
place to install the program, if you wish.
5.
Proceed through the rest of the install screens. On the last screen, select Finish to
exit the installation program.
Note
Although the scheduler program should be installed on each workstation
where you might wish to access the schedule data, the schedule calendar
itself is maintained in a centralized repository on the IQ Central server, so
that everyone can see the same schedule.
6.
If you are installing the program to a single IQ Central computer, that completes the
install. However if you have an IQ Central network, you’ll need to complete a couple
more steps to get the program working on all of the computers in your network.
Repeat the above steps on each IQ Central workstation in your network, with the
following changes:
7.
On each workstation other than the server, when the installation gets to the third
screen (Custom Setup), we want to deactivate the install of the Scheduler Service.
The Scheduler Service should only be installed on the server. To deactivate this
component, click on the Schedule Service item in the window and change its setting
to Entire feature will be unavailable. Refer to the section below to see how this
looks in the window.
8.
Change the install location if you wish, then proceed with the rest of the workstation
install. Note that the Browse button will not become available again until you select
Required again at the top of the list. This is to prevent individual components from
being installed in different locations. On the last screen, select Finish to exit the
installation program.
9.
Repeat the install on each IQ Central workstation where you wish to use the
scheduler.
10.
Now we need to make sure that the data file of scheduled tasks is available in a
central location that can be accessed by the server (or single IQ Central computer)
and all of the IQ Central workstations where Scheduler is installed.
179
Note
The path to the network location of the IQ Central Scheduler task database
can be either a mapped drive location or a UNC path. (Universal Naming
Convention) Scheduler will work in either case, with one slight condition. A
drive mapping, such as assigning the server drive to be the P: drive, for
example, is only available if a user is logged in on the workstation. If the
scheduled task is to occur when no users are logged into the workstation,
the service may not be able to find the scheduled task file. Because of this,
Peek recommends that you tell the Scheduler how to find the task file using
the UNC path instead. As an example, if the workstation has a mapping of
drive P: to be the C: drive on the server, which is where the central
scheduled task file is located, the two valid options are (assuming the
scheduler was installed in the default location):
P:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central
Scheduler\Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml
But the better choice would follow the UNC convention, which doesn’t
require a user mapping to find a network location (of the form:
\\servername\sharename\path\filename).
In our case, it might look like this, if the sever on our network is called ‘IQ
CentralServer’ and there is no sharepath:
\\IQ CentralServer\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ
Central Scheduler\ Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml
180
11.
If the location on the server is hidden to the workstations, you will need to move the
data file out to a network location where they can access this file. If this is the case,
move the ScheduledTasks.xml file out to the desired network location, and then
launch IQ Central on the server.
12.
Open the Scheduler interface by opening the Tools menu and choosing System
Scheduler.
13.
When the IQ Central Scheduler window opens, select Options from the Tools menu.
14.
Now we need to point the Scheduler to the central task file. The Scheduler Options
window will show that the local scheduler is pointing to the original location of the
tasks file. The default location is C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central
Scheduler\Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml, but this location may have changed if
you installed the Scheduler to somewhere other than the default location during a
Custom install. In either case, use the Browse button to locate the task file, called
ScheduledTasks.xml.
15.
Once you’ve located the task file, select OK in the Scheduler Options window to
accept the new location.
16.
Close the Scheduler.
17.
On the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon and choose Manage.
In the Computer Management window, click on the Services and Applications group
and choose the Services item. This will display a list of the currently active services
in Windows.
18.
Right-click on Peek Scheduler and choose Restart. After it restarts, close the
Computer Management window.
19.
Now we need to make sure that each workstation is also pointing to this central task
database file. Go to one of the workstations and launch IQ Central.
20.
Open the Scheduler interface by opening the Tools menu and choosing System
Scheduler.
21.
When the IQ Central Scheduler window opens, select Options from the Tools menu.
22.
Now we need to point the Scheduler to the central task file. Use the Browse button to
locate the ScheduledTasks.xml task file.
23.
Once you’ve located the task file, select OK in the Scheduler Options window to
accept the new location.
24.
Close the Scheduler on the workstation and restart it.
25.
Repeat steps 20 through 25 on each workstation.
This completes the installation of the IQ Central Scheduler.
Launching the Scheduler Interface
The Scheduler service will start automatically each time Windows starts, but to access the
task configuration interface of IQ Central Scheduler, follow these steps:
1.
Open IQ Central. Be sure to log in as a user that has sufficient rights to access the
Scheduler module.
2.
Go to the Tools menu and choose System Scheduler.
181
Using the Scheduler Interface
The Scheduler task configuration interface is shown in the figure below. There are four parts
to the interface: the menu bar at the top, the tool bar just below that, the current task list on
the left side of the main window area, and the configuration fields on the right side of the
main window area.
IQ Central Scheduler task configuration interface
Figure 88 – Scheduled Task Editor
This interface is used to create, edit, delete, and manage traffic controller log retrieval tasks
in IQ Central. The menu commands are self-explanatory. The purpose of the five toolbar
buttons is shown in this figure:
Scheduler’s Toolbar
Figure 89 – Toolbar buttons in the Scheduled Task Editor
In the task list of the main Scheduler window, you can see all of the tasks that have
currently been configured. The highlighted row or rows is the selected task or tasks, which
can be deleted as a group. Editing can only occur on the row with the black triangle at the
left end, indicating which database record is currently selected. The current values of that
182
task’s data fields are shown in the right side of the window. The operator can make changes
to any of those settings to change the selected task’s operation.
Additional detail about each task is available in the Complete tab that appears at the top of
the right side of the window. For the most part, this is just the same data displayed in a
tabular format. One additional field that is important on the Complete tab, however, is the
DeviceDisplayName field at the top of the table. The text entered here shows up in the Task
list right after the“Retrieve logs from “ label.
Scheduler’s Complete tab
Figure 90 – Complete task details
These are the essentials of the IQ Central Scheduler task configuration interface. For
instructions on performing specific operations with the Scheduler, refer to the following
topics.
183
Adding a Scheduled Task
If you wish to schedule a single or regularly-occurring retrieval of logs from a traffic
controller in IQ Central, you can do this by creating a new task in the IQ Central Scheduler.
To do this, you must have the device already configured and set up with a valid
communications channel (a ‘connection’ in IQ Central terminology.) To create a new task,
open the Scheduler module and follow these steps:
1.
Open the Add Task dialog box by either pressing the Add a New Task button in the
task bar (shown at right) or by going to the Edit menu and choosing Add New Task.
2.
When the Add Task dialog box appears (see Figure 5), choose the device that will
be the target of the log request. The device list appears at the top of the Simple tab.
Figure 91 – Task creation dialog box
3.
Select which of the six available log types to retrieve from the device by placing
checks in the checkboxes next to each type. You can choose one, or multiple logs.
Note
184
The precise information that appears in each of these data sets is dependent
on the device from which you are retrieving the data. The grouping of data into
logs is handled differently by each type of controller and master.
4.
Select how regularly the task should occur. It can be daily, weekly, or monthly.
5.
If you selected Weekly, choose which days of the week you wish the retrieval to
occur. If you selected Monthly, select which day of the month.
6.
Enter the time of day on which you wish the data retrieval to occur. This time is by
the IQ Central computer’s clock, and is in 24 hour (or ‘military’) time. For example,
five minutes after midnight would be 00: 05 in the two time fields, and 11:32pm
would be 23: 32 in the time fields.
7.
If you want the task to stop occurring at some point in the future, click on the Task
expires check box and enter the date that this task ends. The last log retrieval will
occur at the last regularly scheduled interval on or before the beginning (00:00) of
this date. (Note that you can enter a expiration time after the date in this field by
typing directly into the field, should you need that option.)
8.
One final task to perform to complete the setup is to name the task as you want it to
appear in the task list. Click on the Complete tab and enter a descriptive name in the
DeviceDisplayName field. This entry will be placed to the right of the “Retrieve logs
for “ text in the main task list.
9.
Click OK to accept the task settings. The new task will appear in the Task list on the
left side of the window.
10.
Although the task is configured in memory, it has not yet been stored to the Tasks
database. To do that you can either close the Scheduler interface (this will not
interfere with task events, since those are handled by the background Windows
Scheduler service) or you can press the Save Changes button. (Shown at right)
This completes the creation of a task in IQ Central Scheduler. You can repeat the task
creation process multiple times before saving or exiting the Scheduler module, to create
tasks for differing schedules or devices.
Modifying a Scheduled Task
Modify an existing task in the IQ Central Scheduler is a straight-forward process. It
just involves selecting the task to be edited in the list on the left side of the
Scheduler interface window, and making changes to that task in the fields that
appear on the right half of the window. And then be sure to save the changes using
the Save Changes button (shown at right).
185
Deleting a Schedule Task
To delete a task or multiple tasks in the IQ Central Scheduler module, follow these steps:
1.
Open the Scheduler interface.
2.
Select the task to be deleted in the list on the left side of the window. If you want to
delete multiple tasks at once, you can shift-select to add a whole range of tasks, or
Ctrl-select to add individual tasks to the highlighted list. Make sure all of the tasks
you wish to delete are highlighted, and more importantly, none that you don't want to
delete are highlighted. (See figure below.)
Figure 92 – Selecting multiple tasks for deletion
3.
To delete the selected tasks, either press the Delete Selected Task(s) button in the
toolbar (shown at right), or go to the Edit menu and choose Delete selected task(s).
4.
Although the task or tasks are deleted in memory, the change has not yet been
stored to the Tasks database. To do that you can either close the Scheduler interface
(this will not interfere with task events, since those are handled by the background
Windows Scheduler service) or you can press the Save Changes button. (Shown at
right)
This completes the deletion of tasks in IQ Central Scheduler.
Changing the Location of the Task Database
If you wish to move the location of the IQ Central Scheduler tasks database, you can move
the file manually, but you will also need to point all of the Scheduler modules on all IQ
Central workstations to find the file in the new location . The file itself is called
ScheduledTasks.xml, a standard XML data file. By default, it is stored at C:\Program
Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central Scheduler\Configuration\. This file
can be moved anywhere where all Scheduler clients can access it, either locally or across a
network. Once the file has been moved, open the Scheduler interface on each workstation,
and follow these steps:
186
1.
Go to the Tools menu and open the Options window.
Figure 93 – Options dialog box for the System Scheduler
2.
Select the Browse button and navigate to the new location of the tasks file.
3.
Highlight the tasks file and select Open.
4.
Select OK to save the new database location.
5.
Restart the Scheduler interface.
6.
The next few steps are only important on the one machine where the Scheduler
service is running. This would be on the stand-alone computer, or the server of the
IQ Central system, if that's where the IQ Central Scheduler was defined to run on
your network. On the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon and
choose Manage.
7.
In the Computer Management window, click on the Services and Applications group
and choose the Services item. This will display a list of the currently active services
in Windows.
8.
Right-click on Peek Scheduler and choose Restart. After it restarts, close the
Computer Management window.
9.
Repeat this process on the other workstations, if there are any.
This completes the process of changing the location of the scheduled tasks database file.
187
188
Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring
Prior to version 1.5 of IQ Central, alarm monitoring in the software was linked solely to the
Map Viewing module. This limited its usefulness considerably, so a new global device
monitoring alarms system has been created and added to IQ Central.
The core of the new alarm monitoring system is the IQ Alarm Processor, a Windows Service
that now runs in the background and is automatically started whenever the server is
powered up, and is automatically restarted if it should ever go down (for example, when the
office loses power or when Windows locks up.)
The other components of the new alarm monitoring function include an Alarm
Configurations module, where new alarm tests are defined for devices, an Alarm Status
viewer module, Alarm and Device History reports, and a new status bar that indicates
overall alarm status with an icon and informative tooltip text.
The basic idea for performing alarm monitoring in IQ Central follow these six steps:
1.
Install the Peek IQ Alarm Processor along with IQ Central
2.
Define what data, when retrieved from devices, will cause IQ Central to raise an
alarm
3.
Define how alarm states are indicated in the IQ Central interface (in the Status bar
and in the Alarm Status module)
4.
Monitor the status bar to see when alarms are detected
5.
When an alarm is detected, open the Alarm Status module to get the details and
then either handle the situation or acknowledge the alarm to be handled later.
6.
To diagnose ongoing or chronic problems, use the history reports in the Alarm Status
module to troubleshoot the problem.
The next sections describe how to use the various parts of the alarm monitoring system that
were introduced above.
189
Using the Alarm Configuration Window
The Alarm Configuration window is a standalone application that is launched from within IQ
Central. It performs the function of allowing a user to define what alarm conditions will
trigger alarms within IQ Central. These alarm conditions are based on data retrieved from
devices via Map Polling. So the operator configures IQ Central to retrieve certain NTCIP
data objects from a set device or type of device, and the Alarm Configuration window is then
used to define what operating limits will be used to trigger alerts within IQ Central's alarm
system.
Launching the Alarm Configuration Window
The Alarm Configuration window can be launched in a couple of ways:
Go to the Tools menu, open the Alarms group and choose Configuration
or
Right-click on the alarm icon located in the IQ Central status bar (at the
bottom of the main window) and choose Alarm Configuration
Alarm Configuration Interface
The Alarm Configure window's interface is described below. It has four basic areas:
a device list on the left
an inherited alarm condition area in the upper right,
the defined alarm condition list in the middle right
buttons to add, delete and save changes to the alarm conditions list, in the bottom right
of the window
190
Figure 94 – Alarm Configuration window
It's important to remember that this interface doesn't show anything about the current
state of alarms. It only shows what alarm conditions have been defined.
Alarm conditions can be defined globally, for all devices in the system, by entering them
under the System node. Or they can be defined for a device type or group type by defining
the alarm condition at that level. Or they can be defined on a device-by-device basis, by
entering the condition at the lowest level of the device hierarchy tree. The left side of the
interface shows the list of devices in a variety of formats, based on which tab is selected at
the bottom of the area. The default view is 'View by Group', which is shown in the illustration
below.
191
Figure 95 – Device Hierarchy - 'View by Groups'
Each device, group or device type, or the System node is given a graphical icon which
shows what alarm conditions have been defined for that node. The appearance of this icon
follows these rules:
Node Icon
Meaning
No alarm conditions are defined or inherited at this node level
At least one alarm condition has been defined at this node level
At least one alarm condition has been defined at this node level AND it
has also inherited at least one alarm condition from a node higher in the
device tree
This node has inherited at least one alarm condition from a node higher
in the device tree
192
View By Type Display
The 'View by Type' tab in this window works in the same way as the 'View by Groups',
except that the device trip in the left part of the window is organized by device type, rather
than Groups. This tree view uses the same node icons to indicate assigned and inherited
alarm conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 96– Alarm Configuration window - "View by Type"
193
All Alarms Display
The final method of organizing the device tree is a simple 'All Alarms' view, which simply
lists all of the configured alarms in the system. Alarm conditions cannot be added, edited or
deleted in this view, although the list can be sorted. As you can see from the figure below,
this is a list of all alarm conditions sorted by Severity level.
Figure 97 – Alarm Configuration window - "All Alarms"
It is useful to note that if you find the alarm condition you're looking for in the All Alarms
display, select it, and switch back to one of the other two displays, you will be presented
with the editing controls for that device and alarm condition.
For details on how to create, delete, or modify an alarm condition, refer to the "Setting Up a
New Alarm" topic.
194
Using the Alarm Status Window
The Alarm Status module is used to view and track all of the alarms that are currently active
in the system. An alarm is 'active' if no data has been received that acts as a 'cleared' state
for the alarm. (The clear state for an alarm is defined when one defines an alarm condition.)
Launching the Alarm Status Module
There are a couple of methods that can be used to launch the Alarm Status module:
Go to the Tools menu, choose Alarms, and then select the Status command
or
Right-click on the alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar at the bottom of the IQ
Central window, and choose Alarm Status.
or, probably the easiest option:
Press the F7 function key.
Using the Alarm Status Interface
When the Alarm Status module appears, it shows a list of all of the currently active alarms,
meaning device data that was retrieved during polling and resulted in tripping an alarm
condition. 'Current Alarms' are those that have not been cleared by the data going back into
the acceptable range. Alarms that have been 'acknowledged' in the main IQ Central window
will show up in this list.
Figure 98 – Alarm Status window
The alarms list is sorted by date and severity, by default, but it can be resorted by the user
at any time by clicking on one of the column headers in the list. Clicking on a column header
again will toggle the sort between ascending and descending sorts.
195
The Dock/Restore button tells the Alarm Status window to 'dock' itself along the left edge of
the IQ Central window or to return to its previous position.
The Auto Refresh feature is OFF by default. This option tells the module whether or not to
update the current list with the latest alarms that have occurred. The Refresh View button
will perform this refresh of the list manually, whenever the button is pressed. The Auto
Refresh refreshes the current alarms list every 10 seconds or so.
Note
It may be useful to turn off the auto-refresh function when you have sorted
the list in some manner, because the auto-refresh function will automatically
return the alarm list to its default sort criteria of ascending date and
descending severity.
The buttons at the bottom left of the window provide access to the alarm history viewer with
two different filtering criteria, each based on whichever current alarm row is selected in the
current list. The Display Alarm History option opens the Alarm History viewer and filters the
list by the currently selected alarm type. The Display Device History option opens the Alarm
History viewer and filters the list by all alarms (current and historic) that have occurred for
the selected device.
The background and text colors that appear in the Alarm Status window's alarm list can be
modified using the Settings controls located in the Alarm Configuration module.
Note
196
Some useful information about setting up polling for alarm monitoring is
provided in the topic "Using the Polling Assistant" in the Polling &
Scheduling Events chapter.
Setting Up a New Alarm
This topic describes how to create new alarm conditions in IQ Central, and also how to
delete alarm conditions, and modify existing alarm conditions.
Creating a New Alarm Condition
These are the steps to perform when you want to set up a new device-based alarm
condition in IQ Central:
1.
Open the Alarm Configuration module. (Tools menu > Alarms > Configuration, or
right-click on the alarm icon in the status bar and choose Alarm Configuration)
2.
If you are hoping to apply the alarm condition to a device type, switch the view to
View by Type with the tab at the left end of the bottom edge of the window.
3.
On the left side of the window, select the group, device type or device for which you
wish to define the alarm condition. (If it will be an alarm condition that is to apply to
all devices in the system, choose the System node.)
4.
Click on the Add button at the bottom of the alarm conditions list.
A new item will appear in the alarm condition list. Alarm conditions have some
graphical indicators to provide information about the state of the alarm condition
definition, as shown in the next figure.
Figure 99 – Features of the alarm conditions list in the Alarm Configuration window
5.
Select an alarm Type from the drop-down list. This list is populated based on what
type of device or devices are covered by the selected node.
6.
Choose the Severity of the alarm that will be generated should this condition be
breached. The Severity of an alarm condition is used to determine how IQ Central
will respond when this level severity of alarm appears. Whether or not the status bar
alarm icon blinks, or if it generates a tooltip text message, or if there is an audio
indication that this type of alarm has arrived are defined by severity level in the Alarm
system Settings window.
197
7.
Type a Message that will appear when the alarm condition is detected. This
message will also be stored in the Historical Alarm database.
8.
If the alarm condition has an expanded detail arrow in the corner, click on it to
access the extra data fields that are available to define this type of alarm condition.
Figure 100 – Example of data fields in the expanded alarm conditions view
9.
Fill in any additional fields required to define the alarm condition. An expanded alarm
condition view can provide extra fields to define what inputs are used and how they
mathematically tested, or it can provide a way for you to only test individual bits in a
retrieved data object.
10.
Once the alarm condition is defined, you will see a yellow triangle at the upper left
corner of the alarm row. This indicates that the condition has been modified, but not
saved. Press the Save button at the bottom of the list. The yellow triangle should
disappear.
That completes the creation of an alarm condition. The new alarm condition becomes
active as soon as you save it. You can create or edit more conditions, or exit the window at
this point.
198
Editing an Existing Alarm Condition
To edit an alarm condition, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the node in the device tree for which the alarm condition is defined.
3.
Select the alarm condition that you wish to change.
4.
Make the desired change. You may need to expand the alarm condition box to see
all of the fields that define it.
5.
When you are finished modifying the alarm condition, press the Save button at the
bottom of the alarm conditions list.
That completes the modification of an alarm condition. The new settings for the alarm
condition become active as soon as you save the alarm. You can create or edit more
conditions, or exit the window at this point.
Deleting an Alarm Condition
To delete an alarm condition, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the node in the device tree for which the alarm condition is defined.
3.
Select the alarm condition that you wish to delete.
4.
Press the Delete button at the bottom of the list. Notice that the alarm condition is not
removed from the list immediately, however the yellow triangle does appear at the
top left corner of the alarm condition. This means that the alarm condition has been
marked for deletion.
Caution
5.
Before proceeding, be sure you have marked the correct alarm
condition for deletion. Once the alarm condition is deleted and the
change is Saved, it cannot be recovered. It will need to be re-created if
you wish to use that alarm condition again.
Press the Save button at the bottom of the list to finish deleting the alarm condition.
That completes the deletion of an alarm condition. The old alarm condition will go inactive
as soon as you save the deletion.
199
Handling Alarms
If you have configured alarm conditions in your alarm system, alarms will begin showing up
in your IQ Central interface in a number of ways, depending on how you configured your
alarm system and what severity level of alarms are being detected. IQ Central provides
tools for monitoring alarms, but how your office handles these alarms will depend on using
procedures that respond to the signals that IQ Central provides.
1.
When a Critical level alarm (typically) arrives, you may have configured it to give a
pop-up message in the status bar (as shown below). This pop-up will not disappear
until you acknowledge the alarms. This is intended to make sure that serious alarms
are actually seen by human eyes.
Figure 101 – A critical alarm configured to display a tooltip popup message
2.
To acknowledge such an alarm, right click on the alarm icon in the status bar. (The
alarm icon, by the way, will always show the highest level of alarm that is currently
active in the system.) In the popup menu, choose Acknowledge Alarm. This does not
clear the alarm or remove it from the Alarm Status viewer. It just removes the
immediate alert.
Figure 102 – Acknowledge the alarm to temporarily remove the tooltip message from
your IQ Central display
200
3.
Presumably, at this point, you will wish to dispatch someone to address the problem
with the device, or at least schedule some action.
4.
For normal status monitoring, you may wish to keep the Alarm Status window open
as a status monitoring tool in your IQ Central interface. If you open the Alarm Status
module (F7), choose the Dock button, and check the Auto Refresh checkbox, this
module will sit on the left edge of your IQ Central window and continuously update to
show the current state of active alarms. Keeping this module open will not change
the way that the alarm icon in the status bar behaves.
Figure 103 – The Alarm Status module docked to the IQ Central window and auto
refreshing
5.
Another way to monitor the normal status of alarms is to hover over the alarm icon in
the toolbar. This will present a summary of the current alarm condition within IQ
Central at the moment, as shown below.
Figure 104 – Current alarm status tooltip visible when hovering over the alarm icon
6.
You may wish to attempt to troubleshoot an alarm. One way to do this is to select the
alarm in the Alarm Viewer module and use the two buttons at the bottom of the
module to investigate the history of this type of alarm and this device within your
system.
201
Configuring the Alarms System
The Alarms system has a set of global parameters that determine how the system operates,
based on alarm severity level. These parameters determine how the alarm service presents
an incoming alarm, in both audio and visual representation.
Opening the Alarm Parameters
The Alarm Parameters window is accessible from the Alarm Configuration module. Follow
these steps to open the Alarm Parameters window:
1.
2.
Click on the Settings button at the bottom of the Alarm Configuration window. (shown
at right)
3.
Select the tab for the alarm severity level whose behavior you wish to modify.
Setting the Parameters
There are three levels of alarms available in IQ Central: simple informational alarms, more
serious Warning alarms, and the most important 'Critical' alarms which usually deal with
operational shutdowns, security issues, or serious safety issues. The Alarms System
Settings window has three tabs of settings, one for each type of alarm. The same controls
are available on each pane, but the settings are independent of one another.
Typical Settings for a Critical Alarm
The following figure shows what the Critical Settings pane looks like with some typical
values entered.
Figure 105 – Alarm System Settings - Critical settings
202
Audio Settings
No Sound – As the name suggests, when this severity level of alarm arrives, IQ Central
does not make a sound. This is typically the setting for Informational alarms.
System Sound – This option tells IQ Central to play one of the standard Windows system
sounds when this type of alarm arrives.
Play Wave File – Another option to the System Sound above is to provide IQ Central with
your own audio file (a .wav file) to be played whenever this severity of alarm arrives. It's
important to keep this sound file short, say no more than 5 seconds, so that many incoming
alarms will not step on one another during their audio alerts. To use this option, click on the
Play Wave File check box and then press the Browse button to open an Open file dialog
box where you can navigate to, and select, your desired audio file.
Test – This button toggles between 'Test' and 'Stop Test'. When the test is activated, it will
play either the system sound or the selected .wav file, using the repeat interval specified
below.
Repeat Interval – This setting tells IQ Central how many seconds to wait before repeating
the sound. This repetition will continue until the alarm is 'acknowledged' in the Status bar.
Setting this value to 0 tells the alarm system to play the sound only once and stop.
Visual Settings
Fore Color – The color of the font text that will appear in the Alarm Status module for an
alarm with this severity level.
Back Color – The color of the background for an alarm of this severity level as it appears in
the Alarm Status module.
Flash Repeat Interval – This tells IQ Central whether or not to blink the alarm icon in the IQ
Central status bar. To configure a flashing icon, check this checkbox, and then set the
number of seconds for each phase of the flash. (e.g. Setting a value of 2 here will cause the
icon to stay ON for 2 seconds and then go OFF for 2 seconds, for a flash cycle length of 4
seconds.)
Show Popup – This tells IQ Central to display a persistent pop-up tooltip window over the
alarm icon in the Status bar whenever this level of alarm arrives. This is typically only turned
ON for critical alarms, because this kind of display will require a user to 'acknowledge' each
alarm that arrives before the pop-up can be dismissed from the screen. Setting this value
ON for informational alarms, for example, could result in an annoying situation in which the
user is perpetually required to acknowledge incoming alarms while working with IQ Central.
After you've made changes to the available settings, you can either switch to the other
alarm severity panes and make changes there, or you can click OK to save the new settings
and leave the Alarm System Settings window, or click Cancel to discard your changes and
exit the settings window.
203
Typical Settings for A Warning Alarm
Figure 106 – Alarm System Settings - Warning settings
As an example of how the Warning alarm indicators may be set up, the above dialog box
shows that this type of alarm will cause a custom sound file to play once, and then the alarm
will appear in the Alarm Status module with an orange background with black text. The
alarm icon will not blink and no popup will appear over the IQ Central status bar.
Typical Settings for an Informational Alarm
Figure 107 – Alarm System Settings - Info settings
Finally, the above screen shows how one might configure an Info alarm to be alerted within
IQ Central. In this example, the arrival of an Informational alarm will not generate any sound
effects, nor will it flash the alarm icon or show a popup message. This type of alarm will
appear as a yellow row with brown text in the Alarm Status module.
204
Chapter 12 – Reports
There are three sources of data for reports within IQ Central: device configurations, device
activity, and user activity. Reports on device configurations would include data about how
many and what types of devices are configured in IQ Central. Reports on device activity
would include event log reports, performance data, environmental data, and any other data
collection logs that the devices collect. And reports on user activity could include IQ Central
login/logout and account activity records, as well as any front panel interface activity logs
that are collected by field devices.
Report generation in IQ Central is based on the reporting tools of the Microsoft Access
database in which IQ Central stores its data. A set of pre-configured reports is included in
the IQ Central Report Selection Module, but additional reports can be configured for IQ
Central using your own copy of Microsoft Access and its report configuration tools.
Using the Reports Interface
The Report Selection window in IQ Central is used to select from a list of pre-configured
reports. When a report is selected and you select the Create Report button, the data is
retrieved from the IQ Central Access database and formatted as a Word file. Once visible in
the Word window, all of the tools of the Word environment are available. This means that
the appearance of the report can be reformatted to meet your needs, or a template can be
applied to meet a standard report layout. This also means that the data in the report can be
exported using any of the Word export filters.
Only one report can be selected and created at a time. If the report you need is not visible
on the list, it is possible to create a new report using the Access database environment.
Applying Report Filters
The Report Selection window also allows the operator to select what filters or sorting criteria
to use when generating the report.
Note
Some of the reports do not utilize all of these filter selections.
First check the box next to the report that is required. Then select the parameters that will
further define the report. Each of the report filters is described below. Once you have made
the required selections, click on the Create Report button to process the report.
Date Range
If you click on “For Date Range”, the Date Range fields will open allowing you to select the
required date range for the report. Click on the drop down list box for Start Date and End
Date to open a calendar page from which you can select the required dates.
If you click on “For All Dates” the Date Range selection boxes will not be displayed and the
report will be generated for all dates.
205
Device Type
If you click on “For Selected Device Type”, the available Device Types will be listed in the
window and you will be able to select the required Device Type by highlighting the required
device Type in the drop down list
If you click on “For All Device Types”, the Device Type selection will not be displayed and
the report will be generated for all Device Types.
Devices
If you click on “For Selected Devices”, all the Devices for the selected Device Types will be
listed, allowing you to select a specific device. Click the drop down list box and highlight the
required device.
If you click on “For All Devices”, the Device selection will not be displayed and the report will
be generated for all devices.
Users
If you click on “For Selected Users”, a Users list will open, allowing you select a specific
user. Click the drop down list box and highlight the required user.
If you click on “For All Users”, the User selection will not be displayed and the report will be
generated for all Users.
206
Generating Source Data for Reporting
It is important to remember when running an IQ Central report that the process of running
the report generates no new data. It counts entirely on the existing data stored in the IQ
Central Access database. There are a couple of different methods/tools used to populate the
database with the data you will need. Data comes from possible sources:
User activity
Device configuration data
Device log files
Getting this data into the access database depends on the source and type of data. Some
data, like IQ Central user activity, is automatically logged by the software. This is why users
must log in when starting the application. Other data is created as a side-effect of normal
user operation, such as device configuration information. When you create an instance of a
device type, the information for the device is stored in the database and becomes available
for reporting.
The third source of data, however, requires a bit more IQ Central configuration. Devices
often keep data logs of what is going on in and around their location. To store this data in
the IQ Central database, there are a couple of methods, depending on the type of device
and the type of log:
Alarms and Status event logs
This kind of data can be retrieved by IQ Central using the Log Polling functionality. This
involves regularly sending out a message to a device and asking for the status of preconfigured pieces of data. This kind of data retrieval should be used sparingly, since regular
reporting of many data points can quickly generate a huge amount of data. This type of data
retrieval can be done for any type of device and is called Log Polling.
Controller Log Retrieval
Traffic controllers are often configured to store large amounts of operational, user access,
and environmental data on-board. This information can be pulled back into IQ Central using
scheduled log retrieval. This source of data is only available for controllers and master
controllers, and the exact data that is available depends on the make and model of
controller being accessed.
Message Sign Log Retrieval
Another source of error log data is message signs. Message Signs can be configured to
collect user-defined error logs, and these logs can be retrieved into the IQ Central database
using the Message Sign Bulk Operations module.
207
Exporting Report Data
Once a report has been created using the Report Selection module, it is presented in a
Word window. In Word, you have the option to export the report data in a variety of formats.
Basic Export
1.
If you want to keep the basic report before making any changes, save the Word file.
2.
If you just want the table headers and data, highlight the report's header and delete
it.
3.
Open the File menu and choose Save As.
4.
In the Save as type: pull-down list, choose the type of data export you wish to
generate. Common types of data export include: XML, HTM, RTF (rich text format),
or TXT file.
5.
Type a file name and save the file.
Structured Export
208
1.
If the basic method doesn't provide enough data structure for the final destination,
you can perform a bit more pre-export manipulation to get a more usable data
source. Again, delete any non-data text from the file. But keep the column
headers. The text to remove may include header and report footer text, as well as
graphical elements such as rules.
2.
Now we need to convert the data text to a table. Highlight the data, including the
header row. Go to the Table menu and choose Convert > Text to Table.
3.
When asked for details on the conversion method to use, remember that the number
of columns will usually equal the visible number of columns plus one (for an initial
spacing tab), and be sure to separate the columns at 'Tabs'.
4.
If there is a blank column at the left edge of the table, highlight it and go to the Table
menu and choose Delete > Columns to remove it.
5.
Verify that the table is logically consistent. If there are problems with the conversion,
you can undo the conversion (Edit > Undo, or CTRL-Z) and try again.
6.
When the data is complete and correctly formatted within the table, highlight the
table and Copy it.
7.
Open Microsoft Excel.
8.
Past the table into Excel.
9.
Save the data file. You now have an easily-ported data file of the report.
Creating a Custom Report
The method to create a custom report in IQ Central requires you to close IQ Central and
open the IQ Central database with Microsoft Access. The creation of Access reports takes a
bit of knowledge and practice, but it is very powerful. The basic process is described here:
1.
Close IQ Central.
2.
In Windows, navigate to the location of your IQ Central database. The file is called
NTCIPServerDB.mdb. The default location for this database file is C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\.
3.
When you find the file, double-click it to open it in Microsoft Access.
4.
Click on the Reports button on the left side of the database window.
5.
A report is based on a set of data. You can use either a simple data Table (such as
the table 'DeviceList') or a Query as your data source. A query is a way to sort,
merge, combine, filter, or repackage the data on one or more tables into a new listing
that shows only the data you want. If the table or query already exists from which
you wish to pull your report, you can go ahead and start building the report. If not,
you will need to go to the Query section of the database and put together the data
set you need. Only after you've got the set of data you wish to report on can you
start to generate the report. (Once a query is set up, the next time you run the report
the query will go back to the source data tables and update itself. In this way, the
report will include the latest data stored in the database.)
6.
To create a report from scratch, you can either generate a new report by clicking the
New button at the top of the window or click on the 'Create report by using wizard'
option at the top of the Reports list. In either case, the first step will be to name the
report. The second step will be to tell Access what data set (Table or Query) to use
as the report's data source.
To create a report by modifying an existing design, select the report that you want to
emulate, choose Copy, and then Paste it to a new file name. When the new file
appears in the Reports list, highlight it and click the Design button at the top of the
window. Keep in mind that the name you give a report is the name that will appear in
IQ Central's Report Selection list.
Note
A report's name is important. If you wish to hide a report so that
it will not appear in the Report Selection list, just start the reports
name with an underscore character ('_') AND ALSO right-click
on the report, select Properties, and make sure the Hidden
check box is checked. One may wish to do this if one is creating
a single report with several sub-reports within it. You probably
would not want the sub-reports to show up on the Report
Selection list in IQ Central. Just give them names that start with
an underscore, such as '_Critical Alarms', and call the subreport from a master report that doesn't start with an
underscore, such as 'Alarm Events'.
7.
Select a data source for the report, place the fields you want to appear in the report,
and format the text fields and labels as desired.
8.
Save the report.
209
210
9.
Test it to see if it presents the data you need in the manner you had hoped for.
10.
Tweak and save the report until it fits your requirements.
11.
Close Access.
12.
Restart IQ Central.
13.
Open the Report Selection window and verify that your new report appears in the list.
Chapter 13 – User Management & Security
The IQ Central has a three tiered user-level security system that limits what each logged-in
user can access within the IQ Central environment. It controls access by requiring that all
users log into the system before they can perform an actions. By default, the system is
delivered with three User Accounts, each with its own preset Password, already created.
Table 29 – Pre-configured User Accounts
User Name
Password
Level1
1
Access Level
Operations
Level2
2
Maintenance
Level3
3
Administration
It would be wise of you to add your own Users Accounts. After you've created your own user
accounts, you can then delete the above standard accounts so that you have complete
control over who has access to your system, and at what level. Keep in mind that only users
with Administration Level access have full control of the system, including the ability to add
and delete other User Accounts.
The system will not allow you to delete the Administration user if you have not first created
another Administration user. We advise that you not limit the access of the Administration
Access Level (as defined in the Access Levels module.) The Administration level of access
should always have full read-write ability for all functions. This is important so that you have
at least one level of users that has access to the full functionality of the system.
For more details on how to manage user accounts and the general security of IQ Central,
please check the related topics below.
211
Managing User Accounts
User Accounts are used to control who can access what parts of the IQ Central interface.
User accounts are split into three levels of access: Operations level, Maintenance Level,
and Administration level. The exact access that each of these levels gains is set using the
Access Levels module, which is discussed in the Managing IQ Central Security topics. But
managing the accounts themselves is done mostly using the User Management controls
under the Tools menu. Unless you change the settings yourself, user management
functions are only available to those users with Administration access.
Note
Even if a user does not have administrative level access to IQ Central, he or
she can still change the account password on his or her own account.
The primary tool used to perform these functions is the User Administration Module.
Adding a New User Account
Open the User Administration module by going to the Tools menu and selecting User
Administration, then click on Add/Delete. Note that the User Administration tools are only
available to users with Administration level access.
To add a new User, select the required level (Operations, Maintenance or Administration)
from the drop down list at the top of the window. Click on the New button and the New User
fields at the bottom of the window will become available for input. Enter the Name of the
new user as well as their Password. The Password must be entered twice, in the Password
field and in the Confirm field, in order to verify that you have typed what you thought you
did. Passwords can be anything up to 10 characters in length, can contain letters and/or
numbers, and are case-sensitive.
Once you have filled in the fields, choose the Add button to add the new user to the list
above. Verify that the user appears in the left window, and verify that this list is showing the
proper access level, as indicated by the selected item in the top pull-down box and also by
the color-coding of the name itself.
When you are finished adding new accounts, select Close to exit the User Administration
module.
Deleting a User Account
To remove a User Account from the system, open the User Administration module by going
to the Tools menu and choosing User Administration, then clicking on Add/Delete. Only
users with Administration level accounts can access the commands in the User
Administration submenu. In the window, make sure the user's account you wish to delete
appears in the right-side window. (Accounts in the left-side window do not activate the
Remove button when selected.) To make the account appear in the right-side list, make
sure the access level pull down at the top of the window is set to one of the other two levels
to which this user does NOT belong. That moves those types of users to the left-side list,
and your user will then appear in the right-side list. Now, highlight the Name of the user's
account you wish to delete and click the Remove button.
When you are asked to verify the deletion of the account, be sure you are deleting the
correct account, and choose Yes to proceed. Choose No if you decide to keep the account.
212
Note
IQ Central will not allow you to delete the last remaining
Administration level user account.
Changing the Security Level of a User
Each user account in your IQ Central installation is assigned to one of the three security
levels: Operations, Maintenance, or Administration. You can change the security level
assigned to a given account using the User Management module.
To change the security level of an account, open the User Maintenance module by going to
the Tools menu and choosing User Management, then click on Add/Delete. Locate the
user account you wish to change and notice what its current security level is. Make sure that
the security group chosen at the top of the window is the destination group into which you
wish to switch the user. This is important because only users on the right-side list can be
changed, and that list is made up of users who are currently in a group other than the
currently selected one. Select the user to be modified, and press the << button to move it
into the left-side list. When finished, press close to save the changes and close the User
Management module.
Note
It is important to remember that 'Security Level' and 'Access Level' are
two separate concepts within IQ Central. Security Level is the level
assigned to an individual user account, which is selected from the
three pre-configured security levels. Access level, on the other hand, is
a way of modifying what the members of the Operations, Maintenance,
and Administration group can access within the IQ Central interface.
Security Level assigns the levels to users; Access Levels define
exactly what each of those levels can do.
Caution
Do not change the last Administration level account. IQ Central will
not allow you to delete the last Administration account, but it will
allow you to reassign it to a lower security level. If you lock yourself
out of the ability to change user accounts, you will not be able to
regain access to the full system without contacting Peek Technical
Support.
Changing Your Password
Any user logged into the IQ Central system can change their own password, as long as they
know their existing password.
1.
To change your password, go to the File menu and choose Change Password.
2.
In the Change Password dialog box, type in your Old Password. Be sure to match
the case of the old password.
3.
Type the new password into the Password field. Be sure to write it down somewhere,
since passwords are encrypted and cannot be retrieved from the database if they are
forgotten.
213
4.
Type the new password again in the Confirm field.
5.
Press the Change button to make the modification to your user account.
6.
Click Close to exit the Change Password dialog box.
Setting a User Password
Passwords are attached to individual User accounts. Passwords can be anything up to 10
characters in length, can contain letters and/or numbers, and are case-sensitive. Please
make a note of your password, as it is stored on the system in an encrypted format so there
is no way to retrieve the password if you forget it.
Typically, there are only two ways to modify a password: either by the Administrator user
when the User Account is first created, or by the logged-in user himself. However, there is a
work-around method to change the password of an existing account if you are an
Administration user.
To Change the Password of another User if You are an Administration User
1.
Open the User Administration module. (Tools menu > User Administration >
Add/Delete) or via the Toolbar button.
2.
Write down the name of the account you wish to modify. Be sure to match the case
of all letters in the Name.
3.
Make sure the selected security level (Operations/Maintenance/Administration) is
something other than the one assigned to the target user.
4.
Select the User Account in the right-side list.
5.
Press Remove to delete the account. Verify that you do wish to remove the account.
6.
Select the Security Level that you wish the user to have with the new password
using the pull-down list at the top of the window.
7.
Click the New... button.
8.
Type in the name of the account you just deleted. Be sure to match the account
name exactly.
9.
Enter the new password in both the Password and the Confirm fields.
10.
Press the Add button to add the user account.
11.
Click on the Close button to exit the User Administration module.
The account now exists with a new password.
214
User Administration Module
The User Administration module allows an Administration level user to add, delete, and
modify the security level of user login accounts within IQ Central. Click on the image below
to see additional details about the controls in this module.
Figure 108 – User Administration module
215
Managing Security
Security within IQ Central is enforced by the fact that every user who wishes to use the
controls of the system and access the devices being managed must first log into the system
before any controls are available. User Management is a separate part of this process, and
is described in the Managing User Accounts topics.
But after user accounts have been defined, there are several other tools for reviewing,
modifying and monitoring system security, as described in the following topics:
Device Security (NTCIP device passwords) - Only available for Message Signs in IQ
Central v1.1 through v1.4
Access Levels for user accounts
Viewing a list of all logged in users
As an example of the importance of maintaining system security, please notice what can
happen if the wrong person has access to the Central Override capability for traffic
controllers in IQ Central. A Central Override can be sent to one or many devices. If an
unauthorized person were to send a central override to multiple traffic controllers in your
system, and say, they put those intersections into Flash mode during rush hour, one can
imagine that this would cause a serious safety problem, as well as a logistics nightmare. For
this reason, Flash override commands require a user to type in his or her user account login
and password again, before the override command will be sent. But, of course, this safety
feature emphasizes the importance of maintaining network security. If the network
administrator has not maintained control of user accounts and passwords, access to critical
features such as Flash overrides may be available to personnel who should not have it.
Currently Logged In Users
This module performs two important functions:
It lists all of the user sessions that are currently logged into IQ Central. This includes all
local logins as well as all users across a network, if you have a networked IQ Central
system. It also may include some agent logins, such as the IQ Central scheduler service
or the IQ Alarm Processing service.
It allows an administrator level user to shut down another user login remotely. This is
intended to allow an administrative level user to restart an entire IQ Central network from
one workstation when necessary for database maintenance.
Opening the Currently Logged In Users window
The Currently Logged on Users command on the Tools > User Administration
menu displays a listing of all of the users that are currently logged into IQ Central. Or
you can use the Currently Logged in Users button on the User Administration toolbar
(shown at right.)
216
Shutting Down a User Login
Follow these steps to shut down a user login:
1.
Open the Currently Logged In User window
2.
Select the login that you wish to shut down by placing a check in its checkbox. You
can choose one or multiple accounts to shut down. (If the login has become active
since the window was opened, you can update the list by pressing the Refresh List
button.)
Caution
Performing the next step on a user account where the user is making
changes to the database can result in that user losing his or her
changes. Be very careful that no one is doing major edits to the
database when you request this shutdown.
3.
Press the Shutdown selected Clients button, located at the bottom of the window.
4.
A warning message will appear within each of the client windows, like the one shown
below.:
Figure 109 – Each login that will be shut down sees this message
5.
After the warning message, the IQ Central window hosting the chosen user login will
close.
217
Access Levels Module
You can set various access levels for each user that has access to the system. The
functions that a particular user can access are set based upon the Security Level that is set
for that operator.
Each User Account has a security level allocated when the account is created. IQ Central
has three default security levels: Operations, Maintenance, and Administration. Every
module and window in IQ Central has controls on it. Using the Access Levels module, you
can specify which controls are accessible by each level of user. Each level can have one of
three types of access allocated – Read-Write, Read Only, or Not Accessible. Read-Write
allows the user full access to the field or control function. Read-Only allows limited access,
(i.e. the user can only view the field or control function, but cannot make changes.) And Not
Accessible renders that field or control completely unavailable to that level of user.
Note
It is important to remember that 'Security Level' and 'Access Level' are two
separate concepts within IQ Central. Security Level is the level assigned to
an individual user account, which is selected from the three pre-configured
security levels. Access level, on the other hand, is a way of modifying what
the members of the Operations, Maintenance, and Administration groups
can access within the IQ Central interface. Security Level assigns the levels
to users; Access Levels define exactly what each of those levels can do.
Version 1.6 also added a couple of enhancements to the Access Levels module. First, the
columns of the table can now be used to sort the table by that column's data. Just click on
the column header to switch between an ascending or a descending sort order. And a
second change is that the MDI item in the Access Levels list (Choose 'MDI' in the Select
Window field), which is used to control what menus and interface elements are accessible
by each of the three user groups, now includes a full listing of the command path for the
menu item in the Description field. This is very helpful when an administrator is trying to
restrict access to particular controls in IQ Central. The figure below shows the Access Level
Module's MDI list, sorted by the Description field.
Figure 110 – MDI selection in the Access Levels window
218
The MDI selection in the Access Levels window allows an administrator to control what
commands each group can see (and use) in the IQ Central menus
Changing the Access Level for a Module Control
1.
To do this, click on the Select Form drop down list box and highlight the form for
which you want to set access levels.
2.
Each control that is available on the form will be listed in the Control name list. The
description field provides you with a brief description of what the function of the
control is. Select the control you wish to modify.
3.
When the control is selected, its details will be displayed in the edit fields below the
data window. Select the applicable access requirement for each Level and click on
the Apply button.
219
220
Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance &
Backup
IQ Central uses an Access database to store all device data, event log information, program
data, and system logs. The topics in this section describe how to work with the database,
how to keep it operating correctly, and how to backup and restore part or all of the
database.
Working in the IQ Central Access Database
IQ Central stores most of its configuration and customer information in a single Microsoft
Access™ database. Some configuration of IQ Central requires that the operator open this
database and make some modifications directly to the tables stored there. If you need to
open and modify the IQ Central database, be aware of the following facts:
The central Access database for IQ Central is stored at C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Peek Traffic\IQ Central\. The file is called
NTCIPServerDB.mdb. This area of your hard drive may have been locked down by
your IT staff. However, to use IQ Central, you will have already requested Administration
access to this folder in order to use the application.
This database file will always be stored in the above location, no matter where you
installed the rest of IQ Central.
Caution
BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN EDITING THE DATABASE DIRECTLY.
FOLLOW DIRECTIONS ABOUT DOING SO EXPLICITLY, SINCE
MODIFICATION TO ANY OTHER TABLE IN THE DATABASE WHILE
YOU ARE WORKING IN THE FILE COULD RENDER YOUR IQ
Central INSTALLATION INOPERABLE.
When editing values in Microsoft Access, your changes will be saved automatically
whenever you exit a record.
It is OK to edit the values stored in the IQ Central tables in Access, but do not change
the names of the tables themselves, or the field column names within those tables.
221
Here is a list of the tables included with an installation of IQ Central:
Figure 111 – IQ Central database table listing
To edit the contents of a table, simply double-click on the table to open it, highlight the cell
you wish to change, and type your change.
222
Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup
System Logging
IQ Central has several tools that allow the system to record a history of events that have
occurred during operation. This System Log keeps track of user activity, changes to the
device and connections lists, communications events, and optionally, user comments. The
event log entries can be viewed from within the User Comments Module, or they can be
printed as an Event Log report.
Note
The System Log is a different log record than logs retrieved from traffic
controllers and master controllers using the System Scheduler tool, and it is
also different than the Device Event Logs retrieved from Message Signs.
Those events are stored in separate tables within IQ Central. The System
Log is more like the top level record of activities within the software
package.
The system log can grow quite large if there are a lot of devices being tracked, especially if
Extended Logging has been turned on. This is the point of the Size Event Log module, to
allow for the management of the size of the System Log.
Size Event Log Module
The Event Log Size module is used to define how much space the IQ Central System Log
can take up within your IQ Central Access database, and on your hard drive. This tool sets
the number of event log records the system will track. IQ Central will never grow the table to
a size larger than the one defined here. When the table is full, IQ Central will begin
overwriting the oldest records.
The module also displays how much of the currently configured space is being used by log
records and the number of entries this represents. By default, the System Log event table is
configured to be 21,000 records.
Opening the Event Log Size Module
To open the Event Log Size module, you can perform one of the following options.
Go to the Tools menu and choose Logging Options and then Size Event Log.
or you can select the Event Log Size icon on the System Maintenance toolbar
Note
If you resize the log to smaller number of records than the current setting,
you will be deleting records in the database. If there is data stored in those
records, they will be erased.
Extended Logging
Extended Logging is an option available under the Tools > Logging Options menu. This
option controls the amount and type of detail that is included in the event log files. For
standard operation, extended logging should not be turned on, since it can cause the log
data tables to grow very quickly. It should only be turned on if additional detail is required in
the log file for diagnostic purposes.
223
If Extended Logging is active, a check mark will appear next to it when the drop down menu
is opened. If there is no check mark, Extended Logging is inactive. To make it active when it
is inactive, or inactive when it is active, click on the menu option and follow the prompts.
User Comments Module
The IQ Central System log can be documented. Users can attach comments to events to
describe what was happening, what caused the event, or what the resolution was.
To add a particular note to a specific event, open the User Comments module by selecting
User Comments from the View menu. A window will open, allowing you to enter a
comment for a particular event. If you know the date of the event for which you want to add
a comment, enter that date in both fields. If you are not sure of the date, you can enter a
range of dates so that all the events that were logged between those dates will be displayed
in the list so that you can locate the required event.
You can also specify that events logged by a specific operator should be displayed. To do
this, select the specific operator from the drop down list box. Only events logged for that
operator will be displayed so that you can add the required comment.
Adding a Comment
224
1.
Locate the event for which you want to add a comment. Click on that event and the
'Comment' field will be activated.
2.
Type in the comment you wish to attach to the event.
3.
Click the Save button and the comment will be added to the event log. The comment
will also be included on the Event Log report when it is printed.
Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup
Archive and Restore Module
This option is used to create backups of your database, and/or to restore your database from
one of these backup files. You either can choose to archive the entire database or select
specific tables for archiving. When restoring from a file, you can choose which specific
tables from the archives to restore into the current database.
The module acts on a database table-by-table basis. So, one select s the tables one wishes
to work with, and then chooses whether to ‘archive’ the tables to an external Microsoft
Access database file (i.e. a .mdb file), or to ‘Restore’ the selected tables from an external
Access file.
Figure 112 – IQ Central Archive and Restore module
As long as no significant database changes have occurred as part of an IQ Central update,
which is specified in the release notes for the update, the Archive and Restore module can
be used to back up your database information before the software update, and then it can
be used to restore the data back into your updated system.
225
226
Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization
IQ Central has historically been a user-customizable application that allowed a great deal of
freedom when it came to configuring the interface and the operation of its various modules.
As the application has evolved, however, Peek Traffic has attempted to steer the application
more toward a user-friendly interface and away from pure customizability.
Several of the customizing modules are still available within IQ Central, however it is
recommended that extensive customization of the application using these tools be avoided,
unless you are working with a qualified Peek Traffic customer service representative, and
you fully understand the impact that your changes will have on the rest of the program.
The tools that still remain within IQ Central to customize its operation are:
Icon Management - Used to set icons for modules within IQ Central. This should not be
confused with intersection icon management, which is handled using the traffic controller
map management tools.
BlockBuilder - Used to set up master block tables within the IQ Central database.
FormBuilder - Used to define and modify module window interfaces and link them to
items in the IQ Central database.
227
Device Icon Management
The Icon Management module is a simple interface for attaching graphical icons to key
functions within IQ Central. The module can be launched by going to the Tools menu,
choosing Advanced Options and then Icon Management, or by clicking on the Icon
Management icon (shown at right) in the System Maintenance toolbar.
It has the following controls:
Select Icon
Icon Name
Icon File Name
Icon Detail
Using this interface, you can perform the following functions:
Editing an Existing Icon
Adding a New Icon
Deleting an Icon
Linking an Icon to a type of device
Icons
You can specify the icons that are to be used in the map system. The system is installed
with standard icons, but you can customize these to suite your needs. You can use any .ico
file (size 32x32). To access the icon information, click on Icons from the Maps menu. You
can add new icons or you can delete or edit existing icons.
Adding an Icon
Deleting an Icon
Editing an Icon
Icon Name
Enter the name of the icon as it should appear in the Icon Names list when you access
icons in IQ Central. Select the icon you want to use from the drop down box, or choose to
Add a New Icon.
Icon File Name
The Icon File Name indicates the physical location of the saved Icon File on your computer’s
hard drive. You can enter the name and full path of the icon file or you can click on browse
to select the icon.
Highlight the .ico file that is to be added and click on the Open button. The file name and its
complete path will be stored in the Icon File Name field.
If you manually enter the path and file name in the Icon File Name field, you can click on the
Test Icon button to “test” that the path and file name that you entered is correct.
228
Icon Detail
If you choose to add a new Icon, or you just want to view the details for the Icon file
selected, click on the Icon Detail button. The following information will be displayed:
Icon Name
Icon Filename
To add a new Icon, enter the name of the Icon and then enter the filename (including its
path) in the filename field. If you do not know the full path and file name, click on the Browse
button to navigate to the directory that contains the Icon file that you want to use.
If you enter the file name manually, you can check that it is correct by clicking on the Test
Icon button. This will locate the Icon and display it sop that you can verify that the correct
Icon has been selected.
Click on Save to save the Icon to the database and have it allocated to the Device Type.
Editing an Icon
If you want to change the image that is being used as an icon, click on that icon from the
Icon Names drop-down list box. The current icon will be displayed. Browse to the new .ico
file that is to be used and select that file. The new picture will then be used. You will not be
able to use an icon file that is already being used. This will prevent any confusion about
what the icon actually represents when it is displayed on your map.
Creating an Icon from an Image File
If you do not have an appropriate .ico file and no software available for the creation of .ico
files, you can create one by opening any other type of graphic image in Windows Paint,
setting the image size to 32 x 32 pixels, and saving it as a bitmap file (.bmp), but before you
save it change the extension to .ico. If you do this, the image file will be useable by IQ
Central as a device or interface icon.
Adding an Icon
To add a new icon:
1.
Select Add a New Icon from the Icon Names drop-down list box.
2.
Enter the name that is to be used by the Map system to identify the icon.
3.
Enter either the full path and file name of the icon file, or click browse to locate the
icon file.
4.
Select the icon that you want to use and then click on the Open button.
Note
If you choose to enter the file and path name of the .ico file
(without using the browse button), you can check the icon
file by clicking on the Test Icon button.
229
230
5.
The icon that you have selected will be displayed on the form so that you can check
that you have selected the correct one.
6.
Once you have added the required information, click on Add to add the information
to the system.
Link Icon to Device Type Module
When you have added all the icons to the system (see Adding an Icon), you can link each
Device to a particular icon. To do this, select Link Icon to Device Type from the Map menu.
All the Device Types that are installed in the system will be displayed in the drop down list
box attached to the Device Types field. Select a Device and then double click that Device
Type in the list that is displayed. This will open the form to allow you to allocate an icon to
that Device Type.
Click on the Icon names drop down list box and all the available icons will be displayed.
Select the one that you want to use for the Device Type that is highlighted. That icon will
display next to the field so that you can check that it is the correct one. When you have
selected the correct one, click on the Link to Icon button to complete the process.
Note that you will not be permitted to allocate an icon to more than one Device Type. This
ensures that there is no confusion when the icons are placed on a map.
231
BlockBuilder & FormBuilder
Block Builder is a function that allows objects to be grouped into Manufacturer Specific Object Groups. It
facilitates the conformance of the uploading and downloading of object to and from controllers that operate
under legacy protocols.
FormBuilder is used to connect the blocks of a legacy controller to the display windows within IQ Central.
Users of IQ Central should never need to use BlockBuilder or FormBuilder.
BlockBuilder Module
The BlockBuilder module, which should only be used by advanced Administrators of an IQ
Central system, can be launched in a couple of ways:
Using the toolbar: Click on the
button, located on the Administration toolbar.
Through the menus: Go to the Tools menu and choose Advanced Options >
BlockBuilder.
With the keyboard shortcut: Just remember, its an alternate TAB: Hold down the ALT
key and press t, then a, then b.
Using the BlockBuilder Module
Block Builder is a function that allows objects to be grouped into Manufacturer Specific
Object Groups. It facilitates the conformance of the uploading and downloading of object to
and from controllers to legacy protocol.
FormBuilder Module
FormBuilder is an interface that allows IQ Central to be customized in the screens used to
interact with the IQ Central database. FormBuilder requires a detailed knowledge of the
underlying database structure and contents of the IQ Central database.
The FormBuilder module, which should only be used by advanced Administrators of an IQ
Central system, can be launched in a couple of ways:
Using the toolbar: Click on the
button, located on the Administration toolbar.
Through the menus: Go to the Tools menu and choose Advanced Options >
FormBuilder.
With the keyboard shortcut: Hold down the ALT key and press t, then a, then f.
Warning
232
BlockBuilder and FormBuilder should only be used by very advanced
users. It is not recommended for any operator of IQ Central without
the direct supervision of a Peek Traffic representative. Contact Peek
Traffic for more information on using the BlockBuilder module.
Glossary
1880EL
The model number of a Transyt brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
3000E
The model number of a Peek brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
3800EL
The model number of a Transyt brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
390CJ
The model number of a Traconex brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation. 'CJ' stands for
"Chris Johnson", a senior engineer from the old Traconex Corporation days, and now with Peek Traffic.
820A
The model number of a Multisonics brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
Actuated
Identifies a type of traffic controller which responds to calling signals generated by the actions of either
vehicles or pedestrians. See also Semi-actuated and Fully-actuated.
Adaptive Split Control
A means of intersection split selection based on vehicular activity.
Advance Call Detector
A detector located a considerable distance upstream from an intersection which calls the green to that
approach.
Advance Warning
A per-movement output used to give advance notice of an upcoming yellow or red indication. Typically used
at hidden intersections with “prepare to stop” indicators.
ASTC Controller
Advanced Solid State Traffic Controller: the name given to a controller design specified by New York City
DOT. This acronym was chosen to distinguish it from the more general ATC standards development program.
ATC Controller
Advanced Traffic Controller, a design developed per the ATC standards development program of the State
of California and the Federal Highway Administration. Requires the controller to have a separate engine
board and run the Linux operating system.
Auto/Manual Switch
A traffic cabinet switch which, when operated, discontinues normal signal operation and permits manual
operation.
Barrier
A logical term to describe a line of compatibility in a multi-ring intersection signal plan in which all rings are
interlocked. Barriers assure that there will be no concurrent selection and timing of conflicting phases for
traffic phases on different rings.
233
BIU
Bus Interface Unit, required to interface a TS-2, Type 1 traffic controller to any type of cabinet hardware.
Converts NEMA TS2-Type 1 EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data to cabinet discrete inputs and outputs.
Cabinet
An outdoor, weather-tight enclosure for housing controller units, master units, detector electronics and other
associated traffic control or monitoring equipment.
Call
The result of a detector or signal activation by either a pedestrian or a vehicle. A signal to the controller
indicating that a vehicle or pedestrian is present and is 'requesting' the right-of-way.
Connected
Connected and Disconnected are separate states than Online /Offline . A device is 'connected' if the
communications channel to that device has been opened on the IQ Central computer. A connected device
does not mean that any communications with the device have occurred, just that the channel has been
opened on the PC end.
CMU/MMU
Conflict Monitor Unit - Also known as an MMU (Multifunction Management Unit). This device monitors the
green, yellow, and red AC loadswitch outputs for conflicts, the absence of a proper red signal and the
watchdog signal from the controller. Any real and potential unsafe condition will force the intersection
controller into flash mode.
Device
In IQ Central, a 'device ' is any piece of hardware or software that the application manages using the NTCIP
communciations protocol. The pre-configured device types in IQ Central are message signs, traffic
controllers, master controllers, weather stations, RTMS sensors, and traffic cameras. But additional device
types can be created by the user.
Detector Failure
For traffic controller operation, this is a detector which fails to indicate that a vehicle is present when it is, or
fails to go off when a vehicle is absent. Types of failures include non-operation, chattering, and erroneous
signaling.
Dimming
This feature of some traffic controllers allows the brightness of selected non-LED traffic signal indicators to be
lowered during night time operation, typically by lowering the voltage applied to the output.
Disconnected
Connected and Disconnected are different states than Online /Offline . A device is 'disconnected' if the
communications channel to that device has been closed or lost on the IQ Central computer. Only connected
devices can also be 'online'.
Dual Entry
A mode of dual-ring traffic controller operation in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a Call
does not exist in a ring when the controller crosses the barrier to activate a phase within the ring, a phase is
selected in that ring to be activated in a predetermined manner.
EGB
234
Glossary
Extended Green Band
EP
End of Permissive
EPP
A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'End of Pedestrian Permissive'.
Flash Memory
Flash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory. The data stored in flash will be saved during long periods of
power outage. It is a variation of electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. (EEPROM)
FO
See 'Force Off'.
FOM
Fiber Optic Modem, a device that modulates a signal appropriately so it can be transmitted over fiber optic
cables.
Force Off
Action taken by an external source which generates a signal to the intersection controller, causing
termination to begin in the phase currently exhibiting the right-of-way. Used in Preemption and Coordinated
operation.
Fully Actuated
Identifies a type of intersection control in which every phase has a vehicle detection capability.
FSK
Frequency shift key, A form of digital frequency modulation employing discrete frequencies for specific
signals, for example for marking signals. The transmitter is changed from one frequency to another, keyed to
represent a different information character with each frequency.
GIS
Geographical Interface Systems - The attachment of geographical information (i.e. coordinates or GPS data)
to data points in a database.
Greenband Analysis
A method of analyzing the amount of green light time available in a set of coordinated traffic intersections.
Greenband
The time, in seconds, elapsed between the passing of the first vehicle and the last possible vehicle in a group
of vehicles moving in accordance with the designed speed of a progressive traffic control system.
235
HDLC Address
HDLC stands for "High-level Data Link Control," which is a group of protocols for transmitting synchronous
data packets between point-to-point nodes. In HDLC, data is organized into a frame. The HDLC level is above
the SNMP , NTCIP and STMP protocol layers, which means that the HDLC frames are what surround SNMP
(and NTCIP, and STMP) data transfers. The HDLC frame is synchronous and therefore counts on the
physical layer (e.g. TCP/IP, RS-232, etc.) to control clocking and synchronization of the transmission and
reception of frames. A numerical address is used by HDLC to direct these frames across the network to the
proper location.
Intersection
The location where two or more roadways meet or cross, or a Controller assigned to work in such a location.
Interval
A unit of time that is assigned to a certain controller behavior or signal output by a time-based (non-NEMA)
traffic controller.
IQ
The brand name for a line of traffic control equipment and software produced by Peek Traffic Corporation.
ITS
Intelligent transportation systems
Lead/Lag Operation
A feature of some traffic controllers which makes it possible to reverse the phase sequence on a phase-pair
basis. When the phase pairs (such as 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8) are reversed, the odd phase will lag the even phase
instead of leading it as it does in normal operation.
M3000
The model number of a Peek brand master traffic controller unit manufactured by Peek Traffic Corporation.
MAC Address
The unique numerical identifier for a physical device that is attached to the Internet. Stands for 'Media Access
Control' Address.
Maintenance Icon
There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQ Central: Maintenance Icons and Zoom Level
Icons . Maintenance Icons are used in device type drop-down lists, menus, and dialog boxes, as well as when
first placing a device on a map. There is only one maintenance icon associated with each type of device. The
icons assigned to device types can be edited in IQ Central using the commands under Tools >Advanced
Options.
Marginal
This is the online state for a device that is supposed to be online. A device is judged to have a marginal
communications state if IQ Central attempts to communicate with it, and fails, a set number of times.
MCE
A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Manual Control Enable'.
236
Glossary
MIB
A Management Information Base - A generic collection of information that has been organized heirarchically.
A MIB usually describes a network object so that it can be used with a generic communications protocol, such
as SNMP or NTCIP . Each bit of information in a MIB file has a unique object identifier which is identified
either by its object name or its object descriptor.
MIlitary Time
A method of indicating the time of day that is often used in the military. In this time-keeping method, the time
starts at midnight, indicated as 00:00, and proceeds to a time of 24:00 at the following midnight. Civilian time
can be converted to military time by adding 12 to the hour for any hour after noon. But since most of you
traffic industry guys are ex-military, you probably already know all this.
MMU
Malfunction Management Unit, See 'CMU/MMU'.
MOE
Methods of efficiency. In traffic control, this is a common method to assess the performance of a configured
intersection controller's operation.
MSCLR
A traffic controller screen display abbreviation standing for 'Main Street Clearance'.
Multisonics
A traffic equipment and software company owned by U.S. Traffic Corporation.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The industry group that has designed one of a couple of
competing standards for intelligent traffic control systems.
NTCIP
A standard communications protocol used to connect traffic support hardware and computers together in a
non-proprietary manner. It stands for 'National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol'. IQ Central is
designed as a central software system to communicate with any traffic hardware that speaks the NTCIP
protocol. A website at www.ntcip.org describes the protocol and its purpose. NTCIP is a specialized subset, or
specialized version, of the more generic SNMP communications protocol. NTCIP uses the same data
structures and methods as SNMP, including MIBs, Object Identifiers, and Object Names.
Object Identifier
Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name . An
object identifier uses a series of numbers (without any spaces or alphabetic characters) separated by periods,
to indicate the heirarchical placement of a piece of information. For example, a bit of data may have the object
identifier of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.3.3.1. Within a MIB file, the Object Identifier must be unique. An Object Identifier is
functionally equivalent to the alphanumeric Object Name which is assigned to the same bit of information.
237
Object Name
Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name . An
object name is an alphanumeric name with no spaces that indicates heirarchy by separating different domain
levels by periods. For example, an object name might be: device .devicetype.devicenumber.control.onoffswitch. An Object Name is functionally equivalent to the numeric object
identifier which is assigned to the same bit of information.
Offline
A device is considered offline if no logical communications are occurring between the device and IQ Central.
This could be caused by a user command to go 'Offline', by the device disconnecting, or by a problem that
shuts down the connection. A device can either be online , marginal , or offline.
OID
See 'Object Identifier'.
OLA
Overlap A (for example). A traffic controller screen abbreviation. Overlaps are typically identified with a
single letter identifier, hence Overlap A (OLA) through Overlap P (OLP) may appear in a controller interface.
Online
A device is considered online if it has an open connection and if logical communications have occurred
between the device and IQ Central. A device can either be online, marginal , or offline .
OSAM-32
The model number of a Multisonics brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
PA
Phase allocation
PE
A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Preemption'.
Peek Traffic
A traffic equipment and software company owned by Signal Group Corporation.
Preemption
An alternative interval timing plan for a traffic controller, typically triggered by a 'preemption input' being
signalled ON by emergency response or police personnel.
RCU
Remote Communications Unit - Used in some cities to interface a controller or another device to a coaxial
cable communications facility.
RGB
A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Reduced Green Band'.
ROM
Read Only Memory, hard written memory in a computer that is maintained even when power is removed.
Typically used to store basic OS code and firmware programs.
238
Glossary
SDLC
Synchronous Data Link Control
Semi-Actuated
Identifies a type of intersection control that has one or more phases that lack a vehicle detection capability.
Serial Interface
A device, which processes information one (1) bit at a time from the computer to a printer or another
peripheral unit.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol - A generic communications protocol used to allow intelligent network
devices to communicate with one another, and with network device management software. SNMP is part of
the well known TCP/IP protocol suite.
SPL
See 'Split'.
SP
Start Permissive period
Split
In a coordinated traffic system, each intersection in an artery must have the same cycle time. So instead of
set times for each phase, a coordinated intersection has a split assigned to each phase. A split is a
percentage of the total time available in the cycle.
STMP
Simple Transportation Management Protocol - A subset of the NTCIP protocol for simplified management and
communications between traffic equipment and software.
TBC
Time-based coordination. Indicates that coordination or plan selection is based upon the time of day using
an internal clock.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The most common pair of protocols used to send data
across an Ethernet or the Internet. Each component in such a system is assigned a unique IP address.
T/F
Terminal and Facilities
Time Reference Point
A point in time which serves as the start time or source time reference for an entire artery or region of traffic
flow. For example, in the timing diagram for a single street, each intersection has a time offset between the
start of its cycle and one arterial signal which serves as the Time Reference Signal. The start of the Green
time reference signal in this system is known as the Time Reference Point.
TOD
Time of Day
239
TMM-500
The model number of a Traconex brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
Traconex
A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
Transyt
A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
USB
Universal Serial Bus. A common computer peripheral interface.
US Traffic
A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
WRM
Walk Rest Modifier
Watchdog
A monitoring circuit external to a traffic controller which senses a controller output via the BIU. If no change
in state of this output is detected for a CMU-programmed amount of time (typically 1 second), this denotes a
controller unit error, at which point the CMU or MMU will put the intersection into FLASH mode.
Zoom Level Icons
There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQ Central: Maintenance Icons and Zoom Level
Icons . Zoom Level Icons are used only in map views, to show the current state of a device . There can be up
to five Zoom Level Icons associated with each type of device. The number assigned depends on the type of
device. Signs have five zoom level icons. Traffic controllers and cameras each have four zoom level icons.
Weather stations and sensors each have two zoom level icons. With the exception of traffic controllers, these
zoom level icons cannot be edited in IQ Central. The icons assigned to traffic controllers can be edited using
the GIS Zoom Levels command under the Maps menu.
240
#
1880EL: The model number of a Transyt brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
3000E: The model number of a Peek brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
3800EL: The model number of a Transyt brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic
Corporation.
390CJ: The model number of a Traconex brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
820A: The model number of a Multisonics brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.
A
Actuated: Identifies a type of controller which responds to calling signals generated by the actions of
either vehicles or pedestrians. See also Semi-actuated and Fully-actuated.
Adaptive Split Control: A means of intersection split selection based on vehicular activity.
Advance Call Detector: A detector located a considerable distance upstream from an intersection
which calls the green to that approach.
Advance Warning: A per-movement output used to give advance notice of an upcoming yellow or red
indication. Typically used at hidden intersections with "prepare to stop" indicators.
ASTC: Advanced Solid State Traffic Controller: the name given to a controller design specified by New
York City DOT. This acronym was chosen by Peek Traffic to distinguish it from the more general
ATC standards development program.
ATC: Advanced Traffic Controller, a design developed per the ATC standards development program of
the State of California and the Federal Highway Administration. Requires the controller to have a
separate engine board and run the Linux operating system.
Auto/Manual Switch: A traffic cabinet switch which, when operated, discontinues normal signal
operation and permits manual operation.
B
Back Panel: A board within a controller cabinet upon which are mounted field terminals, fuse
receptacles or circuit breakers, and other components of traffic controller operation not included in
the controller unit itself, or its ancillary devices. Such back panels are typically found in older traffic
control cabinets.
Backplane: A printed circuit connector interface board, typically with no active or passive components.
However, the use of passive components is accepted for most applications.
Barrier: A logical term to describe a line of compatibility in a multi-ring intersection signal plan in which
all rings are interlocked. Barriers assure that there will be no concurrent selection and timing of
conflicting phases for traffic phases on different rings.
Baud Rate: The data transfer rate of data transmission to a communications channel, usually expressed
in 'bits per second'.
BIU: Bus Interface Unit, required to interface a TS-2, Type 1 traffic controller to any type of cabinet
hardware. Converts NEMA TS2-Type 1 EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data to cabinet discrete inputs and
outputs.
BPS: Bits Per Second - a measure of data transmission speed
Buffer: A temporary storage location for data. The buffer accumulates backed up information for later
release. A device or section of memory used to compensate for differences in data transfer flow
speeds or variable latencies in a communications channel.
241
C
Cabinet: An outdoor, weather-tight enclosure for housing controller units, master units, detector
electronics and other associated traffic control or monitoring equipment.
Call: The result of a detector or signal activation by either a pedestrian or a vehicle. A signal to the
controller indicating that a vehicle or pedestrian is present and is 'requesting' the right-of-way.
Capacity: The maximum number of vehicles that can pass over a given lane or roadway during a given
period, under prevailing traffic conditions.
CBD: Central business district. The portion of a municipality in which the dominant land use is intense
business activity.
Channel: An information path from a discrete input to a discrete output.
Checksum: A numerical value that is calculated by applying a predefined algorithm to a set of data. It is
used to determine if a portion of memory or a message has been corrupted in any way.
Clearance Interval: The interval from the end of the right-of-way of one phase to the beginning of a
conflicting phase.
Closed-Loop System: A software and hardware system in which a computer controls an external
process using information received from the process. For example, the closed loop in a traffic
control system is from the computer to the controllers and then from the detectors back (through the
controller) to the computer.
CLR: Traffic controller screen abbreviation for 'Phase Clearance'. Includes Ped Clearance times for CNA
phases.
CMU/MMU: Conflict Monitor Unit - Also known as an MMU (Multifunction Management Unit). This device
monitors the green, yellow, and red AC loadswitch outputs for conflicts, the absence of a proper red
signal and the watchdog signal from the controller. Any real and potential unsafe condition will force
the intersection controller into flash mode.
CNA: Call to Non-Actuated. Provides a method of phase timing where vehicle and pedestrian detectors
are not required to serve the associated phases, with operation as defined by NEMA. An actuated
controller feature in which the associated phase will always serve the Walk plus Ped Clear time,
regardless of detector inputs.
Compatibility Line: In traffic intersection controller operations, this is the dividing line crossing both
rings (in dual ring operation) that separates compatible phase combinations. Usually, it divides
phases associated with North/South from those associated with East/West. Also known as the
'Barrier'.
Conditional Service: A dual-ring feature which allows re-service to an odd phase (i.e. a left turn phase)
once the opposite 'through' phase has gapped out. The service is conditional upon the time
remaining in the adjacent 'through' phase's Max timer.
Conflict Monitor: A device used to continually check for the presence of conflicting signal indications
coming from a traffic controller, and to provide an output in response to the conflict (usually All
Flash).
Conflicting Phases: Two or more traffic flows which would result in interfering traffic movements if
operated concurrently.
Connected: Connected and Disconnected are seperate states than Online/Offline. A device is
'connected' if the communications channel to that device has been opened on the IQCentral
computer. A connected device does not mean that any communications with the device have
occurred, just that the channel has been opened on the PC end.
Controller: A device which, through software and firmware programming, manages the sequence and
duration of traffic signals. Also, a device which manages the sequence and duration of variable
message sign messages.
242
Glossary
Coordination: Also known as 'COORD'. The state where two or more intersections are configured to
communicate with each other in order to time their signals in some manner that improves the
greater system performance, rather than being timed independently at each intersection. Such
independent operation, by contrast, is known as Free operation.
COTS: Commercial off the Shelf - standard product offering available for purchase from commercial
vendors.
CPU: Central Processing Unit - The chip that controls all computer operations and performs
computations. Also may refer to the entire physical unit housing the chip.
CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check. A form of checksum data verification used to verify the validity of
information transferred across a communications channel.
Critical Intersection: A selected, heavily traveled intersection within a coordinated traffic artery. (See
'Coordination') This intersection would be employed to dynamically control the split at other
intersections within the artery, based on its vehicle detector inputs.
CVM: Controller voltage monitor. An open collector output that is maintained 'low' by a traffic controller
as long as the internally generated operating voltages are within tolerances. This output is used by
a conflict monitor to place the intersection in Flash, should all voltages fail in the controller.
Cycle: The total time required to complete one complete set of signal states around an intersection. In
basic, pre-timed control, the cycle length is fixed. In actuated systems the cycle length can be
increased up to a predetermined maximum, based on the continued detection of vehicles. In a
coordinated system, the cycle of all connected intersections are monitored continuously and
adjusted as needed to maintain the coordinated plan.
Cycle Zero Point: See 'Time Reference Point'
D
Database: Traffic controllers and central system software (such as IQCentral) typically uses two
distinctly different meanings for the term 'database'. The first is the typical one used in most
computer systems: a central system stores and maintains all of the information it gathers from the
field about all connected devices in a set of database files on the central computer. The second
meaning of database pertains only to traffic controllers. This meaning of 'database' is defined as the
complete set of operating parameters stored in a single traffic controller or master controller.
Density: A measure of the concentration of vehicles in an intersection, stated as the number of vehicles
per mile (space density) or as the flow volume divided by the average speed (point density.)
Detection Zone: The area of the roadway in which a vehicle will be detected by a vehicle detector.
Detector: A device that senses the presence or absence of a vehicle in a particular area (the Detection
Zone). Vehicle detection methods include inductance detecting loops (the most common type),
piezo pressure sensors, light beam sensors, radio ID sensors, air tube sensors, and mechanical
switches.
Detector Failure: A detector which fails to indicate that vehicle is present when it is, or fails to go off
when a vehicle is absent. Types of failures include non-operation, chattering, and erroneous
signaling.
Detector Memory: A feature of some controllers in which the actuation of a detector is retained in
memory until the corresponding phase is serviced.
Device: In IQCentral, a 'device' is any piece of hardware or software that the application manages using
the NTCIP communciations protocol. The pre-configured device types in IQCentral are message
signs, traffic controllers, master controllers, weather stations, RTMS sensors, and traffic cameras.
But additional device types can be created by the user.
Dimming: This feature of some controllers allows the brightness of selected traffic signal indicators to be
lowered during night time operation, typically by lowering the voltage applied to the output.
243
Disconnected: Connected and Disconnected are different states than Online/Offline. A device is
'disconnected' if the communications channel to that device has been closed or lost on the
IQCentral computer. Only connected devices can also be 'online'.
DLL: A dynamically linked library file. In the Windows environment, programs store data, graphics, and
other resources in these linked libraries. IQCentral, TOPS, IQ-Link and most other Windows
applications use them.
Dual Entry: A mode of dual-ring operation in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a Call
does not exist in a ring when the controller crosses the barrier to activate a phase within the ring, a
phase is selected in that ring to be activated in a predetermined manner.
Duplex: Two-way communications over a single communications link.
E
EEPROM: Electronically erasable/programmable read-only memory, the programmable memory storage
area in many traffic control components.
EGB: Extended Green Band
EP: A traffic controller display screen abbreviation for 'End of Permissive'.
EPP: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'End of Pedestrian Permissive'.
EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (typically using UV light to erase)
F
Flash Memory: Flash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory. The data stored in flash will be saved
during long periods of power outage. It is a variation of electrically erasable programmable readonly memory. (EEPROM)
FO: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Force Off'.
FOM: Fiber Optic Modem, a device that modulates a signal appropriately so it can be transmitted over
fiber optic cables.
Force Off: Action taken by an external source which generates a signal to the intersection controller,
causing termination to begin in the phase currently exhibiting the right-of-way. Used in Preemption
and Coordinated operation.
FSK: Frequency shift key, A form of digital frequency modulation employing discrete frequencies for
specific signals, for example for marking signals. The transmitter is changed from one frequency to
another, keyed to represent a different information character with each frequency.
Fully-Actuated: Identifies a type of intersection control in which every phase has a vehicle detector
input capability.
G
GIS: Geographical Interface Systems - The attachment of geographical information (i.e. coordinates or
GPS data) to data points in a database.
Green Band: The time, in seconds, elapsed between the passing of the first vehicle and the last
possible vehicle in a group of vehicles moving in accordance with the designed speed of a
progressive traffic control system.
Greenband Analysis: A method of analyzing the amount of green light time available in a set of
coordinated traffic intersections.
244
Glossary
H
HDLC Address: HDLC stands for "High-level Data Link Control" which is a group of protocols for
transmitting synchronous data packets between point-to-point nodes. In HDLC, data is organized
into a frame. The HDLC level is above the SNMP, NTCIP and STMP protocol layers, which means
that the HDLC frames are what surround SNMP (and NTCIP, and STMP) data transfers. The HDLC
frame is synchronous and therefore counts on the physical layer (e.g. TCP/IP, RS-232, etc.) to
control clocking and synchronization of the transmission and reception of frames. A numerical
address is used by HDLC to direct these frames across the network to the proper location.
I
Intersection: The location where two or more roadways meet or cross, or a Controller assigned to work
in such a location.
Interval: A unit of time that is assigned to a certain controller behavior or signal output by a time-based
(non-NEMA) traffic controller.
IQ: The brand name for a line of traffic control equipment and software produced by Peek Traffic
Corporation.
ITS: Intelligent transportation systems
L
Lead/Lag Operation: A feature of some traffic controllers which makes it possible to reverse the phase
sequence on a phase-pair basis. When the phase pairs (such as 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8) are reversed,
the odd phase will lag the even phase instead of leading it as it does in normal operation.
M
M3000: The model number of a Peek brand master traffic controller unit manufactured by Peek Traffic
Corporation.
MAC Address: The unique numerical identifier for a physical device that is attached to the Internet.
Stands for 'Media Access Control' Address.
Maintenance Icon: There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQCentral:
MaintenanceIcons and Zoom Level Icons. Maintenance Icons are used in device type drop-down
lists, menus, and dialog boxes, as well as when first placing a device on a map. There isonly one
maintenance icon associated with each type of device. The icons assignedto device types can be
edited in IQCentral using the commands under Tools >AdvancedOptions.
Marginal: This is the online state for a device that is supposed to be online. A device is judged to have a
marginal communications state if IQCentral attempts to communicate with it, and fails, a set number
of times.
MCE: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Manual Control Enable'.
MIB: A Management Information Base - A generic collection of information that has been organized
heirarchically. A MIB usually describes a network object so that it can be used with a generic
communications protocol, such as SNMP or NTCIP. Each bit of information in a MIB file has a
unique object identifier which is identified either by its object name or its object descriptor.
Military Time: A method of indicating the time of day that is often used in the military. In this timekeeping method, the time starts at midnight, indicated as 00:00, and proceeds to a time of 24:00 at
the following midnight. Civilian time can be converted to military time by adding 12 to the hour for
any hour after noon. But since most of you traffic industry guys are ex-military, you probably already
know all this.
245
MMU: Malfunction Management Unit, See 'CMU/MMU'.
Module: A functional unit that plugs into an assembly. In the IQCentral environment, a module is a piece
of software that makes up a functional component of the entire IQCentral system.
MOE: Methods of efficiency. In traffic control, this is a common method to assess the performance of a
configured intersection controller's operation.
MSCLR: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation standing for 'Main Street Clearance'.
Multisonics: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
N
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The industry group that has designed one of a
couple of competing standards for intelligent traffic control systems.
NTCIP: A standard communications protocol used to connect traffic support hardware and computers
together in a non-proprietary manner. It stands for 'National Transportation Communications for ITS
Protocol'. IQCentral is designed as a central software system to communicate with any traffic
hardware that speaks the NTCIP protocol. A website at www.ntcip.org describes the protocol and
its purpose. NTCIP is a specialized subset, or specialized version, of the more generic SNMP
communications protocol. NTCIP uses the same data structures and methods as SNMP, including
MIBs, Object Identifiers, and Object Names.
O
Object Identifier: Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or
its object name. An object identifier uses a series of numbers (without any spaces or alphabetic
characters) separated by periods, to indicate the heirarchical placement of a piece of information.
For example, a bit of data may have the object identifier of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.3.3.1. Within a MIB file, the
Object Identifier must be unique. An Object Identifier is functionally equivalent to the alphanumeric
Object Name which is assigned to the same bit of information.
Object Name: Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its
object name. An object name is an alphanumeric name with no spaces that indicates heirarchy by
separating different domain levels by periods. For example, an object name might be:
device.device-type.devicenumber.control.onoffswitch. An Object Name is functionally equivalent to
the numeric object identifier which is assigned to the same bit of information.
Offline: A device is considered offline if no logical communications are occurring between the device
and IQCentral. This could be caused by a user command to go 'Offline', by the device
disconnecting, or by a problem that shuts down the connection. A device can either be online,
marginal, or offline.
OID: See 'Object Identifier'.
OLA: Overlap A (for example). A traffic controller screen abbreviation. Overlaps are typically identified
with a single letter identifier, hence Overlap A (OLA) through Overlap P (OLP) may appear in a
controller interface.
Online: A device is considered online if it has an open connection and if logical communications have
occurred between the device and IQCentral. A device can either be online, marginal, or offline.
OSAM-32: The model number of a Multisonics brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic
Corporation.
P
PA: Phase allocation
246
Glossary
PE: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Preemption'.
Peek Traffic: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Signal Group Corporation.
Preemption: An alternative interval timing plan for a traffic controller, typically triggered by a 'preemption
input' being signalled ON by emergency response or police personnel.
R
RCU: Remote Communications Unit - Used in some cities to interface a controller or another device to a
coaxial cable communications facility.
RGB: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Reduced Green Band'.
ROM: Read Only Memory, hard written memory in a computer that is maintained even when power is
removed. Typically used to store basic OS code and firmware programs.
S
SDLC: Synchronous Data Link Control
Semi-Actuated: Identifies a type of intersection control that has one or more phases that lack a vehicle
detector input capability.
Serial Interface: A device, which processes information one (1) bit at a time from the computer to a
printer or another peripheral unit.
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol - A generic communications protocol used to allow
intelligent network devices to communicate with one another, and with network device management
software. SNMP is part of the well known TCP/IP protocol suite.
SP: Start Permissive Period
SPL: See 'Split'.
Split: In a coordinated traffic system, each intersection in an artery must have the same cycle time. So
instead of set times for each phase, a coordinated intersection has a split assigned to each phase.
A split is a percentage of the total time available in the cycle.
STMP: Simple Transportation Management Protocol - A subset of the NTCIP protocol for simplified
management and communications between traffic equipment and software.
T
T/F: Terminal and Facilities
TBC: Time-based coordination. Indicates that coordination or plan selection is based upon the time of
day using an internal clock.
TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The most common pair of protocols used to
send data across an Ethernet or the Internet. Each component in such a system is assigned a
unique IP address.
Time Reference Point: A point in time which serves as the time reference for an entire artery or region
of traffic flow. For example, in the timing diagram for a single street, each intersection has a time
offset between the start of its cycle and one arterial signal which serves as the Time Reference
Signal. The start of the Green time reference signal in this system is known as the Time Reference
Point.
TMM-500: The model number of a Traconex brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic
Corporation.
TOD: Time of Day
247
Traconex: A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
Transyt: A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
U
US Traffic: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.
USB: Universal Serial Bus. A common computer peripheral interface.
W
Watchdog: A monitoring circuit external to a traffic controller which senses a controller output via the
BIU. If no change in state of this output is detected for a CMU-programmed amount of time
(typically 1 second), this denotes a controller unit error, at which point the CMU or MMU will put the
intersection into FLASH mode.
WRM: Walk Rest Modifier
Z
Zoom Level Icons: There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQCentral:
MaintenanceIcons and Zoom Level Icons. Zoom Level Icons are used only in map views, to
showthe current state of a device. There can be up to five Zoom Level Icons associatedwith each
type of device. The number assigned depends on the type of device. Signshave five zoom level
icons. Traffic controllers and cameras each have four zoom levelicons. Weather stations and
sensors each have two zoom level icons. With the exceptionof traffic controllers, these zoom level
icons cannot be edited in IQCentral. Theicons assigned to traffic controllers can be edited using the
GIS Zoom Levels commandunder the Maps menu.
248
Index
1
1.2MB ................................................................. 5
100
WidthTo...................................................... 134
6
675kb .................................................................. 5
6am on Monday morning ........................ 118, 176
100.................................................................. 134
8
150.................................................................... 50
820A.......................................................... 56, 233
175kb .................................................................. 5
180kb .................................................................. 5
820A Controller
Parameter Fields .......................................... 56
1880EL ..................................................... 80, 233
820A Controller ................................................. 56
1880EL Controller............................................. 80
820A OSAM ...................................................... 56
195kb .................................................................. 5
A
1st Interval ........................................................ 65
About....................................................... 131, 153
3
About IQCentral .......................... 10, 34, 131, 153
3000E ............................................................. 233
About window
Shows..................................................... 10, 34
3000E Controller
About window.................................................... 10
3000E Controller............................................... 65
Absence ............................................................ 65
3000E TS2
working ....................................................... 165
AC loadswitch ......................................... 234, 237
3000E TS2...................................................... 165
Accept ............................... 92, 101, 145, 178, 184
300kb .................................................................. 5
32pm............................................................... 184
Access
Device......................................................... 159
32x32 .............................................................. 228
Access............................................................. 159
353kb .................................................................. 5
Access............................................................. 218
3800EL ................................................. 5, 80, 233
Access Level Module's MDI list....................... 218
3800EL Master
Access Levels
Changing .................................................... 218
Opens ........................................................... 10
3800EL Master ................................................. 80
3800EL Master ................................................. 80
390CJ ....................................................... 80, 233
390CJ Controller
390CJ Controller............................................... 80
3rd Sheet ........................................................ 124
Accant ............................................................... 33
Access Levels ................................................... 10
Access Levels Module ............................ 122, 218
Accessible ....................................... 138, 202, 218
Account 1, 4, 8, 10, 19, 22, 25, 34, 101, 134, 205,
211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 218
Acknowledge........................... 189, 195, 200, 202
Acknowledge Alarm ........................................ 200
5
Acknowledge incoming alarms........................ 202
5.1MB ................................................................. 5
Action Column................................................. 124
50 56
Activate button ........................................ 128, 129
5-Section Prot ................................................... 56
Activate Message.................................... 114, 124
Activate Schedule ................................... 118, 176
249
Activating
Amber Alert......................................... 127, 128
Remove button ........................................... 212
Scenario...................................................... 127
Activating......................................................... 127
Activation
Indicate ....................................................... 129
Add/Edit .............................................................10
Add/Edit Device Window ...................................39
Add/Edit Layer Groups
Opens ...........................................................10
Add/Edit Layer Groups ......................................10
Add/Remove....................................................178
Activation....................... 4, 83, 113, 118, 124, 127
Added Initial.................................................65, 76
Activation Priority ............................................ 129
Added Initial Calculation ....................................76
Active ...10, 29, 36, 56, 65, 92, 95, 124, 139, 178,
186, 195, 197, 200, 216, 223
Add-Edit.............................................................39
Active Circuits ................................................... 65
Adding
Device ...........................................................39
Active Memory ............................................ 92, 95
Adding ...............................................................39
Active SF........................................................... 56
Adding Zoom Areas
BMP Maps ..................................................138
Active Sp Function Circuits ............................... 56
ActiveX Type ................................................... 169
Activity ..36, 56, 76, 128, 129, 157, 158, 205, 207,
233
Activity Log...................................................... 128
Activity window................................................ 129
Actuated ................ 56, 76, 85, 165, 233, 235, 239
Actuation ........................................................... 65
Adaptive Split Control...................................... 233
Add Connection................................................. 45
Add Connection Button ..................................... 45
Add Device........................................................ 39
Add Device button
pressing ........................................................ 39
Adding Zoom Areas.........................................138
Address
number ........................................................104
Address ...........................................38, 39, 56, 65
Adjust...........................65, 85, 105, 143, 165, 239
Adjust MX3 ........................................................65
Administration
allows ..........................................................215
delete ..........................................................211
remaining ....................................................212
Administration............................................21, 134
Administration Level ................211, 212, 213, 215
Administration toolbar......................................232
Administration User .................................211, 214
Add Device button............................................. 39
Administrative ....................................10, 212, 216
Add New..........34, 38, 39, 45, 104, 184, 212, 228
Administrator Community ................................122
Add New Device...................... 10, 34, 38, 39, 104
Administrators
IQCentral.....................................................232
Add New Task
choosing ..................................................... 184
Add New Task ................................................. 184
Add Object
List button ................................................... 172
Administrators.......8, 33, 101, 122, 129, 157, 158,
212, 214, 216, 218
Administrators..................................................232
Adobe® Photoshop®.......................................139
Add Object ...................................................... 172
Advance Call Detector.....................................233
Add Task dialog
Open ........................................................... 184
Advance Warning ............................................233
Add Task dialog .............................................. 184
Add/Delete .......................... 10, 34, 212, 213, 214
Add/Delete Users .............................................. 34
Add/Edit
Opens ........................................................... 10
250
Advance Warning Logic.....................................65
Advanced......5, 10, 34, 36, 55, 65, 104, 107, 110,
111, 152, 232, 233, 236
Advanced button
Clicking .......................................................110
Advanced button..............................................110
Index
Advanced Options .................... 10, 152, 232, 236
Alarm Status Module....................................... 195
Advanced Options submenu
open ........................................................... 104
Alarm Status Window
Using .......................................................... 195
Advanced Options submenu........................... 104
Alarm Status Window........................................ 29
Advanced Screen ................................... 110, 111
Alarm System Settings.................................... 202
Advanced Sign Message Edit......................... 110
Alarm Viewer........................................... 165, 200
Advanced Traffic............................................. 233
AlarmGroupState.2 ........................................... 86
AdvancedOptions ........................................... 236
Alarms Display ................................................ 190
Alarm
Handling ..................................................... 200
point ........................................................... 165
Alarms System
Configuring ................................................. 202
Alarms System ........ 1, 5, 165, 189, 190, 197, 200
Alarm . 1, 5, 10, 26, 29, 34, 37, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52,
76, 83, 86, 90, 159, 161
Alarms System ................................................ 202
Alarm .............................................................. 216
Alarms System Settings window
leave ........................................................... 202
Alarm Condition
Deleting ...................................................... 197
Alarms System Settings window ..................... 202
Alarm Condition .............................. 161, 190, 195
Alarm Condition .............................................. 197
Alarm Configuration Interface ......................... 190
Alarm Configuration window
Launching................................................... 190
Using .......................................................... 190
Alarm Configuration window ........................... 190
Alarm Configure.............................................. 190
Alarms window .................................................. 50
All
objects ........................................................ 168
release notes .................................................. 5
All Alarms ........................................................ 190
All Alarms Display ........................................... 190
All Configured User Accounts ......................... 122
All Currently Logged-on Users ........................ 122
Alarm Details
Viewing......................................................... 29
All Devices
set............................................................... 169
Status ........................................................... 42
Alarm Details .................................................... 29
All Devices ........................................................ 42
Alarm History Viewer ................................ 10, 195
All Flash .......................................................... 234
Alarm icon
inserts........................................................... 86
All Pages ..................................................... 97, 98
Alarm icon blinks............................................. 197
Alarm Parameters
Opening...................................................... 202
Alarm Parameters........................................... 202
Alarm Parameters window
open ........................................................... 202
Alarm Parameters window.............................. 202
Alarm Processing service ............................... 216
Alarm Statistics
Icon .............................................................. 29
Alarm Statistics ................................................. 29
Alarm Status icon................ 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33
Alarm Status Interface .................................... 195
Alarm Status Module
Launching................................................... 195
All polling......................................................... 175
Allocate
Device Type................................................ 229
Allocate ........................... 118, 129, 152, 176, 218
AllowDuplicates............................................... 134
Allows
Administration............................................. 215
IQCentral ...................................................... 53
oeprator ...................................................... 110
Allows.............. 1, 5, 10, 34, 36, 37, 40, 43, 45, 46
Allows................................................................ 53
Allows copying .................................................. 99
Allows SNMP .................................................. 107
ALT key ........................................................... 232
Alt-D
pressing ........................................................ 39
251
Alt-D .................................................................. 39
Alt-T,L,s .............................................................34
Alt-D,c,b ............................................................ 34
Alt-T,u,a .............................................................34
Alt-D,c,c............................................................. 34
Alt-T,u,c .............................................................34
Alt-D,c,v............................................................. 34
Alt-T,u,L .............................................................34
Alt-D,i,u ............................................................. 34
Alt-T,u,p .............................................................34
Alt-D,m,a ........................................................... 34
Alt-T,v ................................................................34
Alt-D,m,b ........................................................... 34
Alt-V,i .................................................................34
Alt-D,m,c ........................................................... 34
Alt-V,m...............................................................34
Alt-D,m,e ........................................................... 34
Alt-V,r.................................................................34
Alt-D,m,f ............................................................ 34
Alt-V,s ................................................................34
Alt-D,m,m .......................................................... 34
Alt-V,t.................................................................34
Alt-D,m,o ........................................................... 34
Alt-V,u................................................................34
Alt-D,m,s ........................................................... 34
Alt-w.............................................................15, 34
Alt-D,n ............................................................... 34
Alt-W key
pressing ........................................................34
Alternate Flash .................................................. 65
Alternatively............................................. 101, 109
Alt-F,L................................................................ 34
Alt-F,O ............................................................... 34
Alt-F,p................................................................ 34
Alt-F,x ................................................................ 34
Alt-F4............................................................. 9, 34
Alt-H,a ............................................................... 34
Alt-H,i ................................................................ 34
Alt-m ................................................................ 153
Alt-M,g ............................................................... 34
Alt-M,i ................................................................ 34
Alt-M,L ............................................................... 34
Alt-M,o,d ............................................................ 34
Alt-M,o,m ........................................................... 34
Alt-M,o,r............................................................. 34
Alt-M,p ............................................................... 34
Alt-M,z ............................................................... 34
Alt-T,a,b............................................................. 34
Alt-T,a,f.............................................................. 34
Alt-T,a,i .............................................................. 34
Alt-T,a,L............................................................. 34
Alt-W key ...........................................................34
Alt-w,1................................................................33
AM .......................................................................1
AMBER..............................................................34
Amber Alert Administration..............................127
Amber Alert button
Press ...........................................................127
Amber Alert button...........................................127
Amber Alerts
Activating ............................................127, 128
Creating ......................................................128
Verify ...........................................................128
Amber Alerts............................................1, 10, 34
Amber Alerts....................................................127
Amber Alerts....................................................128
Amber Alerts....................................................129
Amber Alerts....................................................129
Amber Alerts Module .......................................127
An Activate Message.......................................114
An Overview ..................................1, 10, 128, 129
AND ...................................95, 165, 175, 190, 209
And Not Accessible .........................................218
Alt-T,a,t.............................................................. 34
Another
Zoom level display ........................................81
Alt-T,c ................................................................ 34
Another ........................................9, 10, 15, 33, 43
Alt-T,d................................................................ 34
Another during .................................................202
Alt-T,L,d............................................................. 34
Another set
data .............................................................165
Alt-T,L,e............................................................. 34
252
Index
Another set ..................................................... 165
ASTC........................................................... 5, 233
Anti-Backup Phases ......................................... 56
ASTC Controller .............................................. 233
Any set
fonts ........................................................... 117
ATC Controller ................................................ 233
Any set............................................................ 117
Attempt....... 15, 36, 42, 43, 47, 88, 114, 152, 161,
165, 175, 200, 212, 227, 234, 236, 238
Appear ... 1, 10, 14, 15, 20, 28, 29, 33, 36, 39, 53,
81, 83, 85, 86, 92, 95, 104, 107, 110, 122,
129, 137, 139, 143, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150,
152, 153, 160, 163, 165, 182, 184, 185, 195,
197, 202, 209, 212, 213, 216, 223, 228, 238
Attempt succeed ............................................. 175
Appearance
Changing ...................................................... 85
Auto Populate Polling
IQCentral ...................................................... 81
Appearance .................................................. 1, 81
Auto Populate Polling........................................ 81
Application manages ..... 1, 10, 46, 101, 161, 175,
229
Auto Populate Polling........................................ 88
Apply button.................................................... 218
Audio Settings ................................................. 202
Auto................... 56, 65, 76, 81, 88, 165, 195, 200
Auto Perm ......................................................... 65
Auto Populate Polling button............................. 88
Applying
Report Filters.............................................. 205
Auto Populate Polling tool
choosing ............................................... 88, 136
Device Specific ............................................. 81
Applying .......................................................... 205
Auto Populate Polling tool ................................. 81
April 2007............................................................ 5
Auto Refresh ........................................... 195, 200
Archive............................................................ 225
Auto Refresh checkbox
check .......................................................... 200
Archive’
tables.......................................................... 225
Auto Refresh checkbox ................................... 200
Archive’ ........................................................... 225
Auto/Manual Switch ........................................ 233
Arial................................................................. 134
Automatic .............. 1, 5, 36, 86, 88, 107, 114, 136
AriAndrews ..................................................... 212
Around .............................................................. 56
Automatic Incident
use.................................................................. 1
As
Automatic Incident Management ................ 1, 107
data .............................................................. 99
name .......................................................... 202
As 149
ASC .................................................................. 76
Assign
Device .......................................................... 37
Automatic Log Off ......................................... 9, 36
AutoNumber .................................................... 134
Available Icon.................................................... 83
Available Log Table Columns ......................... 124
Avg Vehicle Length ........................................... 56
Assign ................................................... 10, 22, 34
B
Assign blocks
data .............................................................. 10
Back Color....................................................... 202
Assign blocks.................................................... 10
Assign Peds 1-16.............................................. 65
Assignedto ...................................................... 236
Assistant
Polling ........................................................ 163
Backup .................................... 1, 56, 76, 221, 225
Backup Clock Bad............................................. 56
Bad Coordination Plan ...................................... 56
Banded.................................................... 157, 158
Barrier ..................................................... 233, 234
Assistant ......................................................... 163
Base ................................................................ 172
Assistant ......................................................... 165
Base OID......................................................... 172
Associated 2nd Loop ........................................ 56
Basic ...... 5, 26, 33, 65, 81, 85, 92, 110, 131, 137,
165, 172, 189, 190, 208, 209, 238, 239
253
Basic Export .................................................... 208
BMP Map Management...................................137
Basic Reports .................................................. 208
BMP Map Viewer.............................................157
Basic Steps
Set Up........................................................... 81
BMP Map Viewer Interface..............................157
Basic Steps ....................................................... 81
Batch Update
Performing .......................... 163, 165, 168, 169
BMP Map Views ..............................................131
BMP Maps
Adding Zoom Areas ....................................138
BMP Maps .....................................1, 20, 134, 137
Batch Update .................................................. 163
Both Places .......................................................95
Batch Update button ....................................... 168
Bottom ..7, 15, 26, 39, 45, 47, 48, 86, 92, 98, 121,
134, 145, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158,
165, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 212, 216
Batch Update dialog
open............................................................ 168
Baud Rate Divisor ............................................. 56
Box .....10, 30, 36, 38, 48, 51, 55, 86, 88, 92, 109,
111, 114, 116, 117, 120, 143, 144, 145, 146,
148, 149, 150, 152, 165, 168, 184, 186, 197,
202, 205, 209, 212, 213, 218, 224, 228, 229,
231, 236
Beacon Type ................................................... 113
Box asking .........................................................36
Below, At ........................................................... 86
Brightness........................................................117
Between Controllers .......................................... 99
Brightness Control 10, 23, 34, 107, 109, 113, 117,
118, 120, 121, 176
Batch Update dialog........................................ 168
Baud Rate ................................................... 56, 65
Baud Rate Div ................................................... 56
Between Loops ................................................. 56
Between Open Modules
Switching ...................................................... 15
Brightness Control Module ........................34, 117
Browse...............85, 138, 178, 186, 202, 228, 229
Between Open Modules .................................... 15
Browse window..................................................85
Bitmap file ....................................... 137, 138, 229
Browser .............................................................34
Bitmapped ....................................................... 138
Build 1843............................................................1
Bitmapped file ................................................. 138
Build 2116............................................................1
BIU .............................................. 65, 76, 234, 240
Bulk
Opens ...........................................................10
Blank ............................................................... 128
Blank Sign ....................................................... 128
Blankdefault.bmp ............................................ 137
Bulk....................................................................10
Bulk..................................................................116
Block 98
transmitting ................................................... 92
Bulk Operations
Opens ...........................................................10
part ..............................................................114
Block 98 ............................................................ 92
Bulk Operations .................................................10
Block Builder ................................................... 232
Bus Interface Unit ....................................234, 240
BlockBuilder ................................ 10, 34, 227, 232
Button
If ..................................................................113
BlockBuilder Module
Launching ................................................... 232
Using........................................................... 232
Buttons
Standard Toolbar ..........................................19
BlockBuilder Module ....................................... 232
By Devices.................10, 37, 38, 48, 51, 163, 190
BlockBuilder Module ....................................... 232
By Group ...................................................48, 190
Bmp file ........................................................... 138
By Type .......................................48, 51, 190, 197
BMP Map Data
Loading ....................................................... 137
C
BMP Map Data ................................................ 137
Cabinet ..............................................56, 234, 240
254
Index
Cabinet Door Opened....................................... 56
Caution - Using ............................................... 163
Calculation ........................................ 76, 123, 124
Caution - Using ............................................... 165
Called
IQCentral Scheduler................................... 161
which responds .......................................... 233
CDPD Mode ...................................................... 45
Called47, 56, 65, 76, 88, 117, 124, 134, 137, 138,
143, 146, 152
Cells .................................................................. 98
Central Access Database ............................... 221
Central application-wide.................................... 10
Camera 1, 5, 9, 10, 24, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46,
81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 103,
104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122,
124, 127, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158,
159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176,
184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,
239, 240
Central Archive................................................ 225
Camera Browser Module .................................. 34
Central Help System ......................................... 34
Camera Control Module.................................. 105
Central INSTALLATION INOPERABLE .......... 221
Camera Management ................................. 1, 103
Central judges
status .......................................................... 171
Camera NTCIP ............................................... 104
Camera Preset................................................ 124
Camera Toolbar................................................ 24
Central Customization................................. 1, 227
Central database............................................... 98
Central focus ..................................................... 34
Central Help .................................................. 1, 19
Central judges ................................................. 171
Central login/logout ......................................... 205
Camera Video Configuration ............................ 10
Central Override
access ........................................................ 216
Performing .................................................... 53
Traffic Controllers ....................................... 101
Camera Video Configuration ............................ 34
Central Override........................................ 1, 5, 47
Camera-NTCIP ....................................... 103, 104
Central Override window................................. 101
Camera-NTCIP Device
Creating...................................................... 104
Central Port ....................................................... 65
Camera-NTCIP Device ................................... 104
Central synchronizes......................................... 32
Cameras > Browser ................ 10, 24, 25, 34, 103
Central v1.1..................................................... 216
Cameras > Video Connections ......................... 10
Central v1.6....................................................... 53
Cancel
Pressing ....................................................... 92
Central Version 1.7 ............................................. 1
Camera Video Configuration
Opens........................................................... 10
Cancel button
Choose ....................................................... 165
Cancel button.................................................... 92
Cancel button.................................................. 165
Cars Before Red ............................................... 76
Cascade............................................................ 15
Cascaded Windows .................................... 15, 34
Causes..... 1, 26, 42, 46, 118, 122, 139, 149, 175,
176, 189, 202, 216, 223, 224, 234, 235, 236,
238
Central Scheduler ........................................... 178
Central-software.............................................. 101
Change button
Press .......................................................... 213
Change button................................. 184, 185, 186
Change button................................................. 213
Change Password dialog ................................ 213
Change setting ................................................ 178
Changeable
clicking........................................................ 109
Changeable..................................................... 109
Caution - Before.............................................. 197
Changeable..................................................... 114
Caution - Before proceeding........................... 197
Changeable..................................................... 118
Caution - Using
Polling Assistant......................................... 165
Changeable..................................................... 176
Changing Device Types .................................... 46
255
Channel Assignments ....................................... 76
Close – This.....................................................163
Channel Setup .................................................. 76
Close button
press ...........................................................153
Chapter ....1, 7, 29, 30, 32, 37, 53, 103, 107, 123,
127, 131, 161, 171, 189, 195, 205, 211, 221,
227
Close button ................................................48, 99
Close button ....................................................153
Chapter 10 ............................................ 1, 32, 161
Close button ....................................................172
Chapter 10 - Polling .................................... 1, 161
Close button ....................................................214
Chapter 11 ............................................ 1, 29, 189
Close Excel......................................................124
Chapter 11 - Alarm Monitoring ............................ 1
Close Microsoft Access ...................................134
Chapter 12 - Reports................................... 1, 205
Closed polling interval .....................................168
Chapter 13 - User Management.................. 1, 211
Chapter 14 - Database Maintenance .......... 1, 221
CMU
point ....................................................234, 240
Chapter 15 - IQCentral Customization ........ 1, 227
CMU ................................................................234
Character Height ............................................. 113
CMU ................................................................240
Character Width .............................................. 113
CMU/MMU.......................................234, 237, 240
Check
Auto Refresh checkbox............................... 200
CMU-programmed
detected ..............................................234, 240
Check .1, 10, 48, 51, 65, 86, 90, 92, 99, 109, 113,
116, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 165, 174,
176, 184
CMU-programmed...........................................234
Checkboxes ............................................ 124, 184
CMU-programmed...........................................240
CNA ...................................................................65
Choose 'MDI.................................................... 218
Color
pushing .......................................................149
Choose No ........................................ 48, 163, 212
Color ....................10, 83, 85, 90, 92, 95, 143, 148
Chris Johnson ................................................. 233
Color ................................................................149
Christmas .......................................................... 56
Color ................................................................195
Christmas Day................................................... 56
Color ................................................................202
Christmas Eve ................................................... 56
Color Codes.......................................................95
Circuit Overrides ............................................... 65
Circuit Plans ...................................................... 65
Color Coding
Table Cells ....................................................95
CJ 233
Color Coding......................................................10
Ckts 1-255 ......................................................... 65
Color Coding......................................................95
Clear.......48, 56, 65, 76, 107, 114, 120, 121, 165,
195, 200
ColorBlue.........................................................134
Clear Event Log
use .............................................................. 121
Clear Event Log .............................................. 120
Clear Event Log .............................................. 121
Clear Event Log Entries
Selected Event Group Only ........................ 120
ColorGreen ......................................................134
ColorRed .........................................................134
Columbus Day ...................................................56
Columns ...38, 48, 56, 97, 98, 124, 134, 148, 195,
208, 218, 221
COM
shows ............................................................38
Clear Event Log Entries .................................. 120
COM ..................................................................38
Clear Events.................................... 107, 120, 121
Combination ......................................................34
Clear Failed Detector ........................................ 56
Comm ..........................................................43, 65
Client/Server ..................................................... 45
Comm Copy.......................................................65
256
Index
Comm Stats ...................................................... 43
Cond.................................................................. 65
Comm Stats view.............................................. 43
Cond Overlap .................................................... 65
Comm/System .................................................. 56
Configs 1-10...................................................... 65
Comm/System Setup........................................ 65
Configuration
Polling........................................................... 19
Command Selection ......................................... 56
Commands
full listing .................................................... 218
Commands .. 1, 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
37, 42, 56, 101, 107, 109, 114, 122, 152, 159,
163, 169, 175, 182, 195, 212, 216
Comment
Adding ........................................................ 224
Configuration............................................. 1, 5, 10
Configuration files ............................................. 10
Configure BMP Maps ...................................... 131
Configure GIS Maps................................ 131, 148
Configure interface............................................ 83
Configure Intersection Interface ........................ 83
Comment .................................................... 10, 34
Configure Intersections icon ............................. 81
Comment ........................................................ 224
Configure Intersections Module
Launching ..................................................... 81
Comments Module.......................................... 224
Comms
switch ......................................................... 175
Configure Intersections Module ........................ 53
Comms ....................................................... 30, 43
Comms ........................................................... 175
Communications .... 1, 5, 9, 10, 28, 30, 34, 37, 38,
39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 55, 81, 83, 86, 88, 101,
103, 104, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 122, 128,
129, 131, 136, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 169,
171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 234, 236, 237,
238, 239, 240
Configure Intersections window
portion........................................................... 85
Communications channel .. 9, 109, 113, 117, 118,
122, 128, 131, 163, 176, 234
Configure Intersections window ........................ 88
Communications Failure Testing .................... 175
Communications Unit...................................... 238
Community...................................................... 122
Community Name
changes...................................................... 122
Community Name ........................................... 122
Complete ... 1, 7, 8, 10, 20, 39, 46, 55, 81, 85, 88,
90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 124,
131, 133, 134, 138, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161,
163, 165, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186,
197, 205, 207, 208, 209, 211, 213, 221, 223,
225, 227, 228, 229, 231, 232, 235, 239, 240
Complete set.... 1, 7, 8, 20, 39, 46, 81, 85, 90, 92,
95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 131, 133, 138,
150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 171, 172,
176, 178, 182, 184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213,
221, 223, 225, 227, 229, 232, 235, 239, 240
Computer’s ............................................. 184, 228
Concerning
IQCentral ........................................................ 4
Concerning ......................................................... 4
Configure Layers............................................. 133
Configure Logs................................................ 114
Configure Map Polling window........................ 163
Configure Spreadsheet ................................... 124
Configure Spreadsheet button ........................ 124
Configuring Intersection
Open............................................................. 81
Opens ........................................................... 10
Overview....................................................... 83
Configuring Intersection .................................... 10
Conflict Monitor Unit................................ 234, 237
Connect/Disconnect ........................................ 109
Connected setting ........................................... 163
Connection channel .......................................... 30
Connection Manager......................................... 37
Connection Name ....................................... 38, 45
Connection Timeout .......................................... 45
Connection Type
Parameters Required ................................... 45
257
Connection Type ........................................... 1, 43
Controller Upload...............................................90
Connection Type ............................................... 45
Convert ....................118, 176, 208, 234, 237, 240
Connection’ ..................................................... 184
Converts NEMA TS2-Type ......................234, 240
Connections
Adding........................................................... 45
choosing ....................................................... 45
Deleting......................................................... 45
Editing........................................................... 45
Managing ...................................................... 37
open.............................................................. 45
Opens ........................................................... 34
Overview..................................................... 104
Select.................................................... 39, 104
type ............................................................. 103
Wait............................................................... 45
Converts TS2-Type .........................................234
Connections ............................ 1, 9, 10, 26, 28, 30
Connections list................................... 37, 38, 104
Connections Module
Overview....................................................... 45
Connections Module ......................................... 10
Connections Module ......................................... 45
Contact Information............................................. 4
Contact Name ........................................... 65, 130
Contact Peek Traffic
....................... 1, 178, 232
COORD .............................................92, 101, 239
Coord Constants................................................56
Coord Enhanced................................................65
Coord Phases....................................................65
Coord Plans.......................................................56
Coord Setup ......................................................76
Coordinated 1, 5, 10, 20, 34, 53, 81, 85, 131, 133,
134, 137, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150,
153, 158, 159, 160, 165, 172, 212, 233, 235,
236, 239, 240
Coordination
discusses ........................................................1
Coordination ........................................................1
Coordination Plans ............................................56
Cophase ............................................................65
Copy Data..........................................................99
Copy During.......................................................65
Copy From.................................................99, 163
Contacting
......................... 213
Peek Technical Support
Peek Traffic
................................................ 1
Copying
Settings Between Controllers........................99
Contacting ........................................................... 1
Copying .............................................................99
Contacting ....................................................... 213
Corel® Paint Shop Pro® .................................139
Context Sensitive Help...................................... 34
Cory Dibert ..........................................................4
Context-specific menu
opens ............................................................ 14
COS
Lead/Lag .......................................................65
Context-specific menu....................................... 14
COS...................................................................65
Control clocking............................................... 236
COS/F
TOD ..............................................................65
Control Flags ..................................................... 56
Control Mode................................................... 114
Control Name .................................................. 218
Controller..................................................... 97, 98
COS/F................................................................65
Counts ...........................43, 65, 76, 175, 207, 236
Counts/Minute ...................................................76
Controller assigned ........................................... 53
Couple
bitmap .........................................................137
types .............................................................85
ways ......................................................81, 157
Controller assigned ........................................... 88
Create................................50, 104, 129, 146, 209
Controller assigned ......................................... 136
Create report ...................................................209
Controller crosses ........................................... 234
Create Report button
select...........................................................205
Controller assigned
work ................................................ 53, 88, 136
Controller Firmware Required ......................... 178
Controller Log Retrieval .................................. 207
258
Create Report button .......................................205
Index
Crisis Management..................... 1, 127, 128, 129
Currently-logged................................................ 34
Critical......................... 26, 29, 200, 202, 209, 216
Custom Report ................................................ 209
Critical Change ................................................. 26
Customizability ................................................ 227
Critical Settings............................................... 202
Cycle
Num .............................................................. 56
Cross . 10, 22, 34, 53, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 101,
136, 152, 157, 158, 159, 165, 227, 233, 234,
235, 236, 237, 239, 240
CS
Time Plan ..................................................... 65
CS..................................................................... 65
Cycle Lengths ............................................. 56, 65
Cycle Timer
value ............................................................. 85
Cycle Timer ....................................................... 85
CSV .................................................................. 65
Cycle/Offset/Split/Free
TOD Circuits ................................................. 65
Ctrl-click .......................................................... 101
Cycle/Offset/Split/Free ...................................... 65
Ctrl-F4............................................................... 34
D
Ctrl-select........................................................ 186
Ctrl-z ............................................................... 208
CTS................................................................... 65
Current. 10, 15, 26, 28, 32, 33, 36, 37, 46, 48, 50,
51, 81, 85, 88, 90, 95, 109, 113, 114, 118,
136, 139, 145, 146, 148, 161, 163, 165, 172,
174, 176, 182, 190, 195, 200, 213, 223, 225,
229, 236, 240
Current Alarms........................................ 195, 200
Darken............................................................... 56
Data
Sending ........................................................ 98
Data................................................................... 98
Data Bits............................................................ 56
Data covers ..................................................... 134
Data files ......................................................... 137
Current Date ............... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 174
Data From
Getting .......................................................... 97
Current displaying
sign............................................................. 109
Data From ................................................... 10, 95
Current displaying........................................... 109
Current Groups list................................ 48, 50, 51
Current Logged................... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33
Current Polling ................................................ 165
Current setting ................................................ 223
Current Time............................. 26, 28, 29, 30, 33
Current User Accounts ..................................... 10
Current User icon.............................................. 33
Current Users ....................................... 10, 33, 36
Currently 9, 10, 15, 19, 29, 33, 34, 36, 42, 47, 48,
50, 56, 80, 81, 88, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 113,
114, 122, 139, 146, 153, 157, 158, 159, 163,
165, 172, 178, 182, 186, 195, 200, 213, 216,
223, 235
Currently exhibiting ......................................... 235
Data handling needs ......................................... 90
Data list ............................................................. 86
Data Manager
Quick History ................................................ 26
referencing.................................................... 26
state.............................................................. 26
Data Manager ................................................... 26
Data Manager ................................................... 26
Data Manager icon............................................ 26
Data Manager icon tool ..................................... 26
Data Manager Quick History
Viewing ......................................................... 26
Data Manager Quick History ............................. 26
Data Manager Status ........................................ 26
Data Manager Status Icon ........ 28, 29, 30, 32, 33
Currently exist................................................. 114
Data Manager toolbar
Double-clicking ............................................. 26
Currently Logged In Users.............................. 216
Data Manager toolbar ....................................... 26
Currently Logged-in .......................................... 34
Data object polling........................................... 161
Currently transmitting........................................ 92
Data Objects . 83, 85, 86, 161, 163, 169, 172, 197
Currently working............................................ 165
259
Data set ........................................................... 145
Data Type................................................ 163, 172
Database ......................................................... 134
Database listing................................................. 99
Database Maintenance ................................... 221
DataPath ......................................................... 134
Date Range
For All Dates ............................................... 205
Delete Group Button
Press .............................................................52
Delete Group Button..........................................48
Delete Group Button..........................................52
Delete Selected Task
press ...........................................................186
Delete Selected Task ......................................186
Date/Time.......................................................... 32
Describe ...1, 5, 10, 29, 30, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,
46, 48, 55, 81, 85, 103, 104, 117, 118, 120,
122, 138, 143, 145, 149, 150, 157, 158, 159,
163, 165, 169, 172, 176, 184, 189, 190, 197,
205, 209, 216, 221, 224, 233, 234, 236, 237,
238, 239, 240
Dates .5, 32, 42, 76, 120, 121, 184, 195, 205, 224
Describes IQCentral Version 1.5 .........................1
Day
Time............................................................ 107
Description -- Entered........................................38
Date Range ............................................... 42, 121
Date Range ..................................................... 205
Day ........................................................ 56, 65, 76
Description – This....................................163, 172
Day Plans 1-16.................................................. 56
Det 1-12
Plans 1-3 Inhibits ..........................................65
Day Plans 1-300................................................ 65
Det 1-12.............................................................65
Day Plans tab.......................................... 118, 176
Daylight Savings ......................................... 65, 76
Detail display
sign .............................................................153
Deact-Delay ...................................................... 65
Detail display ...................................................153
Default ............................................. 114, 134, 160
Details.1, 7, 10, 14, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 39, 40, 42,
43, 45, 46, 56, 65, 76, 81, 83, 90, 104, 105,
110, 111, 113, 114, 116, 118, 121, 128, 130,
131, 138, 139, 143, 146, 148, 153, 157, 158,
159, 161, 171, 176, 182, 189, 190, 197, 208,
211, 215, 218, 223, 229, 232
Default Layer Values....................................... 134
Default Map
Setting......................................................... 160
Default Map ..................................................... 160
Default Time ............................................ 111, 112
Define Layer Groups ....................................... 133
Delay ................................................................. 65
Delay Inhibits..................................................... 65
Delete
Administration ............................................. 211
Alarm Condition .......................................... 197
Connection.................................................... 45
Device..................................................... 38, 40
Device Group.............................. 47, 48, 50, 51
Device Type.................................................. 46
GIS Layer.................................................... 150
GIS Map View............................................. 144
Group............................................................ 52
Icon ............................................................. 228
Layer........................................................... 148
Map............................................................. 139
Map View ............................................ 143, 144
Schedule Task ............................................ 186
User Account ...................... 212, 213, 214, 215
Delete ................................................ 1, 10, 34, 37
Details About Configuring Layers ....................148
Detected
CMU-programmed ..............................234, 240
Detected ...10, 28, 29, 56, 83, 114, 161, 172, 189,
197, 200, 233, 234
Detected ..........................................................234
Detected ..........................................................234
Detected ..........................................................240
Detection Zone ..........................83, 172, 233, 234
Detector Accum .................................................56
Detector Accumulation ......................................56
Detector Constant Call ......................................56
Detector Copy Group.........................................65
Detector Data ..................................................165
Detector Diag.....................................................56
Detector Erratic Output......................................56
Detector Failure ...............................................234
Detector Non-Lock.............................................65
260
Index
Detector Plan No .............................................. 56
Device Icons Displayed window...................... 152
Detector Plans .................................................. 56
Device Icons Temporarily Displayed............... 152
Detector Repair................................................. 56
Device Icons Temporarily Displayed window.. 152
Detector Switching Enable................................ 65
Device List window............................................ 48
Detectors
result .............................................................. 4
Trailing ......................................................... 65
Device Log Polling
Opens ........................................................... 10
Detectors 1-12 .................................................. 65
Detectors 1-64 ............................................ 65, 76
Device Log Polling window
Open........................................................... 175
DetectorVolume .............................................. 172
Device Log Polling window ............................. 175
Device
Accessing................................................... 159
Adding .......................................................... 39
Managing ..................................................... 37
Device Logs ................................ 42, 43, 175, 207
Device............................................................... 37
Device Manager ................................................ 37
Device Add/Edit window ................................... 38
Device Messages list .............................. 109, 129
Device Address
Set .............................................................. 104
Device Security ....................................... 122, 216
Device Address................................................. 39
Device Security Module
Opening ...................................................... 122
Device Address............................................... 104
Device Configuration list ................................. 104
Device Configurations................. 10, 47, 104, 207
Device Configurations window
Opens........................................................... 10
Device Configurations window.......................... 10
Device Configurations window........................ 104
Device Log Polling ............................................ 10
Device Management
Introduction................................................... 38
Open............................................................. 39
Device Security Module .................................. 122
Device Specific
Auto Populate Polling tool ............................ 81
set................................................................. 81
Device Specific.................................................. 81
Device Status
Opens ........................................................... 10
Device Connection Details
Viewing......................................................... 30
Device Status tool ............................................. 30
Device Connection Details................................ 30
Device Type Log ............................................. 174
Device Connection/Responding ....................... 30
Device Type Log polling window..................... 174
Device fails ....................................................... 30
Device Type Management ................................ 38
Device Groups button
clicking ....................................... 47, 50, 51, 52
Device Type Manager ....................................... 37
Device Type Data............................................ 172
Device Groups Module
Launching..................................................... 47
Device Type Module
Link Icon ..................................................... 231
open.............................................................. 46
Device Groups Module ..................................... 47
Device Type Module ......................................... 46
Device Groups Module ..................................... 47
Device Type Module ....................................... 231
Device Groups window
open ............................................................. 48
Parts ............................................................. 48
Using ............................................................ 48
Device Type Polling ........................................ 174
Device Groups window ..................................... 48
Device which .. 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90,
92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129,
152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184,
207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,
240
Device Heirarchy ............................................ 190
Device History................................................. 189
Device Icon ............................................... 10, 153
Device Types list ......................................... 37, 38
Device View .............................................. 33, 163
261
Device which manages
sequence ...1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90,
92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129,
152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184,
207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,
240
Device window ................................................ 104
Device Zoom Levels
Opens ........................................................... 10
Diagnostic Tests ..............................................114
Diagnostic Tests ..............................................116
Diagnostic Topics ....................................114, 116
Diagnostics ......1, 10, 56, 107, 113, 114, 116, 223
Dial Retries ........................................................56
Difference ..........................................95, 152, 159
Different in Active Memory' - The ......................95
Different in Both Places' - The ...........................95
Device Zoom Levels.......................................... 10
Different in the Device' - The .............................95
Device Zoom Levels.......................................... 81
Dim Alt Half........................................................76
Device-by-device......................... 10, 37, 174, 190
Dim Don't Walik .................................................56
DeviceDisplayName ................................ 182, 184
Dim Dont Walk...................................................65
Device-Level Security ................................. 1, 122
Dim Red.................................................56, 65, 76
DeviceNode....................................................... 76
Direction ..........................................................153
Devices Activity ............................................... 205
Disable AOR......................................................56
Devices Connected ..................................... 26, 30
Disappear ........................................................153
Devices Displayed list ..................................... 153
Discarded ........................................................122
Devices Module
Overview....................................................... 38
Discrete input
discrete output ......................................37, 103
Devices Module................................................. 38
Discrete output
discrete input.........................................37, 103
Device's NTCIP Status
Viewing ......................................................... 37
Device's NTCIP Status...................................... 37
Devices on Maps............................................. 131
Devices Responding
Status............................................................ 30
Discribes..............................................................1
Discusses
Coordination....................................................1
Discusses ............................................................1
Display Alarm History ......................................195
Devices Responding ......................................... 30
Display button..................................................109
Devices Temporarily Displayed list ................. 153
Display Device History.....................................195
Devices –This list ............................................ 172
Display Message on Sign ................................109
Devices Toolbar ................................................ 25
Display Object .................................................159
Devices Window.......................................... 39, 40
Display Object Polling Rate .............................159
Device-specific ............................................ 25, 92
Display Only ............................................109, 144
DeviceStatus41Device ...................................... 42
Display Only button .........................................109
DeviceStatus41Device-CommStatus ................ 43
Displays command ..........................................152
DeviceStatus41Device-History.......................... 43
Dist ....................................................................56
DeviceStatus41DeviceType .............................. 42
Dock button
choose ........................................................200
Device-type-based standard ............................... 1
Diag Green Ext.................................................. 56
Diagnostic Recalls............................................. 56
Diagnostic Tests
use .............................................................. 113
Diagnostic Tests.............................................. 113
262
Dock button .....................................................200
Dock/Restore button........................................195
DON'T DO IT .....................................................46
Door Open .......................................................113
Door Status......................................................116
Index
Double-clicking
Data Manager toolbar .................................. 26
NTCIP Server ............................................... 28
Dynamic Recall ................................................. 65
Double-clicking ................................................. 26
Eastbound Thru................................................. 56
Double-clicking ................................................. 28
Easter Monday .................................................. 56
Double-clicking ............................................... 104
Edge
IQCentral window ....................................... 195
Download.......................................................... 90
E
Drag
Icon ............................................................ 153
Edge................................................ 7, 10, 38, 134
Drag ................................ 38, 83, 97, 98, 144, 152
Edge................................................................ 197
Drag ................................................................ 153
Edge................................................................ 200
Drag ................................................................ 157
Edge................................................................ 208
Drag ................................................................ 158
Edit
Connection ................................................... 45
Device..................................................... 38, 40
Device Types................................................ 46
Existing Alarm Condition ............................ 197
Existing Map ............................................... 139
Existing Message ....................................... 109
Font ............................................................ 117
Icon..................................................... 228, 229
LayerName ................................................. 134
SNMP Device Security ............................... 122
Values........................................................... 92
Zoom Areas ................................................ 139
Drop ... 38, 86, 109, 120, 139, 144, 145, 152, 153,
205, 212, 218, 223, 224, 228, 231
Drop Address.............................................. 38, 39
DST................................................................... 56
DST Adjustment................................................ 56
Dual Entry ..................................... 56, 65, 76, 234
Duration
traffic signals .............................. 152, 165, 178
Duration ... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 65, 76, 81, 86,
90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118,
124, 129
Duty .................................................................. 88
Dyn Max Step ................................................... 76
Dynamic
Press .......................................................... 169
Edge................................................................ 195
Edit .......................................... 1, 7, 10, 14, 34, 37
Edit > Undo ..................................................... 208
Edit Connection Button ..................................... 45
Edit Device Button............................................. 40
Edit existing icons ........................................... 228
Dynamic.......................................................... 169
Edit existing messages ................................... 110
Dynamic Max .................................................... 76
Edit Master Fonts10, 34, 107, 109, 113, 117, 118,
120, 121, 176
Dynamic Object Configuration
Opening...................................................... 169
tells ............................................................. 169
Edit menu ................................................ 184, 186
Dynamic Object Configuration . 10, 161, 163, 165,
168
Edit Message button
clicking........................................................ 109
press........................................................... 110
Dynamic Object Configuration ........................ 169
Edit Message button ....................................... 109
Edit Message button ....................................... 110
Edit Message window ..................................... 109
Dynamic Objects............................... 20, 163, 169
EEPROM............................................. 56, 65, 235
Dynamic Objects button
Press .......................................................... 169
EEPROM Loaded w/Keyboard ......................... 65
Dynamic Objects button.................................. 169
EGB........................................................... 65, 234
Dynamic Objects Configuration window ......... 169
EGB Percentage ............................................... 65
Dynamic Omit/Recall ........................................ 65
EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data.......................... 234, 240
EEPROM Write ................................................. 56
Dynamic Omits ................................................. 65
263
Either
pedestrian ....................................................... 4
Close...........................................................104
opens ..........................................................104
Either ................................................................... 4
Enter/Edit Device Type window.......................104
Electronically erasable/programmable ............ 235
Entire 820A/OSAM ............................................56
Email ................................................................... 4
Entire Database.......................90, 92, 97, 98, 225
Emergency .......................... 1, 101, 127, 235, 238
Enumerated Values ...........................................92
Emergency Response............. 101, 127, 235, 238
EP....................................................................235
Empty .............................................................. 109
EPP .................................................................235
Enable
set ............................................................... 163
Equal ...............................................................208
Enable ................. 9, 42, 56, 65, 76, 137, 139, 153
Erratic Output ....................................................56
Enable ............................................................. 163
Enable ............................................................. 168
Error......1, 10, 34, 43, 56, 92, 107, 114, 116, 120,
137, 149, 152, 207, 234, 240
Enable Coord During Cyclic Int ......................... 65
Error Logging on Message Signs ....................120
Enable Leading Overlaps.................................. 65
Error Logs
Opens ...........................................................10
portion .........................................................120
Enable Signal Head Program............................ 65
End
Pedestrian Permissive ................................ 235
Permissive .................................................. 235
Ref ................................................................ 65
Erratic ................................................................65
Error Message .................................................152
ESRI ....................................................................1
ESRI GIS .....................................................1, 137
End Absence Mon Hour .................................... 65
Ethernet .....1, 10, 38, 39, 104, 122, 236, 237, 239
End Date ......................................................... 205
Event Groups...........................................120, 121
End Duration ................................................... 129
Event Log .....10, 34, 65, 120, 121, 205, 221, 223,
224
End Duration Message.................................... 129
End Duration message specified .................... 129
End-of-Line Delay ............................................. 56
Enhanced .......................................................... 65
Enhanced Perm ................................................ 65
Enhancements ............................................ 5, 218
Event log records
system.........................................................223
Event log records.............................................223
Event Log Size
open ............................................................223
Event Log Size ..................................................10
Ennumerated
Example........................................................ 92
Event Log Size ................................................223
Ennumerated..................................................... 92
Event Log Size icon
select...........................................................223
Enter
Description.................................................. 138
Name .......................................... 138, 144, 212
Enter 8, 10, 36, 38, 39, 76, 92, 111, 117, 129, 134
Enter/Edit ...................................... 39, 40, 45, 104
Enter/Edit Connections window ........................ 45
Event Log Size icon.........................................223
Event Log Size Module
Opening ......................................................223
Event Log Size Module....................................223
Events..............................................................120
Enter/Edit Device ................................ 10, 39, 104
Example
Ennumerated ................................................92
Enter/Edit Device Type
Opens ........................................................... 10
Example...................29, 33, 42, 53, 54, 85, 86, 88
Enter/Edit Device Type ..................................... 10
Enter/Edit Device Type ................................... 104
Enter/Edit Device Type window
264
Example IQCentral ............................................54
Example Network ..............................................53
Example Screen ..............................................122
Index
Example Topography........................................ 54
Excel file ......................................................... 124
Exceptionof ............................................. 236, 240
Existing
GIS ............................................................. 149
Existing ........................................................... 149
Existing Alarm Condition
Editing ........................................................ 197
Existing Alarm Condition................................. 197
Existing Device Group
Modifying .............................. 47, 48, 50, 51, 52
Existing Device Type ........................................ 46
Existing device type except
changes........................................................ 46
F
F1 34
F2 34
F3
pressing .............................................. 157, 158
F3 34
F3 157
F3 158
F4 34
F6 34, 127
F6 key
Press .......................................................... 127
F6 key ............................................................. 127
Existing device type except .............................. 46
F7
Existing Group
Modifying ...................................................... 51
F7 34
Existing Group ............................................ 48, 50
F7 195
Existing Group .................................................. 51
F7 200
Existing Map
Editing ........................................................ 139
Facilities .................................................. 238, 239
Existing Map ................................................... 139
Fail Max Recall Times....................................... 65
Existing Message
Edit ............................................................. 109
Fail Max Time.................................................... 65
Existing Message............................................ 109
Expand
Scenario ..................................................... 129
Scenarios ........................................... 128, 129
Press .......................................................... 195
Fail Max Recall Phase ...................................... 65
Fault Frame....................................................... 76
Feature emphasizes........................................ 216
Features ... 1, 5, 56, 101, 105, 107, 122, 123, 134,
138, 148, 178, 195, 197, 216, 234, 236
Expand............................................................ 128
February 20......................................................... 1
Expand............................................................ 129
February 2007..................................................... 5
Expand............................................................ 129
February 2008..................................................... 5
Expand............................................................ 197
Feed
NTCIP........................................................... 10
Expect
Status ......................................................... 161
Feed .................................................................. 10
Expect............................................................... 39
Feed .................................................................. 56
Expect............................................................. 161
Fiber Optic Modem.......................................... 235
Exporting
Report Data ................................................ 208
Extended Green Band .................................... 234
Field . 1, 5, 7, 8, 10, 20, 28, 32, 33, 37, 38, 39, 43,
45, 46, 48, 51, 53, 54, 56, 64, 65, 76, 80, 81,
83, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 104, 107, 109,
111, 114, 118, 120, 124, 131, 133, 134, 138,
143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 159,
160, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182,
184, 185, 186, 197, 205, 207, 209, 212, 213,
214, 218, 221, 223, 224, 225, 227, 228, 229,
231, 232, 235, 240
Extended Logging......................... 10, 21, 34, 223
Field Name.............................................. 148, 149
Exporting......................................................... 208
Ext Coor Type................................................... 56
Ext Start Override Preemeption........................ 65
Extended................................................... 34, 223
265
Field set........................................................... 169
Flash Entry Phase .............................................76
Field stores...................................................... 114
Flash Feedback Detected..................................56
FieldName ....................................................... 134
Flash Memory..................................................235
Fields appropriate ............................................. 90
FLASH mode ...........................................234, 240
Figure1, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29,
30, 32, 33, 37, 39, 42, 43, 48, 50, 51, 52, 54,
83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101,
110, 111, 117, 131, 143, 146, 148, 150, 153,
157, 158, 159, 163, 165, 168, 169, 174, 182,
184, 186, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 215, 216,
218, 225
Flash OL Green .................................................56
File fields ......................................................... 134
Flash Red ..........................................................76
File menu
Open ........................................................... 208
Flash Red Overlaps...........................................56
File menu ...................................................... 9, 36
Flash Repeat Interval ......................................202
File menu ........................................................ 208
Flashes/minute ..................................................65
File menu ........................................................ 213
File Name ................ 138, 148, 208, 209, 228, 229
Floating
Windows .......................................................15
Filename ......................................................... 229
Floating..............................................................15
Filter - Device .................................................. 163
Fltxoy ...............................................................110
Filter - Device Type ......................................... 163
FO..............................................................65, 235
Filtered Group ................................................. 163
FOM.................................................................235
Filters .................... 10, 29, 42, 163, 195, 205, 209
Find Information .................................................. 1
Font
any set ........................................................117
Editing .........................................................117
Finished adding............................................... 138
Font ...................................1, 10, 34, 37, 107, 114
Finished creating............................................. 109
Font Color........................................................143
Finished modifying .......................................... 197
Font Editor
access.........................................................117
Firmware ..1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92,
97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152,
157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207,
227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240
Firmware programming .... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55,
81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116,
118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178,
182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,
237, 238, 240
Fixed Time ...................................................... 112
Flash OL Red ....................................................56
Flash OL Yellow ................................................56
Flash On/Off ....................................................110
Flash Plans 1-16................................................65
Flash Red Phases .............................................56
Font Editor .......................................................117
Font Editor .......................................................117
Font Editor Interface
Using...........................................................117
Font Editor Interface ........................................117
Font Editor window
parts ............................................................117
Font Editor window ..........................................117
Flash ....56, 65, 76, 101, 110, 114, 202, 216, 234,
235, 237, 240
Font files ............................................................10
Flash Alt Half Hertz ........................................... 76
Font Size .........................................................143
Flash Code ........................................................ 65
Font View
Opens ...........................................................10
Flash Dont ......................................................... 65
Flash Dont Walk................................................ 65
Flash Don't Walk ............................................... 56
Flash Dwell........................................................ 76
266
Font View...........................................................10
Font View.........................................................117
FontBold ..........................................................134
FontColorBlue..................................................134
Index
FontColorGreen .............................................. 134
Fully Actuated ................................................. 235
FontColorRed ................................................. 134
Fully-actuated.................................................. 233
FontItalic ......................................................... 134
Further Details........................................... 38, 116
FontName ....................................................... 134
G
Fonts Module .................................................. 117
FontSize.......................................................... 134
For All Dates ................................................... 205
For All Device Types....................................... 205
For All Devices................................................ 205
For All Users ................................................... 205
G1C................................................................... 65
G2C................................................................... 65
GBP Omits ........................................................ 56
Generalized Real-time ...................... 88, 136, 165
Generate ......................................................... 207
For Date Range .............................................. 205
Generating Data
Reporting .................................................... 207
For Device Type ..................................... 169, 172
Generating Data.............................................. 207
For Selected Device Type .............................. 205
For Selected Devices...................................... 205
Geographical...... 20, 81, 133, 134, 137, 144, 145,
146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 158, 159, 160
For Selected Users ......................................... 205
Geo-located..................................................... 153
Force....... 30, 56, 65, 76, 122, 160, 234, 235, 237
Get From Sign......................................... 118, 176
Force Off................................................... 65, 235
Gif...................................................................... 85
Force Output..................................................... 56
GIS Device Zoom Levels
Setting ........................................................ 152
ForceOff.......................................................... 235
Fore Color....................................................... 202
Forever ........................................................... 129
FormBuilder
Launching................................................... 232
FormBuilder ................................ 10, 34, 227, 232
GIS Device Zoom Levels ................................ 152
GIS Layer Groups
Creating ...................................................... 148
Opens ........................................................... 34
GIS Layers .............................................. 148, 150
FormBuilder .................................................... 232
GIS Layers Module
Opening ...................................................... 148
FormBuilder Interface ..................................... 232
GIS Layers Module ......................................... 148
FormBuilder Module ....................................... 232
GIS Map . 5, 10, 20, 131, 134, 137, 144, 145, 146,
148, 153, 158, 159
Free .................................. 4, 56, 65, 92, 101, 239
Free Plan .......................................................... 56
Free, Flash...................................................... 101
Friday checked ....................................... 118, 176
From activating ............................................... 146
From Database ................................................. 98
GIS Map Data
Loading....................................................... 137
GIS Map Data ................................................. 137
GIS Map Data ................................................. 159
GIS Map Layer Groups ................................... 146
From eating up................................................ 175
GIS Map Layers
Defining ...................................................... 134
FSK................................................................. 235
GIS Map Layers .............................................. 134
FTP Data .......................................................... 21
GIS Map Viewer ...................................... 153, 158
Full . 10, 15, 29, 33, 128, 134, 138, 144, 178, 211,
213, 218, 223, 228, 229
GIS Map Viewer Interface ............................... 158
Full Extent....................................................... 144
Full listing
command ................................................... 218
GIS Map Viewer switches ............................... 153
GIS Zoom Level
Setting ........................................................ 153
GIS Zoom Level .............................................. 153
Full listing........................................................ 218
267
GIS Zoom Level .............................................. 240
GIS Zoom Levels commandunder
Maps menu ......................................... 236, 240
Go.......9, 15, 28, 36, 42, 50, 55, 65, 81, 103, 104,
122, 127, 131, 134, 137, 138
Go OFF............................................................202
GIS Zoom Levels commandunder .................. 236
Good Friday.......................................................56
GIS Zoom Levels commandunder .................. 240
Graphic File
Changing.......................................................85
GIS Zoom Levels window
open............................................................ 153
GIS Zoom Levels window ............................... 153
GIS Zoom Settings
Opening ...................................................... 153
Opens ........................................................... 34
Graphic File .......................................................85
Green
start .............................................................239
Green....56, 65, 76, 83, 85, 86, 95, 109, 113, 116,
120, 233, 234, 235, 237
GIS Zoom Settings...................................... 10, 20
Green...............................................................239
GIS Zoom Settings............................................ 34
Green Extension Time.......................................56
GIS Zoom Settings.......................................... 153
Green Overlap ...................................................83
GIS-based ....................................................... 134
GISData .......................................................... 137
Green Phase
selected.........................................................86
GIS-enabled .................................... 131, 137, 143
Green Phase .....................................................83
GIS-enabled IQCentral............................ 131, 143
Green Phase .....................................................86
GIS-mapping ................................................... 137
Greenband.......................................................235
GIS-mapping enabled ..................................... 137
Greenband Analysis ........................................235
Give .........104, 110, 134, 163, 168, 200, 209, 233
Grid Display
Type ............................................................159
Global IQCentral Modules................................... 7
Glossary .............................................................. 1
Glossary-Connected ....................................... 234
Grid Display .....................................................159
Group...........................................................50, 52
Glossary-Device.............................................. 234
Group button
clicking ..........................................................47
Glossary-Disconnected ................................... 234
Group Description........................................48, 51
Glossary-GIS................................................... 235
Group Name ..........................................10, 48, 51
Glossary-HDLC Address ................................. 236
Groups List ........................................................48
Glossary-Maintenance Icon ............................ 236
Groups Module ..................................................47
Glossary-Marginal ........................................... 236
Guaranteed Passage.........................................76
Glossary-MIB .................................................. 237
Glossary-Military Time .................................... 237
H
Glossary-NTCIP .............................................. 237
Handling
Alarms .........................................................200
Glossary-Object Identifier................................ 237
Handling ..........................................................200
Glossary-Object Name.................................... 238
Glossary-Offline .............................................. 238
Hardware
piece .................................1, 10, 161, 175, 229
Glossary-Online .............................................. 238
HDLC.........................................................65, 236
Glossary-SNMP .............................................. 239
HDLC Address.................................................236
Glossary-STMP ............................................... 239
HDLC stands ...................................................236
Glossary-Zoom................................................ 240
Heirarchical
indicate................................................237, 238
Go
Maps ........................................................... 139
268
Heirarchical......................................................237
Index
Heirarchical..................................................... 237
Icon File Name ................................................ 228
Heirarchical..................................................... 238
Icon From .................................... 29, 85, 228, 229
Heirarchical..................................................... 238
Icon Management ....................... 10, 34, 152, 227
Heirarchy ................................................ 237, 238
Icon Names ............................................. 228, 229
Help File Version 1.29 ........................................ 1
Icon Names list................................................ 228
Help File Version 1.32 ........................................ 1
Icon opens
window.......................................................... 28
Help menu .............................................. 131, 153
HelpTopic-Time .............................................. 113
Higher PE ......................................................... 65
High-level Data Link Control ........................... 236
Historical Alarm............................................... 197
History....................................... 5, 26, 28, 43, 189
Horizontal........................................................ 153
Horizontal Border............................................ 113
Horizontally
Tiling............................................................. 15
Horizontally ....................................................... 10
Horizontally ....................................................... 15
Hovering
Over ........................................... 26, 28, 29, 30
How GIS Map Layers Work ............................ 134
However, IQCentral .......................................... 26
HTM ................................................................ 208
I
Icon opens......................................................... 28
Icon representing ............................................ 153
Icons
Adding .......................................... 83, 228, 229
Alarm Statistics............................................. 29
Creating ...................................................... 229
Deleting ...................................................... 228
Editing................................................. 228, 229
Linking ........................................................ 131
locate .......................................................... 229
name........................................................... 229
Placing........................................................ 152
see Adding.................................................. 231
Sign .................................................... 157, 158
Tooltip............................................... 26, 28, 30
Icons............................................................ 10, 26
Icons associatedwith ............................... 236, 240
Icons Displayed window.................................. 152
Icons operate slightly differently........................ 85
Icons Temporarily Displayed........................... 152
Icons Temporarily Displayed window.............. 152
I/O Mode ........................................................... 65
Icons/Intersection .............................................. 85
I/O Steering....................................................... 65
ID 65, 83, 163, 172, 233, 234
Ico ........................................................... 228, 229
IDs
NTCIP........................................................... 10
Ico file ..................................................... 228, 229
Icon
Adding ........................................................ 231
Drag ........................................................... 153
Placing ....................................................... 153
Icon button
Link............................................................. 231
IDs..................................................................... 10
If
button.......................................................... 113
If Extended Logging ........................................ 223
If O/L ................................................................. 65
Icon button ........................................................ 83
If You............................................................... 214
Icon button ...................................................... 231
Image File ..................................... 5, 85, 139, 229
Icon Detail button............................................ 229
IMPORTANT ..................................................... 46
Icon File
contains ...................................................... 229
Important - Remember .................................... 175
Icon File .......................................................... 228
Device Type................................................ 104
popup menu................................................ 200
Icon File .......................................................... 229
In
Icon File .......................................................... 229
Icon File .......................................................... 229
269
In 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 20, 22, 24, 25, 26,
28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42,
43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56,
64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95,
97, 98, 99, 101, 103
Typical Settings...........................................202
Informational Alarm .........................................202
Informative.......................................................189
Inhibit Delay.......................................................56
In Both Places ................................................... 95
Inhibit Max .........................................................65
In communicating ............................................ 175
Input Lock ..........................................................65
In configuring map....................................... 5, 165
Input Objects ...................................................124
In contrast ....................................................... 152
In installing ...................................................... 104
Inserts
Alarm icon .....................................................86
In interfering .................................................... 233
Instance .................1, 81, 146, 152, 163, 172, 207
In tripping ........................................................ 195
Instance – In ....................................................172
Incident
Configuring ................................................. 123
Integer .............................................................169
Incident........................................................ 10, 34
Incident............................................................ 123
Interacting
With...............................................................98
Incident............................................................ 124
Interacting..........................................................98
Incident Management Module..... 10, 34, 123, 124
Interaction With
Central Database ..........................................98
Incident Management Template.xls ................ 124
Incident Spreadsheets
Configuring ................................................. 124
Intelligent transportation systems ............211, 227
Interaction With..................................................98
Interactive Upload/Download Module................53
Incident Spreadsheets .................................... 124
Interconnection ..................................................37
Include
Alarm Configurations .................................. 189
Interface...............................................................7
Include 1, 5, 10, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48,
55, 76, 81, 83, 85, 103, 104, 107, 118, 120,
122, 124, 127, 129, 134, 143, 145, 157, 158,
159, 163, 165, 169, 172, 174, 176, 184
Internet ............................104, 122, 236, 237, 239
Increment ........................................................ 175
Intersection Failed .............................................83
Index
use .................................................................. 1
Intersection Flash ..............................................83
Index ................................................................... 1
Indicate
Activation .................................................... 129
heirarchical ......................................... 237, 238
which fails ................................................... 234
Interface Controls ............................................172
Intersection ..........................................81, 83, 236
Intersection Configuration..................................85
Intersection Icon Image Library .........................85
Intersection Icons
Linking...........................................................86
Setting Up Map Polling .........................88, 136
Intersection Icons ........................................81, 85
Indicate.4, 26, 28, 30, 33, 48, 83, 90, 92, 95, 114,
118, 124, 127, 129
Intersection ONLINE..........................................83
Info ............................................................ 34, 202
Intersection Status...................................157, 158
Information path ... 10, 37, 38, 45, 83, 86, 88, 101,
103, 104, 120, 122, 136, 163, 184, 234
Intersection Status window
open ....................................................157, 158
Informational
setting ......................................................... 202
Intersection Status window..............................157
Informational ..................................................... 29
Informational ................................................... 202
Informational Alarm
270
Intersection Polling Assistant dialog ................165
Intersection Status window..............................158
Intersection Toolbar...........................................22
Intersection/Sensor..........................................159
Intersections > Copy Database .........................10
Index
Intersections > Upload/Download ... 10, 34, 97, 98
IQCentral Layer............................................... 148
Intersections Module......................................... 81
IQCentral login ................................................ 101
Interval56, 65, 101, 123, 161, 163, 165, 168, 171,
172, 174, 175, 178, 235, 236, 238
IQCentral login/logout ..................................... 205
Intro
Polling ........................................................ 171
Intro................................................................. 171
Introduction
Device Management .................................... 38
Introduction ....................................................... 38
IQCentral Maps ................................. 53, 157, 158
IQCentral Menus ........................................... 7, 10
IQCentral Network............................................. 55
IQCentral Operating Manual
Welcome......................................................... 1
IQCentral Operating Manual ............................... 1
IQCentral Operating Manual ............................... 5
IP
shows ........................................................... 38
IP 239
IP 239
IQ 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24,
25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,
55, 56, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92,
95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 109,
110, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123,
124, 127, 128, 129, 131, 133, 134, 136, 137,
138, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150,
152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165,
169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 181, 182,
184, 185, 186, 189, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202,
205, 207, 208, 209, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215,
216, 218, 221, 223, 224, 225, 227, 228, 229,
231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240
IQ ATC Controller
IQCentral Report Selection Module ................ 205
IQCentral Reports
Reports. Opens ............................................ 10
IQCentral Reports ............................................. 10
IQCentral Reports ........................................... 178
IQCentral System...................................... 53, 224
IQCentral toolbars ............................................. 10
IQCentral Update Release History...................... 5
IQCentral Version 1.2 Release Notes ................. 5
IQCentral/Device Icons/Intersection ................. 85
IQCentral's Map Management ........................ 137
IQCentral's Map View ..................................... 139
IQ ATC Controller ............................................. 55
IQCentral's MapFiles....................................... 137
IQ ATC Controller ............................................. 76
IQCentral's Status bar..... 7, 10, 14, 15, 26, 30, 34
IQ ATC Fields ................................................... 76
IQCentrol......................................................... 153
IQ CentralServer’ ............................................ 178
IQConnect Hardware ........................................ 55
IQCentral 1.5 .................................................... 47
Isonly............................................................... 236
IQCentral Access.................... 205, 207, 221, 223
IT 131, 143, 221
IQCentral Access Database ........................... 221
ITS...... 1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81,
104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172,
184, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240
IQCentral application
Closes .......................................................... 34
IQCentral application ........................................ 10
J
IQCentral application ........................................ 34
January 2006 ...................................................... 5
IQCentral BMP................................................ 131
Jlx 110
IQCentral computer’s...................................... 184
Jpg .................................................................... 85
IQCentral Database ............................ 95, 98, 134
Jpx................................................................... 110
IQCentral Help ........................................ 1, 10, 19
July 2005............................................................. 5
IQCentral Help System ..................................... 34
June 2008 ........................................................... 5
IQCentral Installation Manual ............................. 5
271
K
Lead/Lag Operation.........................................236
Keyboard ...1, 7, 14, 15, 34, 56, 92, 157, 158, 232
Learning
Log On ............................................................7
Keyboard Beep ................................................. 56
Keyboard Shortcuts........................................... 34
King Day............................................................ 56
L
LabelPosition................................................... 134
Large Size ....................................................... 153
Large Tool Icons ............................................... 10
Last Car Passage.............................................. 65
Last Car Passage Phases................................. 56
Last Edited .......................................................... 1
Layer ............................................................... 149
Layer Editor
Open ........................................................... 134
Layer Editor ..................................................... 134
Learning...............................................................7
Leave
Alarm System Settings window...................202
Leave.................................88, 134, 163, 168, 169
Leave...............................................................202
Leave Connected ............................................163
Left....7, 10, 15, 26, 28, 30, 42, 43, 48, 51, 52, 85,
86, 97, 98, 99, 117, 120, 144, 145, 148, 163,
182, 184, 185, 186, 190, 195, 197, 200, 208,
209, 212
Left-side...................................................212, 213
Less Than........................................................153
Letting
IQCentral.....................................................134
Letting..............................................................134
LayerFileName ................................................ 134
Level .......1, 10, 29, 33, 34, 36, 53, 81, 85, 97, 98,
117, 122, 131, 143, 153, 190, 197, 200, 202,
211, 212, 213, 216, 218, 236, 237, 238, 240
LayerGroupID.................................................. 134
Level1 ..............................................................211
LayerLoadOrder .............................................. 134
Level2 ..............................................................211
LayerName
Edit.............................................................. 134
Level3 ..............................................................211
LayerDetailID .................................................. 134
LayerName...................................................... 134
LayerOrder ...................................................... 134
Layers button .......................................... 148, 149
Layers displays
list ............................................................... 148
Layers displays ............................................... 148
Layers Module................................................. 148
Layers window
exit .............................................................. 148
Use ............................................................. 134
Layers window ................................................ 134
Layers window ................................................ 148
LCD Backlight ................................................... 56
LCD Contrast .................................................... 56
LCD Setup......................................................... 56
Lead Detector.................................................... 65
Levelicons................................................236, 240
Levels commandunder ............................236, 240
Levels Module .................................................218
Limit ...................................................................65
Line Justification ..............................................110
Line Volts.................................................113, 116
Link
Icon button ..................................................231
Icons ...........................................................131
Intersection Icons..........................................86
Link .10, 19, 23, 24, 25, 34, 37, 46, 55, 76, 81, 83,
85
Link Icon
Device Type ......................10, 21, 34, 152, 231
Device Type Module ...................................231
Link Icon ............................................................10
Link Icon ............................................................21
Link Icon ............................................................34
Lead/Lag
COS .............................................................. 65
Link Icon ..........................................................152
Lead/Lag ........................................................... 65
Link Icon ..........................................................231
Lead/Lag ......................................................... 236
Linux operating system..........................5, 55, 233
272
Index
List .................................................................. 216
Log Table ........................................................ 124
List button
Add Object ................................................. 172
Logged In User.............................. 10, 26, 33, 216
List button ....................................................... 172
Listing
Layers displays .......................................... 148
Viewing....................................................... 122
Listing ............................................................. 122
Listing ............................................................. 148
Listing ............................................................. 172
Loading
BMP Map Data ........................................... 137
GIS Map Data ............................................ 137
Preset Configuration .................................. 105
Loading ........................................................... 105
Logging ........................................................... 171
Logging Options .......................... 10, 34, 175, 223
Logging Options menu .................................... 223
Look
Device List .................................................... 51
Looks like .......................................................... 90
Loop .................................................................. 56
Loop Length ................................................ 56, 65
M
M3000 ............................................................. 236
Loading ........................................................... 137
M3000 Master
Local ......... 26, 55, 56, 76, 80, 131, 143, 178, 216
M3000 Master ................................................... 76
Local Time Differential ...................................... 76
MAC Address .................................................. 236
Location
Changing .................................................... 186
such................................................ 53, 88, 136
Main St .............................................................. 65
Location ................................................ 10, 22, 34
Location during
Custom ....................................................... 178
Main Street Clearance .................................... 237
Maintenance
choose ........................................................ 213
Tim42.......................................................... 213
Maintenance............................ 112, 152, 211, 212
Location during ............................................... 178
Maintenance.................................................... 240
Lock .................................................................. 65
Maintenance Icons .......................... 152, 236, 240
Log Configuration ........................................... 124
Maintenance Level .......................................... 212
Log Configured ............................................... 124
Maintenance list .............................................. 213
Log File ................................................... 121, 223
MaintenanceIcons ................................... 236, 240
Log Object List
Device Type ............................................... 172
Malfunction Management Unit ........ 234, 237, 240
Log Object List................................................ 172
Log Off
Use ................................................................. 9
Manage Traffic Signs
Controls ...................................................... 107
Manage Traffic Signs ...................................... 107
Log Off ................................................................ 7
Management 1, 5, 10, 21, 28, 37, 38, 39, 46, 103,
122, 137, 178, 227, 237, 238
Log Off warning window ................................... 36
Management Module ........................................ 10
Log On ................................................................ 8
Manager .......................................... 26, 28, 33, 37
Log Polling attempts ....................................... 175
Manages using
NTCIP communciations protocol ..... 1, 10, 161,
175, 229
Log Polling data .............................................. 171
Log polling list ................................................. 172
Log Polling section.......................................... 161
Log Polling tools ............................................. 171
Log Polling windows ............................... 171, 175
Log Sample Period ........................................... 65
Managing
Devices......................................................... 37
Open............................................................. 33
User ............................................................ 212
Managing Device Groups............................ 47, 48
Managing Devices............................. 1, 37, 47, 48
273
Managing IQCentral Security .......................... 212
Map Module.................................................10, 34
Managing User Accounts ................................ 216
Map Name ...............................................139, 160
Manual .................... 1, 56, 65, 114, 171, 233, 236
Map Open
uses ............................................................165
Manual Control Enable.................................... 236
Manual Coord Plan ........................................... 56
Manual Poll ............................................. 113, 114
Manufacturer Specific ..................................... 232
Manufacturer Specific Object Groups ............. 232
Map
Setting......................................................... 134
Map Open........................................................165
Map Open polling interval................................165
Map Paths
Setting.........................................................134
Map Paths .......................................................134
Map Area......................................................... 138
Map Polling
Configuring..................................165, 168, 169
utilizing ........................................................161
Map Configuration toolbar........... 20, 81, 163, 169
Map Polling......................................5, 86, 88, 136
Map Data
Storing ........................................................ 137
Map Polling AND .............................................175
Map Data........................... 1, 19, 20, 34, 131, 134
Map Data......................................................... 137
Map Data......................................................... 143
Map Data......................................................... 145
Map Data......................................................... 163
Map Data button
clicking ........................................................ 163
Map Polling Configuration
Open ...........................................................168
Opening ......................................................163
Opens ...........................................................10
Map Polling Configuration .................................10
Map Polling Configuration ...............................161
Map Data button.............................................. 163
Map Data Storage ........................................... 137
Map Display Area.................................... 157, 158
Map Polling Configuration button ....................168
Map displays ....................................................... 1
Map Polling Configuration window ..165, 168, 169
Map Dynamic Objects ....................................... 34
Map polling data ........................................88, 161
Map File .................................. 134, 138, 139, 159
Map Polling in ..................................................161
Map icon.................................................. 157, 158
Map polling list...........................................88, 163
Map Layer Detail ............................................. 134
Map polling objects............................................86
Map loading activity................................. 157, 158
Map Polling section .........................................161
Map Management
Overview..................................................... 137
Map View Creation ..........................................145
Map Management ........................................... 137
MapFiles ..................................................134, 137
Map Management icon
clicking ........................................................ 139
Press........................................................... 137
Maps > GIS Zoom Levels ................................153
Map Management icon.................................... 137
Map Management icon.................................... 139
Map Management Module With ...................... 143
Map Viewer Module.............5, 157, 158, 159, 165
Maps > Map Management...............................134
Maps List .........................................................160
Maps opens .............................................159, 165
Marginal.........42, 43, 83, 122, 175, 234, 236, 238
Map Management Module With GIS Maps ..... 143
Marginal Count
Set...............................................................175
Map Manager
Use ............................................................. 134
Marginal Count ................................................175
Map Manager .................................................. 134
Marginal Poll Skip
Set...............................................................175
274
Index
Marginal Poll Skip ........................................... 175
Message Defaults Tab .................................... 114
MaskLabels..................................................... 134
Message Editor ............................................... 110
Master 1, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,
46, 53, 55, 65, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95,
98, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114,
117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 133, 136,
138, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161,
163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 182,
184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213, 221, 223, 225,
227, 229, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237,
238, 239, 240
Message List ................................... 109, 110, 129
Master Address........................................... 38, 39
Message Sign Bulk Operations....................... 207
Master Fonts............................................. 23, 117
Master Fonts Module ...................................... 117
Message Sign Control 23, 25, 113, 117, 118, 120,
121, 176
Master Identification.......................................... 65
Message Sign Log Retrieval ................... 161, 207
Master Port ....................................................... 65
Message Sign Management .. 109, 113, 117, 118,
120, 121, 176
Master Table....................................... 46, 86, 169
Message Number.................... 109, 114, 118, 176
Message Page
Displaying ........................................... 111, 112
Message Page ................................................ 111
Message Page ................................................ 112
Message Requestor ........................................ 114
Match .................................. 92, 95, 134, 213, 214
Message Sign Schedules window
Opening .............................................. 118, 176
Max Hold Time.................................................. 56
Message Sign Schedules window .................. 118
Max II ................................................................ 56
Message Sign Schedules window .................. 176
Max Initial.................................................... 65, 76
Max Presence................................................... 76
Message Sign Scheduling
utilizing........................................................ 161
Max Queue Time .............................................. 56
Message Sign Scheduling .............................. 161
Max Recall .................................................. 56, 65
Message Sign Summary 109, 117, 118, 120, 121,
176
Max Time .......................................................... 56
Max Vehicle Recall ........................................... 76
Maximum Ambient Temperature .................... 113
Message Sign toolbar ............... 23, 107, 122, 127
Message Type................................................. 109
Maximum Cabinet Temperature ..................... 113
Messages
SME-Displaying .......................................... 111
Maximum Init Time ........................................... 56
Messages........................................................ 111
Maximum Limit.................................................. 56
Methods/tools.................................................. 207
Maximum Step.................................................. 56
Microsoft Office application ................................. 1
MCE.................................................... 56, 65, 236
Microsoft Windows™ Services.......................... 28
Mdb file ........................................................... 225
Microsoft® Paint.............................................. 139
MDI item ......................................................... 218
Middle................................ 33, 81, 83, 85, 92, 190
Media Access Control..................................... 236
MIlitary Time.................................................... 237
Medium Small Size ......................................... 153
Military’ ............................................................ 184
Member........................... 37, 48, 51, 52, 213, 218
Min .............................................................. 56, 65
Memory......... 76, 90, 92, 114, 184, 186, 235, 238
Min Cycle Length .............................................. 56
Memory Management..................................... 114
Min Duration...................................................... 76
Menu item ....................................... 157, 158, 218
Min Ext Time ..................................................... 56
Menus ............................................................... 10
Min Gap....................................................... 65, 76
Message Commands...................................... 109
Min Green ................................................... 65, 76
Message Defaults ........................... 112, 113, 114
Min Length ........................................................ 65
275
Min Presence .................................................... 65
Monitor Polarity..................................................56
Min Recall ................................................... 56, 65
Monitor Port .......................................................65
Min Red Revert ................................................. 65
Monitoring Alarms....189, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202
Min Time ........................................................... 56
Monthly ............................................................184
Min Vehicle Recall............................................. 76
Months...........................56, 65, 76, 118, 176, 184
Min Walk ........................................................... 76
More roadways ....................................53, 88, 136
Minimized Windows .......................................... 15
Mouse
Uses ..............................................................15
Using.............................................................14
Minimum............................................................ 56
Minimum Ambient Temperature...................... 113
Minimum Cabinet Temperature....................... 113
Misc ................................................................... 56
Moving Text .....................................................111
Moving Text Editing .........................................111
Mr 4
Missing
and/or.......................................................... 127
MSCLR ............................................................237
Missing ............................................................ 127
MULTI Msg ......................................................111
MMU................................................ 234, 237, 240
MULTI Msg window .................................109, 112
MMU/Secondary Enables ................................. 65
MULTI string ....................................................110
MOD PHS ......................................................... 65
Multifunction Management Unit ...............234, 237
Mode ....56, 65, 76, 101, 113, 114, 216, 234, 237,
240
Multisonics
number ....................................5, 178, 233, 238
Mode during .................................................... 216
Mode/Value/Exceeded .................................... 120
Model .5, 55, 76, 92, 99, 114, 165, 178, 207, 233,
236, 238, 240
Multisonics...........................................................5
Multisonics.........................................................55
Multisonics.........................................................56
Multisonics.......................................................178
Modem Init ........................................................ 65
Multisonics.......................................................233
Modem Init String .............................................. 56
Multisonics.......................................................237
Modifying
Existing Device Group .......... 47, 48, 50, 51, 52
Existing Group .............................................. 51
IQCentral .................................................... 221
Layer's ........................................................ 148
Scheduled Task .......................................... 185
Multisonics.......................................................238
Module
Managing ...................................................... 15
Multisonics OSAM ...........................................178
Module Control ................................................ 218
Module Navigation ............................................ 33
Module Windows
Managing .................................................. 7, 15
Module Windows................................................. 7
Module Windows............................................... 15
Module Windows............................................... 92
Module Windows............................................... 99
MOE .......................................................... 65, 237
Monitor ...1, 29, 39, 47, 56, 65, 85, 103, 107, 120,
161, 165, 168, 171, 189, 195, 200, 216, 233,
234, 237, 239, 240
276
Multisonics 820A
support ............................................................5
Multisonics 820A .................................................5
Multisonics 820A Controllers .............................55
Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controllers..55, 178
My Computer ...........................................178, 186
N
Name -- Entered ................................................38
Name suggests................................................161
Naming Convention .........................................178
National Electrical Manufacturers Association234,
237
National Transportation ....1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40,
42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158,
159, 163, 169, 172, 184, 234, 236, 237, 238,
239, 240
Index
Navigating
IQCentral ...................................................... 34
Message Signs................................... 118, 176
Navigation......................................................... 33
NEMA ....................................................... 65, 237
New.... 5, 7, 10, 19, 25, 34, 39, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51,
55, 56, 83, 85, 88, 92, 99, 101, 104, 109, 110,
111, 112, 114, 120, 122, 129, 130, 131, 133,
138, 139, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 153, 157,
158, 160, 163, 172, 178, 184, 186, 189, 197,
202, 207, 209, 212, 213, 214, 229, 233
New Line ......................................................... 110
New listing....................................................... 209
New Map ......................................... 138, 139, 145
New Map button .............................................. 138
New Message
Add ............................................................. 109
New Message ................................................. 109
New Message ................................................. 114
New Message button ...................................... 109
New Alarm
Setting Up .................................................. 190
New Page........................................ 110, 111, 112
New Alarm ...................................................... 189
New Row......................................................... 163
New Alarm ...................................................... 190
New Row button.............................................. 163
New Alarm ...................................................... 197
New Shape File
Adding ........................................................ 149
New Alarm Condition
Creating...................................................... 197
New Page button............................................. 112
New Shape File............................................... 149
New Alarm Condition ...................................... 197
New Task button ............................................. 184
New BMP Map
Adding ........................................................ 138
New User
Adding ........................................................ 212
New BMP Map................................................ 138
New User ................................................ 7, 19, 25
New Connection ............................................... 45
New User ........................................................ 212
New Device....................... 5, 34, 39, 46, 104, 131
New User ........................................................ 212
New Device Group
Creating............................................ 47, 48, 52
New User Account
Adding ........................................................ 212
New Device Group............................................ 47
New User Account .......................................... 212
New Device Group............................................ 47
New Year's Day ................................................ 56
New Device Group............................................ 48
New Year's Eve................................................. 56
New Device Group............................................ 52
Next.. 5, 10, 15, 33, 39, 48, 51, 65, 76, 81, 86, 88,
116, 118, 120, 124, 136, 139, 145, 152, 153,
175, 176, 184, 186, 189, 197, 205, 209, 216,
223, 231
New Device Type.............................................. 46
New GIS Map
Adding ........................................................ 144
New GIS Map ................................................. 144
New Group button
press ...................................................... 48, 50
New Group button............................................. 48
New Group button............................................. 50
Next On Outputs ............................................... 65
Next Preempt .................................................... 76
Nl 110
No
selecting ..................................................... 148
New Icon
Select Add.................................................. 229
No..... 1, 10, 26, 28, 29, 36, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 48,
50, 56, 65, 76, 80, 92, 99, 105, 114, 118, 120,
122, 124, 128, 144
New Icon................................................. 228, 229
No.................................................................... 148
New Icon......................................................... 229
No Early ............................................................ 65
New Layer button
Press .......................................................... 149
No Early Coord Ped .......................................... 65
New Layer button............................................ 149
No Early Release .............................................. 65
No Error........................................................... 122
277
No PCL Offset Adj............................................. 65
switch ............................................................33
No Skip........................................................ 56, 65
NTCIP Device Status window............................33
Node Icon ........................................................ 190
NTCIP MIB ........................................................46
Non Lock Detector Memory .............................. 76
Non-Actuated II Phase ...................................... 56
NTCIP Server
Double-clicking..............................................28
Quick History.................................................28
Tooltip ...........................................................28
None................................................ 134, 172, 186
NTCIP Server ....................................................26
Non-Locking Memory ........................................ 76
NTCIP Server ....................................................28
Non-NEMA88, 101, 165, 172, 174, 175, 184, 236,
238
NTCIP Server ....................................................30
Non-Actuated .................................................... 56
Non-NTCIP........................................................ 55
Normal
return ............................................................ 26
Normal operating....................................... 32, 114
Normal operating mode................................... 101
Normal Operation.................................... 101, 236
Normal/Dynamic.............................................. 163
Normally, syncing.............................................. 26
Northbound Thru ............................................... 56
NTCIP Server icon.............................................28
NTCIP Server Quick History
Viewing .........................................................28
NTCIP Server Quick History..............................28
NTCIP Server Status .........................................28
NTCIP Server Status Icon .........26, 29, 30, 32, 33
NTCIP Service...................................................28
NTCIP-capable ..................................................10
NTCIP-compatible .............................................24
Not Accessible ................................................ 218
Num
Cycles ...........................................................56
Minutes .........................................................56
NOT create........................................................ 48
Num ...................................................................56
Notes About Configuring Map Polling
Alarm Monitoring......................................... 165
O
NOT..................................................... 48, 50, 212
Notes About Configuring Map Polling ............. 165
Np.................................................................... 110
NTCIP Camera
Connecting.................................................. 103
NTCIP Camera.................................................. 10
NTCIP Camera................................................ 103
NTCIP Camera Browser
Opens ........................................................... 10
NTCIP Camera Browser ................................... 10
O/L Card Enable................................................65
O/L Sig Heads ...................................................65
Object
ALL..............................................................168
Object .1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81,
83, 86, 88, 97, 98, 104, 107, 120, 122, 124,
136, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 165
Object – Shows ...............................................163
Objects list
populate ......................................................169
NTCIP communciations protocol
manages using ................. 1, 10, 161, 175, 229
Objects list ...............................................163, 165
NTCIP communciations protocol......................... 1
Objects list .......................................................172
NTCIP Data
Tells ............................................................ 172
Occupancy.................................................76, 165
NTCIP Data ..................................................... 172
Objects list .......................................................169
October 2006.......................................................5
NTCIP Data ..................................................... 190
Oeprator
allows ..........................................................110
NTCIP Device ................................................. 122
Oeprator ..........................................................110
NTCIP Device Status ............................ 30, 42, 43
Off
Logging .................................................8, 9, 36
NTCIP Device Status window
278
Index
Offline Count
Set .............................................................. 175
Managing........................ 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33
Offline Count................................................... 175
Opening
Managing...................................................... 33
Offset ............................ 56, 65, 76, 101, 114, 239
Opening............................................................. 33
Offset Entry....................................................... 65
Opens BlockBuilder........................................... 34
Offset Reference............................................... 56
Opens FormBuilder ........................................... 34
Offset Seek ....................................................... 65
Offset Seeking Mode ........................................ 65
Operating Manual
IQCentral ........................................................ 1
OID ................................................. 163, 169, 238
Operating Manual................................................ 1
OID Length ..................................................... 169
OLA................................................................. 238
Operations.... 1, 10, 26, 30, 34, 37, 51, 53, 81, 85,
92, 101, 107, 113, 114, 116, 122, 127, 182,
207, 211, 212, 213, 218, 223, 227, 233, 234,
235, 237, 239
OLP................................................................. 238
Operations, Maintenance ................ 212, 213, 218
Omit Strategy Max ............................................ 56
Operations/Maintenance/Administration ......... 214
ON .................................... 85, 101, 202, 235, 238
Operator, Manager............................................ 33
On/off ............................................ 56, 76, 85, 163
Operators1, 10, 29, 33, 36, 47, 53, 101, 103, 105,
107, 110, 114, 118, 130, 131, 145, 148, 152,
176, 182, 190, 205, 218, 221, 224, 232
OL A-P .............................................................. 65
On/off switch ................................................... 163
On/Off/TOD....................................................... 65
Onboard.......................................................... 114
Option opens
window.......................................................... 40
Once
source .......................................................... 99
Option opens..................................................... 40
ONE ................................................................ 175
Options dialog ................................................. 186
Only marks
device........................................................... 30
Options submenu .................................... 104, 171
Option opens................................................... 195
Only marks........................................................ 30
Options window
open............................................................ 186
Only polling ..................................................... 163
Options window............................................... 178
Only want.......................................................... 81
Options window............................................... 186
Onto
Logging ................................................ 8, 9, 36
Order .... 10, 48, 92, 101, 131, 143, 152, 159, 169,
178, 212, 218, 221, 239
Onto .................................................................... 8
OS ............................................................. 10, 238
Onto .................................................................... 9
OSAM................................................................ 56
Onto .................................................................. 36
OSAM 32............................................................. 5
Onto ................................................................ 137
OSAM masters................................................ 178
Open button
press .......................................................... 149
OSAM-32 ............................................ 56, 64, 238
Open button .................................................... 138
OSAM-32 Master
Open dialog .................................................... 149
OSAM-32 Master .............................................. 56
Open file dialog
open ........................................................... 202
OSAM-32 Master .............................................. 64
Open file dialog............................................... 202
Open IQCentral....................................... 134, 181
Open Microsoft Excel...................................... 208
Open Modules
Other Error Description ................................... 114
Other polling.............................................. 10, 174
Other Traffic Sign Management ...................... 122
Other, Local..................................................... 114
279
Other, None..................................................... 114
Out ...9, 10, 29, 34, 53, 65, 92, 98, 104, 121, 122,
149, 152, 153, 161, 163, 165, 178, 207, 213
Outline ....................................................... 33, 143
OutlineColorBlue ............................................. 134
Parameters ...1, 5, 7, 8, 10, 20, 37, 39, 43, 46, 56,
64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109,
114, 118, 120, 130, 131, 133, 134, 138, 143,
145, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 171, 172,
174, 175, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186
OutlineColorGreen .......................................... 134
Parameters Required
Connection Type...........................................45
OutlineColorRed.............................................. 134
Parameters Required ........................................45
Output ....................................................... 65, 124
Parity .................................................................65
Output Actions
row .............................................................. 124
Passage Sequence/ Red Revert .......................65
Output Actions................................................. 124
Over
Hovering ..................................... 26, 28, 29, 30
Overhead Sign .................................................. 42
Overlap.................................. 56, 65, 76, 165, 238
Overlap Dont Walk ............................................ 65
Overlap Min ....................................................... 65
Overlap Min Walk .............................................. 65
Overlap Red ................................................ 56, 65
Overlap Setup ................................................... 76
Overlaps A-P ..................................................... 65
Override FDW ................................................... 56
Override Max Recall.......................................... 56
Override Min Greens ......................................... 56
Override Min Recall........................................... 56
Override Pattern .............................................. 101
Overview
Devices Module ............................................ 38
Map Management....................................... 137
Password
Change .......................................................214
Changing.....................................................212
Setting.........................................212, 213, 215
Password...........................8, 10, 34, 56, 122, 211
Paths ...............................................................134
Pattern Selection .............................................101
Patterns .............................1, 47, 65, 76, 101, 165
PC's .................................................................174
PDF file..............................................................10
PE..............................................................65, 238
Ped ................................................56, 65, 76, 165
Ped Assignments...............................................65
Ped Clearance...................................................56
Ped Detector Diag .............................................65
Ped Detectors..............................................65, 76
Ped Don't Walks ................................................56
Ped O/L Sig Heads............................................65
Ped Omit............................................................65
Ped Perm...........................................................65
Overview - GIS Map Layers ............................ 134
Ped Recall ...................................................56, 65
P
Ped Recycle ................................................56, 65
PA ................................................................... 238
Page ...5, 56, 65, 76, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 110, 111,
112, 114, 153, 171, 205
Page Justification ............................................ 110
Page Off .................................................. 111, 112
Page On .................................................. 111, 112
Page On/Off .................................................... 110
Parameters
Setting......................................................... 202
Ped Signal Heads..............................................65
Pedestrian
either ...............................................................4
Pedestrian ...........................................................4
Pedestrian Call ..................................................83
Pedestrian Clearance ........................................83
Pedestrian Detectors 1-8...................................76
Pedestrian Permissive
End..............................................................235
Pedestrian Permissive.....................................235
Pedestrian Recall ..............................................76
Peek 3000
280
Index
support ........................................................... 5
Opens ..................................................... 10, 34
Peek 3000........................................................... 5
Place Icon ......................................................... 10
Peek 3000E Controllers...................... 55, 65, 178
Place Icon ......................................................... 34
Peek Hardware ................................................. 65
Place Icon ......................................................... 95
Peek M3000 Master Controllers ....................... 55
Place Icon ....................................................... 152
Peek M3000E ................................................. 178
Place Icon on Map ........................ 10, 20, 34, 152
Peek M3000E Master Controller..................... 178
Place On ................................... 83, 107, 153, 231
Peek Traffic.... 1, 4, 55, 64, 76, 80, 233, 236, 238,
240
PlaceAbove ..................................................... 134
Peek Traffic Corporation......... 233, 236, 238, 240
Performing
Batch Update ..................... 163, 165, 168, 169
Central Override ........................................... 53
Period ............................................................... 65
Period/State ...................................................... 76
Perm Strategy................................................... 56
Permissive
End ............................................................. 235
Permissive .................................................. 65, 92
Permissive ...................................................... 235
PlaceBelow ..................................................... 134
PlaceOn .......................................................... 134
Plan ................................................... 65, 118, 176
Plan Phase........................................................ 65
Plans 1-3 Inhibits
Det 1-12........................................................ 65
Plans 1-3 Inhibits............................................... 65
Play Wave File ................................................ 202
Point
Alarm .......................................................... 165
CMU ................................................... 234, 240
Phase... 56, 65, 76, 83, 85, 86, 92, 165, 172, 202,
212, 233, 234, 235, 236, 238, 239
Point1, 5, 10, 20, 28, 34, 81, 92, 97, 98, 131, 133,
134, 137, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149,
150, 152, 153, 158, 159, 160, 163
Phase Allocation ............................................... 65
Point ................................................................ 165
Phase Association ............................................ 56
POL A-H............................................................ 65
Phase Input....................................................... 92
Poll Data Configuration
Message Signs ................................... 118, 176
Phase NEXT ..................................................... 83
Phase ON ................................................... 65, 83
Phase Signal Heads ......................................... 65
PHases ............................................................. 76
PhaseStatusGroup ................................... 86, 172
PhaseStatusGroupGreens.............................. 172
PhaseStatusGroupGreens object ................... 172
PhaseStatusGroupGreens.1............................. 86
Phone ............................................................... 65
Physical Address .............................................. 65
Pick ......................... 50, 81, 97, 98, 160, 165, 178
Piece
hardware .......................... 1, 10, 161, 175, 229
Piezo......................................... 83, 172, 233, 234
Pixel Fail Type ................................................ 114
Pixels Tab ....................................................... 114
Place............................................................... 153
Place Icon
Poll Data Configuration ..................................... 20
Poll Data Configuration ................................... 118
Poll Data Configuration ................................... 176
Poll Frequency .......................................... 10, 163
Poll Persistence
Set .............................................................. 175
Poll Persistence .............................................. 175
Poll When........................................................ 165
Poll When Map Closed.................................... 165
Polling
Assistant ..................................................... 163
choosing ..................................................... 163
Configuration ................................................ 19
Devices....................................................... 123
Intro ............................................................ 171
IQCentral Alarms ........................................ 165
open............................................................ 169
Opens ..................................................... 10, 34
Options ......................................................... 10
Rate ............................................................ 159
281
row .............................................................. 163
Power Supplies................................................116
Polling Assistant
Caution - Using ........................................... 165
Using........................................................... 195
Pre-Configured ................................................211
Polling Assistant.......................................... 5, 163
Polling Assistant tool ....................................... 165
Polling Assistant window
corner.......................................................... 165
Pre-configured User Accounts.........................211
Preempt Output .................................................56
Preemption ..........................65, 76, 101, 235, 238
Preemption Override .........................................65
Preemption Override Stop Time ........................65
Polling Assistant window................................. 165
Pre-Flash Phases ..............................................56
Polling Configuration ......................... 10, 163, 168
Preload
need ............................................................137
Polling Objects list
populates .................................................... 165
Polling Objects list........................................... 163
Polling Objects list........................................... 165
Polling Options
choosing ..................................................... 163
Preload ............................................................137
Prepare
stop .............................................................233
Prepare............................................................129
Prepare............................................................233
Polling Options .................................................. 34
Preprogrammed...............................................109
Polling Options ................................................ 163
Pre-programmed .............................................109
Polling Options ................................................ 168
Present
tooltip ............................................................30
Polling Options submenu ................................ 169
Populate
Objects list .................................................. 169
Polling Objects list ...................................... 165
Populate ................................ 81, 88, 99, 104, 143
Populate Polling .......................................... 81, 88
Populate Polling Tool ........................................ 88
Populate Pooling tool ........................................ 88
Popup
show ........................................................... 202
Preset ..............................105, 111, 123, 124, 211
Preset Configuration
Loading .......................................................105
Saving .........................................................105
Preset Configuration........................................105
Preset Times ...................................................111
Press Alt-F.........................................................36
Press Alt-F4...................................................9, 36
Press Alt-m ......................................137, 148, 153
Popup .............................................................. 200
Press Remove .................................................214
Popup .............................................................. 202
Preview..........................81, 83, 85, 109, 118, 176
Popup menu
In................................................................. 200
Preview button.................................................109
Popup menu .................................................... 200
Previous...............39, 50, 118, 129, 176, 178, 195
Port.................................................................... 76
Print Coord Plans ..............................................56
Portable, Overhead ......................................... 159
Print Det Plans...................................................56
Portion
Configure Intersection window ..................... 85
Error Logs ................................................... 120
Map Viewer window............................ 157, 158
Print Form Controls ...........................................56
Position ..109, 129, 131, 144, 152, 153, 157, 158,
195
Printer Setup......................................................56
Post-Flash ......................................................... 56
Post-Flash Phases ............................................ 56
Post-Flash Red Time ........................................ 56
282
Preview window.................................................85
Print TIC Day Plans ...........................................56
Print TIC Events ................................................56
Priority ...........................29, 56, 65, 109, 124, 129
Priority Preempt.................................................56
Procedures ..............124, 128, 129, 130, 150, 200
Index
Profiles
Opens..................................................... 10, 34
RCU ................................................................ 238
Read.......................................... 34, 104, 218, 238
Profiles Module ..................................... 10, 34, 36
Read Only ............................................... 218, 238
Protocol 1, 5, 9, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55,
56, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101,
104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122,
124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159,
161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184,
205, 229, 231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,
239, 240
Read Only Memory ......................................... 238
Provides1, 5, 7, 10, 14, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25, 26, 32,
37, 38, 43, 45, 46, 48, 53, 55, 83, 85, 90, 92,
99, 105, 107, 113, 114, 120, 122, 123, 130,
131, 134, 143, 146, 157, 158, 163, 169, 178,
195, 197, 200, 202, 208, 218, 234
Ptxoy............................................................... 110
Public .............................................................. 122
Purple ............................................................... 95
Pushing
Color........................................................... 149
Pushing........................................................... 149
Read-Only allows ............................................ 218
Read-Write .............................................. 211, 218
Realtime Map Polling
open.............................................................. 88
Realtime Map Polling .................................. 86, 88
Realtime Map Polling ........................................ 88
Realtime Map Polling ...................................... 136
Realtime Map Polling ...................................... 163
Realtime Map Polling window ......................... 163
Realtime Polling
Opens ........................................................... 34
Realtime Polling ................................................ 34
Receive ... 4, 90, 92, 107, 123, 169, 172, 175, 195
Record This Event........................................... 120
Red.................................................................... 65
Q
Red Overlap ...................................................... 83
Queue Detector Presence ................................ 56
Red Revert ........................................................ 76
Queue Limit ...................................................... 76
Red Revert Override ......................................... 65
Quick History
Data Manager .............................................. 26
NTCIP Server ............................................... 28
Red Revert Time ......................................... 56, 65
Quick History .................................................... 26
Red/green ....................................................... 109
Quick History .................................................... 28
Reduce.................................................. 56, 65, 76
Quick History display .................................. 26, 28
Reduce By......................................................... 76
Red Time........................................................... 56
Reduced Green Band ..................................... 238
Ref
end................................................................ 65
Ref..................................................................... 65
Reference Lost............................................ 26, 28
Referencing
Data Manager............................................... 26
Referencing....................................................... 26
R
Radio button ................................................... 109
RAM................................................................ 114
Range ............... 92, 109, 124, 149, 186, 195, 224
Rate
Polling ........................................................ 159
Refresh button
clicking........................................................ 113
Refresh button........................................... 98, 113
Refresh button................................................. 113
Refresh button................................................. 114
Refresh From Controller.................................... 97
Refresh Server Polling button ......................... 172
283
Refresh View button........................................ 195
Reset ...........................................65, 76, 114, 128
Release
IQCentral ................................................ 5, 101
Responding .................................................26, 30
Release notes
all .................................................................... 5
update......................................................... 225
Release notes ..................................................... 5
Release notes ................................................. 225
Remaining
Administration ............................................. 212
Responding Devices..................26, 28, 29, 32, 33
Response Time Default .....................................45
Rest
IQCentral.....................................................178
Rest ...............................56, 65, 76, 148, 169, 172
Rest .................................................................178
Rest .................................................................178
Remaining ....................................................... 212
Rest .................................................................221
Remember
Save............................................................ 148
Rest .................................................................227
Remop............................................................... 56
Restore Module ...............................5, 10, 34, 225
Remop Options ................................................. 56
Restore’ ...........................................................225
Remop Protocol ................................................ 56
Restoring .......................................10, 21, 34, 221
Remop Tel......................................................... 56
Remote Communications Unit ........................ 238
Result
detector ...........................................................4
Remove Row................................................... 163
Result ..................................................................4
Remove View button ....................................... 144
Retrieve Selected Msg button .........................109
Repeat 86, 88, 118, 129, 134, 136, 138, 152, 153,
172, 175, 176, 178, 184, 186, 202
Retrieved during ........................................10, 195
Repeat Interval ................................................ 202
Return Veh Calls ...............................................56
Report Data
Exporting..................................................... 208
Returned advising............................................122
Report Data ..................................................... 208
Report Filters
Applying ...................................................... 205
Rest-in-Walk ......................................................56
Retry Count Default ...........................................45
Revert-if-Green Phases.....................................56
Revert-in-Queue Phases ...................................56
RGB...........................................................65, 238
Report Filters................................................... 205
RGB Percentage ...............................................65
Report Selection........................ 10, 205, 208, 209
Right-click .....10, 14, 90, 129, 178, 186, 190, 195,
197, 202, 209
Report Selection Module................................. 205
Reports
Generating Data ......................................... 207
Reports............................................................ 205
Reports............................................................ 207
Reports Interface............................................. 205
Reports takes .................................................. 209
Reports. Opens
IQCentral Reports......................................... 10
Rings 1-4 ...........................................................76
ROM ................................................................238
Routing
SNMP..........................................................104
Routing ............................................................104
Row
Output Action ..............................................124
Polling .........................................................163
Row ...................................42, 45, 88, 97, 98, 104
Reports. Opens ................................................. 10
Rows Allocated................................................120
Representations ........................ 99, 131, 163, 202
Rows Used ......................................................120
Request
login ................................................................ 4
RS-232 ............................................................236
Require consulting .......................................... 114
284
RTF..................................................................208
RTS ...................................................................65
Index
RTS/CTS Delay ................................................ 56
Scenario .......................................................... 129
Rules................... 86, 92, 122, 134, 175, 190, 208
Scenario .......................................................... 129
Run Diagnostics button................................... 116
Scenario .......................................................... 130
S
Scenario Administration .................................. 127
Sample screen shown below .......................... 110
Save All............................................. 48, 137, 163
Save All button
press .......................................................... 163
Scenario Group ............................................... 129
Scenario occurring .......................................... 130
Scenario Sign Group....................................... 129
SCENARIOS ................................................... 129
Save All button.................................................. 48
Scenarios & Amber Alerts ........................... 23, 25
Save All button................................................ 163
Scenarios/Amber Alerts .................................... 34
Save As .................................................. 152, 208
Schedule Number ................................... 118, 176
Save Changes button
press .................................................. 184, 186
Save Changes button ..................................... 184
Scheduled Task
Adding ........................................................ 184
Deleting ...................................................... 186
Modifying .................................................... 185
Scheduled Task ...................................... 178, 182
Scheduled Task .............................................. 184
Save Group button
Press ...................................................... 50, 51
Scheduled Task .............................................. 185
Save Group button............................................ 48
Scheduled Task .............................................. 186
Scheduled Task Editor .................................... 182
Scheduler adds
scheduled ................................................... 178
Save Icon Position .......................................... 159
Scheduler adds ............................................... 178
Save Row ....................................................... 163
Save Row button
choose........................................................ 163
Scheduler Interface
Launching ................................................... 181
Using .......................................................... 182
Save Row button ............................................ 163
Scheduler Interface ......................................... 178
Save View....................................... 144, 145, 160
Scheduler v1.0 ................................................ 178
Saved during................................................... 235
Scheduler window ................................... 178, 182
Scenario
Activating.................................................... 127
Configuring ................................................. 127
Creating...................................................... 129
Displaying................................................... 129
Expand ............................................... 128, 129
launch......................................................... 127
open ........................................................... 129
Opens..................................................... 10, 34
trigger ......................................................... 124
type ............................................................ 127
Scheduler’s Complete ..................................... 182
Scenario.............................................................. 1
Scenario............................................................ 10
Scenario............................................................ 34
Scenario.......................................................... 124
Scenario.......................................................... 127
Scenario.......................................................... 128
Scheduler’s Toolbar ........................................ 182
Schedules ............................................... 118, 176
Schedules Module............................. 34, 118, 176
Scheduling Events .............................. 1, 161, 195
Screen
Peek 3000E .................................................. 92
Screen..................................... 5, 8, 10, 42, 43, 45
SDLC............................................................... 239
Search................................................................. 1
Second meaning
database 1, 7, 8, 20, 39, 46, 81, 90, 92, 95, 98,
99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 131, 133, 138, 150,
153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 171, 172, 176, 178,
182, 184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213, 221, 223,
225, 227, 229, 232, 235, 240
285
Secondary 1-16 ................................................. 65
Semi-Actuated .........................................233, 239
Second-by-Second.......................................... 165
Send And Display button .................................109
Second-by-Second Status .............................. 165
Send button
Press ...........................................................101
Section1, 5, 10, 32, 43, 53, 85, 86, 161, 163, 171,
178, 189, 209, 221
Send button .......................................................98
Security
Managing .................................... 122, 211, 216
Send button .....................................................101
Security ...1, 8, 9, 10, 33, 34, 36, 56, 65, 101, 107
Security Code.................................................... 65
Sending
Data ..............................................................98
Security issues ................................................ 202
Sending .............................................................98
Security Level
Changing ............................ 212, 213, 214, 215
Select.......................................................... 214
Setting......................................................... 213
Separate states ..9, 109, 113, 117, 118, 122, 128,
131, 163, 176, 234
Security Level.............................................. 10, 33
Security Management ..................................... 101
Security Module .............................................. 122
See Adding
Icon ............................................................. 231
See Adding...................................................... 231
See 'Force Off ................................................. 235
See 'Split ......................................................... 239
Select Add
New Icon..................................................... 229
Select Add....................................................... 229
Select All ....................................... 48, 97, 98, 165
Select Create New Map View ......................... 144
Send Only........................................................109
September 15 ......................................................1
September 2007 ..................................................5
September 2008 ..................................................5
Seq ....................................................................56
Sequence
device which manages.1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55,
81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116,
118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178,
182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,
237, 238, 240
manages .....................................152, 165, 178
Sequence/Startup..............................................65
Serial Interface ................................................239
Serv ...................................................................65
Set 1-4 ...............................................................65
Select Form..................................................... 218
Set Up
Basic Steps ...................................................81
New Alarm ..................................................190
Select New ........................ 46, 104, 129, 130, 146
Set Up................................................1, 10, 54, 81
Select None....................................................... 48
Set Up..............................................................227
Select Objects ......................................... 124, 172
Setting
Map .............................................................134
Select Day Plan....................................... 118, 176
Select OK ................................................ 178, 186
Select Open .................................................... 186
Selected Cell ..................................................... 97
Selected Device ... 43, 81, 92, 104, 120, 163, 195,
205
Selected Device Type ............................... 81, 163
Selected Event Group Only............................. 120
Selected Group ................................................. 48
Selected Msg button ....................................... 109
Setting .............................................................134
Setting Device Addresses ...............................104
Setting Device Zoom Levels............................153
Setting Up Map Polling
Intersection Icons..................................88, 136
Setting Up Map Polling ......................................88
Setting Up Map Polling ....................................136
Setting up polling .....................................165, 195
Selecting Copy Devices .................................... 99
Settings Between Controllers
Copying.........................................................99
Self-explanatory .............................................. 182
Settings Between Controllers ............................99
286
Index
Settings button................................................ 202
Sign Housing Minimum Temperature ............. 113
Settings window...................................... 197, 202
Sign Information ...................................... 113, 114
Setup ................................................................ 65
Sign Message Edit .................................. 110, 129
Several... 15, 26, 47, 90, 113, 114, 120, 159, 161,
171, 172, 174, 209, 216, 227
Sign Message Edit Screen.............................. 110
Severity
Choose ....................................................... 197
Sign Message Edit window
open............................................................ 109
Sign Message Edit window ............................. 109
Severity............................................. 29, 190, 195
Sign Message Edit window ............................. 110
SF1-6 Feedback Detected................................ 56
Sign Message Editor ............................... 110, 111
Shape ............... 56, 134, 143, 146, 148, 149, 150
Sign Scheduler................................................ 107
Shape file................ 134, 143, 146, 148, 149, 150
Sign Status...................................... 113, 157, 158
ShapeDot.......................................................... 85
Short ............................................................... 165
Sign Status window
move................................................... 157, 158
Short Alarms ................................................... 165
Sign Status window......................................... 157
Short Error Status - This ................................. 114
Sign Status window......................................... 158
Show Popup ................................................... 202
Sign Summary/Diagnostics ............................. 116
Shows
About window ......................................... 10, 34
COM ............................................................. 38
IP .................................................................. 38
popup ......................................................... 202
Standard View .............................................. 33
Sign Summary/Sign Status ............................. 116
Shows ............................................................. 159
Showthe.................................................. 236, 240
Shp ................................................................. 134
Sign
current displaying ....................................... 109
detail display .............................................. 153
Icon .................................................... 157, 158
Send ........................................................... 117
Sign.. 1, 5, 8, 9, 10, 23, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,
46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101,
104, 105, 107
Sign Access .................................................... 113
Sign Type ................................................ 110, 113
Sign View ........................................................ 159
Sign Volts ........................................................ 113
Sign Zoom....................................................... 159
Signal activation .................................................. 4
Signal Group Corporation ............................... 238
Signshave ............................................... 236, 240
Simple .... 10, 34, 43, 48, 50, 83, 85, 92, 103, 104,
120, 122, 137, 153, 157, 158, 169, 172, 184,
190, 202, 209, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239
Simple binary ON/OFF...................................... 85
Simple binary ON/OFF operation described ..... 85
Simple listing
only ............................................................... 48
Simple listing ..................................................... 48
Sign Brightness Control
Opens........................................................... 10
Simple Numeric Data ........................................ 92
Sign Brightness Control .................................... 10
Simple ON/OFF................................................. 85
Sign Configuration .......................................... 113
Simulation ....................................................... 114
Sign Control Form........................................... 109
Simult ................................................................ 65
Sign Control Module
open ........................................................... 110
Simultaneous Gap Disable ............................... 76
Sign Control Module ................................. 10, 109
Simultaneous Gap Phases ............................... 56
Sign Control Module ....................................... 110
Simultaneous Max Phases ............................... 56
Simultaneous Gap Out...................................... 65
Sign Group.............................................. 129, 130
Sign Housing Maximum Temperature ............ 113
287
SINCE MODIFICATION TO ANY OTHER TABLE
IN THE DATABASE WHILE YOU ARE
WORKING IN THE FILE COULD RENDER
YOUR ......................................................... 221
Single Device .............................. 42, 43, 163, 165
Single Device Status ................................... 42, 43
Size
Changing ............................................ 157, 158
Source .............................................10, 65, 76, 95
Source Data
Generating ..................................................207
Source Data.....................................................207
Source Data.....................................................209
Southbound Thru...............................................56
SP....................................................................239
Size ..................................... 34, 99, 134, 149, 153
Special Function 1-4 Polarity.............................56
Size Event Log .................................... 10, 21, 223
Speed ....................5, 14, 53, 56, 65, 99, 234, 235
Size Event Log Module ................................... 223
Speed Trap........................................................65
SME-Advanced ............................................... 110
Speed Trap Type...............................................56
SME-Displaying
Message ..................................................... 111
SPL..................................................................239
SME-Displaying............................................... 111
Split Coord Phase..............................................76
SME-Displaying............................................... 112
Split Inhibits .......................................................65
SME-Moving Text............................................ 111
Split Matrix.........................................................65
editing ......................................................... 122
Use ............................................................. 122
Splits/Cycle........................................................65
SNMP Device Security. 10, 21, 23, 107, 109, 113,
117, 118, 120, 121
Spreadsheet Column Selection .......................124
Split..........56, 65, 76, 92, 101, 172, 212, 233, 239
Spreadsheet ............................................123, 124
SNMP Device Security.................................... 122
Spreadsheet Column Selection window
Devices .......................................................124
Spreadsheet Column Selection window ..........124
Spring
Weed.............................................................56
SNMP Device Security Module
launch ......................................................... 122
SNMP Device Security Module ....................... 122
SNMP Device Security Module ....................... 122
Soft Recall ................................................... 56, 65
Soft Return ........................................................ 65
Soft Vehicle Recall ............................................ 76
Spring ................................................................56
Standard ...1, 5, 10, 19, 25, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42,
43, 46, 55, 56, 81, 104, 120, 122, 123, 124,
130, 145, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172, 184,
186, 202, 205, 211, 223, 228, 233, 234, 236,
237, 238, 239, 240
Standard Operating .................................124, 130
Software company owned................. 55, 233, 238
Standard Operating Procedure
Creating ......................................................129
Software Versions
Device......................................................... 114
Standard Operating Procedure........................124
Software Versions ........................................... 114
Solid ................................................................ 233
Some IQCentral ................................................ 15
SOP
define .......................................................... 130
SOP................................................................. 124
SOP................................................................. 130
Sound .............................................................. 202
Source
Once ............................................................. 99
288
Standard Preempt .............................................56
Standard toolbar
Buttons ..........................................................19
Standard toolbar ................................................19
Standard View
Index
showing ........................................................ 33
STMP Polling .................................................... 20
Standard View .................................................. 33
STMP Polling .................................................... 34
Standard, Hide................................................ 159
STMP Polling .................................................. 169
Start Absence Mon Hour .................................. 65
Stop................................................................. 233
Start building
report .......................................................... 209
Stop Bits............................................................ 56
Start building................................................... 209
Stop Test......................................................... 202
Start Perm......................................................... 56
Storing
bitmap......................................................... 137
Map Data .................................................... 137
Start Permissive.............................................. 239
Storing............................................................. 137
Start Veh Calls.................................................. 56
Storing............................................................. 163
Started
Green ......................................................... 239
Str/Stp ............................................................... 65
Started ... 1, 7, 26, 28, 32, 56, 65, 76, 81, 92, 118,
133, 134, 149, 153, 163, 175, 176, 178, 181,
189, 205, 207, 209, 213, 237, 239
Structure... 1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55,
81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169,
172, 184, 208, 232, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239,
240
Start Date........................................................ 205
Started ............................................................ 239
Started With Maps
Getting........................................................ 133
Straight-forward............................................... 185
Structured Export ............................................ 208
Style ............................................ 10, 85, 134, 148
Started With Maps .......................................... 133
Submenu......................................................... 169
Startup Red Time.............................................. 65
Subsystem ................................................ 26, 116
Startup, Card .................................................... 65
Subsystem Status Bar....................................... 26
State Traffic .................................................... 233
Such
location ........................................... 53, 88, 136
Status
All Devices ................................................... 42
Central judges ............................................ 171
Devices Responding .................................... 30
expect......................................................... 161
select.......................................................... 195
Viewing............................................... 157, 158
Status...................... 1, 5, 7, 10, 14, 15, 26, 28, 29
Status Bar ................................................... 26, 33
Status Bar Overview ........... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33
Status Module. 30, 34, 42, 43, 189, 195, 200, 202
Status window
open ................................................... 157, 158
Status window............................................. 29, 33
Such .................. 1, 7, 8, 10, 20, 22, 34, 37, 39, 46
Such .................................................................. 53
Summary............................. 10, 34, 113, 114, 200
Super Password.............................................. 122
Super Password.............................................. 122
Support
Multisonics 820A ............................................ 5
Peek 3000 ...................................................... 5
Traconex 390CJ ............................................. 5
Transyt 1880EL .............................................. 5
Supported Traffic Controllers ............................ 55
SW Reset ........................................................ 114
Status window................................................. 200
Switching
Between Open Modules ............................... 15
comms ........................................................ 175
IQCentral ...................................................... 34
NTCIP Device Status window....................... 33
Thumbnail..................................................... 85
Stay Logged On’ button .................................... 36
Switching........................................................... 15
STMP Polling
Opens..................................................... 10, 34
Symbol Characteristics
set............................................................... 149
STMP Polling .................................................... 10
Symbol Characteristics ................................... 149
Status window................................................. 157
Status window................................................. 158
Status window................................................. 195
289
Symbols ............................................ 95, 148, 149
SymbolSize ..................................................... 134
SymbolType .................................................... 134
Sync Pulses ...................................................... 65
Sync Reference................................................. 65
Synced ........................ 26, 37, 47, 56, 65, 76, 171
Synchronization....................................... 174, 236
Synchronous Data Link Control ...................... 239
Syntax Error .................................................... 114
System
choose ........................................................ 197
event log records ........................................ 223
System .1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 21, 30, 32, 33, 34,
36, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 48, 53, 55, 56,
64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98,
99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 109, 110, 113,
114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 127, 129,
131, 133, 134, 136, 137, 138, 139, 143, 144,
145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158,
159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 169, 171, 172, 174,
175, 176, 178, 181, 182, 184, 186, 189, 190,
195
System Date...................................................... 32
System Maintenance toolbar..................... 21, 223
System Scheduler ........................................... 178
System Sensor Assignments ............................ 65
TblMapLayerDetail
Open ...........................................................134
TblMapLayerDetail ..........................................134
TCP/IP .............................................................239
Tech.support@peektraffic.com .........................4
Tenth .........................................................65, 111
Test..........................................................138, 228
Pixel ............................................................114
Test........................................................10, 53, 65
Test – This button............................................202
Test Condition .................................................197
Test Icon button
clicking ........................................................229
Test Icon button...............................................228
Test Icon button...............................................229
Test Icon button...............................................229
Test Map Button ..............................................138
Text
Table ...........................................................208
Text.....83, 85, 109, 111, 112, 114, 143, 146, 149,
157, 158, 163, 172, 182, 184, 189, 195, 197,
202
Text..................................................................208
Text..................................................................209
System Sound ................................................. 202
Text Editing Screen
Moving ........................................................111
T
Text Editing Screen .........................................111
T/F ................................................................... 239
Thanksgiving .....................................................56
Tab
select .......................................................... 113
The ..................................................................182
Tab .......................... 1, 48, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 112
The Alarm Status.............................................200
Tab Icons .......................................................... 95
The Chapters.......................................................1
Table Cells
Color Coding................................................. 95
The communications .........................................38
Table Cells ........................................................ 95
Table menu ..................................................... 208
Task ........................ 178, 181, 182, 184, 185, 186
Task Database ................................................ 186
The Administration...................................211, 232
The Delete Group button ...................................52
The Device Add/Edit window.............................38
The Device Connection/Responding .................30
The Device Groups window...............................48
Task list ................................................... 182, 184
The Device List
right .........................................................50, 51
Task’s .............................................................. 182
The Device List..................................................50
TBC ................................................................. 239
The Device List..................................................51
TblLayers
Open ........................................................... 134
The Device List window.....................................48
TblLayers ........................................................ 134
290
The Device Specific...........................................81
Index
The Device's 9, 10, 26, 30, 33, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40,
42, 43, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 81, 83, 86,
90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 103, 104, 109, 113,
117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 128, 129, 131, 152,
153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 165, 168, 171,
172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 190, 197, 200, 205,
207, 231, 234, 236, 238
The Error Logs................................................ 120
The left.............................................................. 99
This defines..................................................... 163
This error......................................................... 114
This field.......................................................... 114
This icon.................................................... 85, 190
This list38, 48, 149, 157, 158, 159, 160, 163, 195,
197, 212
This shows ...................................................... 163
The MDI .......................................................... 218
Thismanual
structure.......................................................... 1
The Message Sign10, 23, 34, 113, 114, 118, 120,
122, 161, 176
Thismanual.......................................................... 1
The message sign Bulk Operations.................. 34
The NTCIP. 1, 5, 9, 10, 28, 30, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40,
42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95,
99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118,
120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157,
158, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175,
176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237,
238, 239, 240
The NTCIP communciations protocol .. 1, 5, 9, 10,
34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88,
90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113,
114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152,
153, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175,
176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237,
238, 239, 240
Thresholds ...................................................... 153
Thumbnail
switching....................................................... 85
Thumbnail ......................................................... 85
TIC .................................................................... 56
Tile Horizontal ............................................. 10, 34
Tile Vertical ................................................. 10, 34
Tiled Windows................................................... 15
Tiling
Horizontally................................................... 15
Vertically ....................................................... 15
Tiling.................................................................. 15
The NTCIP Server ...................................... 28, 30
Tim42
Maintenance ............................................... 213
The NTCIP Server functions............................. 28
Tim42 .............................................................. 212
The NTCIP Server up ....................................... 28
Tim42 .............................................................. 213
The only ............................................................ 48
Time .................................................................. 32
The other ........................................................ 189
Time Base Schedules 1-32 ............................... 76
The parameters .............................................. 175
Time Before Red ............................................... 76
The Polling Assistant ...................................... 165
Time Before Reduction ............................... 56, 65
The second ..................................................... 161
Time Clock ........................................................ 65
The Test Map button....................................... 138
Time Dep Ref HH.............................................. 65
The Upload/Download 1, 5, 56, 65, 76, 90, 92, 95,
97, 98
Time Dep Ref MM ............................................. 65
The Upload/Download Interface ....................... 92
The Upload/Download module ......................... 90
Time Plans
CS................................................................. 65
Theicons ................................................. 236, 240
Time Plans ........................................................ 65
These represent.............................................. 131
Time Reference Point ..................................... 239
This button ........................................ 48, 139, 172
Time Reference Signal.................................... 239
This button serves .......................................... 172
Time Synchronization............................ 1, 10, 174
This checkbox................................................. 202
Timebase .......................................................... 76
This Connections list....................................... 104
Timebase Action ............................................... 76
This control ............................................. 114, 163
Timebase Setup ................................................ 76
Time Per Actuation............................................ 56
291
Time-of-Day operations..................................... 37
Tooltip window.................................................202
Timeout ........................................... 10, 34, 36, 56
Tooltips ........................................................14, 28
Timer
intersection ................................................... 85
Top .....10, 45, 46, 48, 50, 81, 92, 95, 97, 98, 104,
114, 120, 134, 145, 146, 148, 153, 160, 163,
169, 175, 178, 182, 184, 197, 209, 212, 213,
214
Timer ................................................................. 85
Timer button .................................................... 111
Title ............................................. 15, 39, 131, 153
Traconex..........................................................240
Title Bar ............................................. 15, 131, 153
Traconex 390CJ
support ............................................................5
TMM500 .............................................................. 5
Traconex 390CJ ..................................................5
TMM-500 ........................................................... 80
Traconex 390CJ Controllers..............................55
TMM-500 ........................................................... 80
Traconex Corporation days .............................233
TMM-500 ......................................................... 240
Traconex Hardware ...........................................80
TMM-500 Master
Traconex TMM-500 Master Controllers.............55
TMM-500 Master ............................................... 80
Traffic Control .......1, 5, 53, 54, 55, 161, 233, 234,
235, 236, 237
TMM-500 Master ............................................... 80
Traffic Control Management ................................1
TO Location....................................................... 56
TO Reference.................................................... 56
Traffic Controller Log Retrieval
Scheduling ..................................................178
To/From........................................................... 149
Traffic Controller Log Retrieval........................161
TOD
COS/F........................................................... 65
Traffic Controller Log Retrieval........................178
TOD................................................................... 65
Traffic Controller Scheduler.....................118, 176
TOD................................................................. 239
Traffic Controllers/Masters ..............................152
TOD Circuits
Cycle/Offset/Split/Free.................................. 65
Traffic equipment...............................55, 233, 238
TOD Circuits...................................................... 65
TOD Revert ....................................................... 65
Toggle Size ............................................. 157, 158
Traffic Controller Management ..................53, 101
Traffic equipment brand owned ...............233, 240
Traffic log.........................................................161
Traffic Network ......................................1, 54, 101
Traffic Scheduler .....................................118, 176
Tool sets
number........................................................ 223
Traffic Sign Management ............................1, 107
Tool sets.......................................................... 223
Traffic signals
duration .......................................152, 165, 178
Toolbar
Save button................................................. 153
Traffic signals ..................................90, 97, 98, 99
Toolbar ...5, 10, 19, 22, 23, 25, 26, 107, 122, 139,
145
Toolbar button ................................................. 214
Tooltip
generates.................................................... 197
Icon ................................................... 26, 28, 30
NTCIP Server ............................................... 28
present.......................................................... 30
remove........................................................ 200
Tooltip popup
display......................................................... 200
Tooltip popup .................................................. 200
292
Trail Red ............................................................76
Trailing
Detector ........................................................65
Trailing...............................................................65
Translator Firmware ........................................178
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
....................................104, 122, 236, 237, 239
Transmitting
Block 98 ........................................................92
Transmitting.......................................................92
Transport Type ..................................................45
Index
Transyt
number ................................................... 5, 233
Transyt................................................................ 5
Transyt.............................................................. 55
Transyt.............................................................. 80
Transyt............................................................ 233
Transyt............................................................ 233
Type polling interval ........................................ 175
Type Polling window ....................................... 171
Types Module.................................................... 46
Typical Settings
Critical Alarm .............................................. 202
Informational Alarm .................................... 202
Warning Alarm............................................ 202
Typical Settings............................................... 202
Transyt............................................................ 240
Transyt 1880EL
support ........................................................... 5
U
U.S. ..................................................................... 4
Transyt 1880EL .................................................. 5
UCF................................................................... 65
Transyt EL Controllers ...................................... 55
UCF Exit............................................................ 65
Transyt EL Master Controllers .......................... 55
UCF Last ........................................................... 65
Tree ................................................................ 128
UCF Override Hold............................................ 65
Trigger
Scenario ..................................................... 124
UCF Soft Flash.................................................. 65
Trigger .......................................... 1, 10, 101, 123
Trigger Camera Preset ................................... 124
Trigger Scenario ............................................. 124
Trigger Scenario SOP..................................... 124
TS ..................................................................... 76
TS2
working ....................................................... 165
UCF/Soft Flash.................................................. 65
Uncheck ...................................................... 51, 92
Undelete............................................................ 48
Under Device Action ....................................... 120
Unit - Also........................................................ 234
Unit Config ........................................................ 65
Universal Serial Bus........................................ 240
TS2 ................................................................. 165
Unsupported.................................................... 114
TS-2 ................................................................ 234
Up
Setting ................................................ 103, 197
TS-2 ................................................................ 240
Turns................... 56, 92, 159, 163, 195, 202, 223
TXT file ........................................................... 208
Up... 1, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 26, 28, 33, 34, 38, 39, 42,
43, 45, 46, 50, 53, 56, 65, 76, 81, 83, 85, 86,
88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101
Type
Connection ................................................. 103
couple........................................................... 85
Device ........................................................ 159
Display ....................................................... 159
Grid Display................................................ 159
Message..................................................... 197
Scenario ..................................................... 127
Traffic Controller......................................... 178
use files ........................................................ 85
Up Map Polling
Setting .................................................. 88, 136
Type1, 5, 9, 10, 29, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46,
48, 50, 51, 56, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83
Update button.................................................. 139
Up Map Polling.................................................. 88
Up Map Polling................................................ 136
Update
Controller ...................................................... 98
release notes .............................................. 225
Update................. 5, 10, 26, 51, 64, 76, 80, 81, 86
Update Database Table .................................. 172
Update Device................................................... 26
Type ALL
viewing files.................................................. 85
Update Excel Spreadsheet button .................. 124
Type ALL .......................................................... 85
Update History
IQCentral ........................................................ 5
Type Polling ............................................ 172, 174
Update History .................................................... 5
293
Update Sign and/or Save
choose ........................................................ 120
Update Sign and/or Save ................................ 120
open ............................................................213
User Maintenance ...........................................213
Updated polling ................................................. 10
User Management
choosing......................................................213
Upload Download Module ................................. 95
User Management ...............................8, 211, 212
Upload/download window ................................. 10
User Name ..........................................10, 33, 211
Uploading/Downloading .................................... 53
User Password
Setting.........................................................214
USB ................................................................. 240
Use files
type ............................................................... 85
User Password ................................................214
Use files ............................................................ 85
User-customizable application.........................227
Use Fixed .......................................................... 65
Users list..........................................................205
UseDefault ...................................................... 134
Users watch.....................................................165
User
Managing .................................................... 212
Using
Alarm Configuration Window ......................190
Alarm Status Window..................................195
BlockBuilder Module ...................................232
Device Groups window .................................48
Font Editor Interface ...................................117
Interface ..........................................................7
IQCentral.......................................................53
Layers .........................................................148
Mouse ...........................................................14
Polling Assistant..........................................195
Scheduler Interface.....................................182
User................................................................. 212
User................................................................. 213
User................................................................. 224
User Access Levels............................... 10, 34, 36
User Accounts
Adding................................. 212, 213, 214, 215
Deleting............................... 212, 213, 214, 215
Managing ...................... 8, 9, 36, 122, 211, 212
remove........................................................ 212
Select.......................................................... 214
User Administration
choosing ..................................................... 212
open.................................................... 212, 214
Opens ........................................................... 10
selecting...................................................... 212
User Administration menu displays................. 216
User Administration Module ..... 10, 212, 213, 214,
215
User Administration submenu ......................... 212
User Comments
open............................................................ 224
Opens ..................................................... 10, 34
selecting...................................................... 224
User Comments ................................................ 10
User Comments ................................................ 34
User Comments .............................................. 221
User Comments .............................................. 224
User Comments Module ................................. 224
User Icon ........................................................... 33
User losing ...................................................... 216
User Maintenance
294
User-customizable...........................................227
Using Groups.............................47, 48, 50, 51, 52
Using IQCentral ...............................................109
Using Maps..................................................1, 131
Using Multisonics Hardware ..............................56
Using Peek Hardware........................................65
Using Traconex Hardware.................................80
Using Transyt Hardware....................................80
USTraffic..........................................................240
Utilizing
Log Polling ..................................................161
Map Polling .................................................161
Message Sign Scheduling ..........................161
Utilizing ............................................................161
V
V1.4 .................................................................216
V2.22 ...............................................................178
V2.8.2 ..............................................................178
V3.6.2 ..............................................................178
Value
Cycle Timer ...................................................85
Editing ...........................................................92
Index
WidthFrom.................................................. 134
View menu .............................. 157, 158, 159, 224
Value................................... 10, 32, 34, 45, 51, 83
View Name.............................................. 144, 145
Values set ....................................................... 134
View Recorded................................................ 120
Variable Message Sign.... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55,
81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116,
118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178,
182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,
237, 238, 240
View Recorded Events
viewing........................................................ 120
Veh Assignments.............................................. 65
View Recorded Events.................................... 120
Vehicle ................................................................ 4
Vehicle Detectors.............................................. 76
View, Management ............................................. 5
Vehicle Omit ..................................................... 65
Viewing files
type ALL ....................................................... 85
Verification .......... 10, 34, 118, 129, 139, 150, 176
Verify
Amber Alert ................................................ 128
Viewing files ...................................................... 85
Visual Settings ................................................ 202
Verify... 36, 39, 40, 45, 48, 52, 101, 104, 118, 120
Vol Log Sample Period ..................................... 65
Verify button.................................................... 129
Vol/Occ.............................................................. 76
Verify OID
Device Type ............................................... 169
Vol/Occ Report.................................................. 76
Verify OID ....................................................... 169
Volume ...................................................... 76, 165
Version 1.5............................................ 5, 47, 189
VSL ................................................................. 159
Vertical.............................................................. 38
Vol/Occ Setup ................................................... 76
Vertical Border ................................................ 113
W
Vertical Pitch................................................... 113
Wag................................................................... 65
Vertically
Tiling............................................................. 15
Wait
Connection ................................................... 45
Vertically ........................................................... 10
Walk ........ 56, 65, 76, 83, 104, 118, 128, 176, 240
Vertically ........................................................... 15
Walk Rest Modifier .................................... 65, 240
Video Configuration .......................................... 34
Warning..................................................... 29, 202
Video Connections.................................... 24, 103
Warning Alarm
Typical Settings .......................................... 202
View
Alarm Details ................................................ 29
Data Manager Quick History ........................ 26
Device Connection Details ........................... 30
Device's NTCIP Status................................. 37
List.............................................................. 122
Map View ................................................... 133
NTCIP Server Quick History ........................ 28
Status ................................................. 157, 158
View Recorded Events............................... 120
Warning Alarm .................................................. 29
Warning Alarm ................................................ 202
Warning settings ............................................. 202
Watchdog ................................................ 237, 240
Wav file ........................................................... 202
Ways
couple ................................................... 81, 157
View ........................................................ 5, 10, 19
Ways ..................................... 1, 15, 33, 47, 48, 81
View By Type Display ..................................... 190
Ways ................................................................. 81
View Maps
Opens........................................................... 10
Weather Station ...................................... 152, 159
View Maps ........................................................ 10
Weather View.................................................. 159
View Maps ...................................................... 159
Weed
Weather Status ............................................... 159
295
Spring ........................................................... 56
Windows Services tool ......................................28
Weed................................................................. 56
With
Interacting .....................................................98
Week ................................................... 56, 65, 184
Week Plans ................................................. 56, 65
Weekly .................................................... 107, 184
Welcome
IQCentral ........................................................ 1
IQCentral Operating Manual........................... 1
With Maps........................................................133
Wmf ...................................................................85
Word ................................................109, 205, 208
Word file
save ............................................................208
Welcome ............................................................. 1
Word file ..........................................................205
Westbound Thru................................................ 56
Word file ..........................................................208
Which fails
indicate ....................................................... 234
Word window ...........................................205, 208
Which fails ....................................................... 234
Which generates ............................................. 235
Working
3000E TS2 ..................................................165
Controller assigned .........................53, 88, 136
TS2 .............................................................165
Which manipulates
data..................................................... 123, 124
WRM................................................................240
Which manipulates .......................................... 123
Www.peektraffic.com.........................................55
Which manipulates .......................................... 124
Www.quixtraffic.com......................................4, 55
Which responds
calling.......................................................... 233
X
Which responds .............................................. 233
Which senses
controller ............................................. 234, 240
Which senses.................................................. 234
Which senses.................................................. 240
Why ......................................................... 169, 207
WidthFrom
values ......................................................... 134
WidthFrom....................................................... 134
WidthNamesFrom ........................................... 134
WidthNamesTo ............................................... 134
WidthShapeFrom ............................................ 134
WidthShapeTo ................................................ 134
WidthTo
100.............................................................. 134
set ............................................................... 134
WidthTo........................................................... 134
XML .........................................................186, 208
XON Char ..........................................................56
XPed..................................................................65
Y
Y/N.....................................................................65
Year ...................................................................65
Year Plans ...................................................56, 65
Yellow 56, 65, 76, 83, 95, 197, 202, 233, 234, 237
Yellow Arrow Omit .............................................56
Yellow Limit .......................................................56
Yellow Overlap ..................................................83
Yes ....................................39, 120, 150, 163, 212
Yes/No...................................................56, 65, 76
Yield Percentage ...............................................65
Yield, Single.......................................................92
Wig .................................................................... 65
Your Own Password
Changing.....................................................215
Window hosting............................................... 216
Your Own Password........................................215
Window menu ............................................. 10, 15
Your Password
Changing.................................................8, 213
Windows............................................................ 15
Windows Paint ................................................ 229
Windows Scheduler ................................ 184, 186
Windows Service......................... 26, 28, 178, 189
296
Your Password ....................................................8
Your Password ................................................213
Your Password ................................................214
Index
Z
Zones................................................ 10, 103, 105
Zoom
Select ........................................................... 81
set .............................................................. 153
Zoom Level ..................................................... 153
Zoom Level ..................................................... 236
Zoom Level ..................................................... 240
Zoom level display
another ......................................................... 81
Zoom............................................... 10, 34, 53, 81
Zoom level display ............................................ 81
Zoom................................................................. 81
Zoom Level Icons
Configuring ................................................. 131
Managing.................................................... 152
Zoom Areas
editing......................................................... 139
Zoom Areas .................................................... 139
Zoom Level
exit.............................................................. 153
Zoom Level ........................... 10, 81, 83, 145, 152
Zoom Level Icons associatedwith ........... 236, 240
Zoom level increases
number ......................................................... 83
Zoom level increases ........................................ 83
297
298
Peek Traffic Corporation
2511 Corporate Way
Palmetto, FL 34221
ph: (941) 845-1200
toll free in U.S.: (800) 245-7660
fax: (941) 845-1504
email: tech.support@peektraffic.com
81-1105
81-1105

IQ Central Operating Manual

Transcription

Similar documents

Hotmail/Live/ MSN/Outlook.com

Improved Silent Alert SA3000 System with Pager and SignWave

- Saurashtra University

Burglar Alarm Permit Form - Palm Beach County Sheriff`s Office

Time Sheet Reminder

Disney Princess Magic Wand Laptop

Sirius Satellite Radio Operations

Datability Directions

HALOGUARD® III